Contents
Safety Information and Introduction ............2
AV RECEIVER
Table of Contents...........................................6
Connections .................................................14
Turning On & Basic Operations..................25
Playback........................................................33
Advanced Operations ..................................57
Controlling Other Components...................87
Appendix.......................................................96
TX-NR929
Instruction Manual
Internet Radio Guide
Remote Control Codes
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
interference in a residential installation. This
extended period, remove the power cord from the
AC outlet.
5. Preventing Hearing Loss
Precautions
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following
measures:
–Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
–Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver.
–Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal
use only, recording copyrighted material is illegal
without the permission of the copyright holder.
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact
your Onkyo dealer.
Caution
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and
headphones can cause hearing loss.
6. Batteries and Heat Exposure
Warning
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall
not be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine,
fire or the like.
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a
soft cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild
detergent and water. Dry the unit immediately
afterwards with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive
cloths, thinners, alcohol, or other chemical
solvents, because they may damage the finish or
remove the panel lettering.
7. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets
inside this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo
dealer.
8. Handling Notes
4. Power
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original
packaging to pack it how it was when you
originally bought it.
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit
for a long time, because they may leave marks
on the case.
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm
after prolonged use. This is normal.
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so
be sure to use it occasionally.
WARNING
–Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION
CAREFULLY.
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear
panel (e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas
produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil
doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this
unit from the AC power source. Make sure that
the plug is readily operable (easily accessible) at
all times.
For U.S. and Canadian models
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For models with [POWER] button, or with both
[POWER] and [ON/STANDBY] buttons:
Pressing the [POWER] button to select OFF
mode does not fully disconnect from the mains. If
you do not intend to use the unit for an extended
period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
compromettre le fonctionnement.
Note:
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful
For models with [ON/STANDBY] button only:
Pressing the [ON/STANDBY] button to select
Standby mode does not fully disconnect from the
mains. If you do not intend to use the unit for an
En-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
RF Exposure Compliance
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
Modèle pour les Canadien
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME
NMB-003 DU CANADA.
IMPORTANT
The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse
needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must
approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the
same ampere rating as that indicated on the plug.
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the
body of the fuse.
If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket
outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable
fuse in the plug.
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65
and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of
RF energy that it deemed to comply without
maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
But it is desirable that it should be installed and
operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more
away from person’s body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS
ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE
CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.
For British models
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the
power supply cord of this unit should be performed
only by qualified service personnel.
For European Models
Declaration of Conformity
We declare, under our sole
responsibility, that this product
complies with the standards:
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition
aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement
non contrôlé et respecte les régles les
radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices
d’exposition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et
d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF)
CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie
RF trés faible qui est considérée conforme sans
évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé
en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le
dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des
extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
IMPORTANT
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in
accordance with the following code:
Blue: Neutral
–Safety
–Limits and methods of
measurement of radio disturbance characteristics
–Limits for harmonic current emissions
–Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations
and flicker
–RoHS Directive, 2011/65/EU
–Hereby, Onkyo Corporation, declares that this
TX-NR929 is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC.
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,
proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured black.
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected
to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured red.
For Canadian Models
–С настоящето, Onkyo Corporation, декларира, че
TX-NR929 е в съответствие със съществените
изисквания и другитеприложими разпоредби на
Директива 1999/5/EC.
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
For models having a power cord with a polarized
plug:
–Onkyo Corporation tímto prohlašuje, že TX-NR929
splňuje základní požadavky a všechna příslušná
ustanoveni Směrnice 1999/5/ES.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.
–Undertegnede Onkyo Corporation erklærer herved,
at følgende udstyr TX-NR929 overholder de
væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv
1999/5/EF.
En-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
–Hiermit erklärt Onkyo Corporation, dass sich das
Gerät TX-NR929 in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen
einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie
1999/5/EG befindet.
essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalin-
gen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
23764/SDPPI/2012
2371
Complies with
IDA Standards
DA106032
–Niniejszym Onkyo Corporation deklaruje że
TX-NR929 jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymaganiami i innymi właściwymi
TA-20120424004
TRA
–Käesolevaga kinnitab Onkyo Corporation seadme
TX-NR929 vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele
teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
REGISTERED No
ER0086260/12
–Eu, Onkyo Corporation, declaro que o TX-NR929
cumpre os requisitos essenciais e outras provisões
relevantes da Directiva 1999/5/EC.
527090
No
–ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Ο ΚΑΤΑΣΚΕΥΑΣΤΗΣ Onkyo
Corporation ∆ΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ TX-NR929
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩ∆ΕΙΣ
ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ
∆ΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ Ο∆ΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ
–Prin prezenta, Onkyo Corporation, declară că
aparatul TX-NR929 este în conformitate cu
cerinţele esenţiale şi cu alte prevederi pertinente
ale Directivei 1999/5/CE.
Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV
Receiver. Please read this manual thoroughly
before making connections and plugging in the
Following the instructions in this manual will
enable you to obtain optimum performance and
listening enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.
Please retain this manual for future reference.
–Onkyo Corporation týmto vyhlasuje, že TX-NR929
a spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné
ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
–Por la presente, Onkyo Corporation, declara que
este TX-NR929 cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y otras exigencias relevantes de la
Directiva 1999/5/EC.
–Onkyo Corporation izjavlja, da je ta TX-NR929 v
skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in drugimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
–Par la présente, Onkyo Corporation déclare que
l’appareil TX-NR929 est conforme aux exigences
essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes
de la directive 1999/5/CE.
–Onkyo Corporation vakuuttaa täten että TX-NR929
tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten
vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden
ehtojen mukainen.
Supplied Accessories
–Con la presente Onkyo Corporation dichiara che
questo TX-NR929 è conforme ai requisiti essenziali
ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla
direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Make sure you have the following accessories:
–Härmed förklarar Onkyo Corporation att denna
TX-NR929 följer de väsentliga kraven och andra
relevanta stadgar i Direktiv 1999/5/EC.
Indoor FM antenna (➔ page 23)
AM loop antenna (➔ page 23)
Power cord (➔ page 25)
–Ar šo Onkyo Corporation deklarē, ka TX-NR929
atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām
un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
–Hér með lýsir Onkyo Corporation því yfir að varan
TX-NR929 er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Speaker cable labels (➔ page 15)
Speaker setup microphone (➔ page 29)
Remote controller (RC-840M) and two batteries (AA/R6)
(➔ page 13)
–Šiuo Onkyo Corporation deklaruoja, kad šis
TX-NR929 atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
–Onkyo Corporation erklærer herved at denne
TX-NR929 er i overensstemmelse med vesentlige
krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i direktiv
1999/5/EC.
Quick Start Guide
*
–A Onkyo Corporation ezzennel kijelenti, hogy a
TX-NR929 típusú beren-dezés teljesíti az alapvető
követelményeket és más 1999/5/EK irányelvben
meghatározott vonatkozó rendelkezéseket.
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the
product name indicates the color. Specifications and
operations are the same regardless of color.
–Hierbij verklaart Onkyo Corporation dat het toestel
l TX-NR929 in overeenstemming is met de
En-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
Using the Remote Controller in
Zone and Multiroom Control Kits ........................... 86
Table of Contents
Playback
Playback......................................................................33
Controlling Contents of USB or Network Devices.....34
Understanding Icons on the Display.........................35
Playing an Audio from Bluetooth-enabled Device ....35
Playing a USB Device...............................................36
Listening to TuneIn ...................................................36
Registering Other Internet Radio..............................38
Changing the Icon Layout
on the Network Service Screen..............................38
Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA) ..................38
Remote Playback......................................................41
Listening to AM/FM Radio ........................................42
Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources.....44
Using the Listening Modes .......................................45
Displaying Source Information..................................53
Using the Sleep Timer ..............................................53
Setting the Display Brightness..................................53
Changing the Input Display.......................................54
Muting the AV Receiver............................................54
Selecting Speaker Layout.........................................54
Using the Whole House Mode..................................54
Using Easy Macros...................................................55
Using the Home Menu..............................................56
Controlling Other Components
Safety Information and Introduction
Controlling Other Components................................. 87
Preprogrammed Remote Control Codes.................. 87
Looking up for Remote Control Codes ..................... 87
Entering Remote Control Codes............................... 87
Remapping Colored Buttons .................................... 88
Remote Control Codes
for Onkyo Components Connected via RI ............. 88
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons................... 88
Resetting the Remote Controller .............................. 89
Controlling Other Components................................. 89
Using the Onkyo Dock.............................................. 92
Controlling Your iPod/iPhone ................................... 93
Learning Commands ................................................ 94
Using Normal Macros............................................... 95
Important Safety Instructions......................................2
Precautions ...................................................................3
Supplied Accessories...................................................5
Table of Contents..........................................................6
Features.........................................................................7
Front & Rear Panels......................................................8
Front Panel..................................................................8
Rear Panel ................................................................11
Remote Controller.......................................................12
Controlling the AV Receiver......................................12
Connections
Connecting the AV Receiver......................................14
Connecting Your Speakers .......................................14
Connecting the TV/AV components..........................19
About RIHD...............................................................20
Connection Tips ........................................................21
Connecting the Antennas..........................................23
Connecting Onkyo RI Components...........................24
Using Headphones....................................................24
Appendix
Troubleshooting......................................................... 96
Firmware Update ...................................................... 104
About HDMI............................................................... 107
Network/USB Features............................................. 108
License and Trademark Information ...................... 110
Specifications........................................................... 112
Advanced Operations
Turning On & Basic Operations
To reset the AV receiver, see page 96.
On-screen Setup.........................................................57
Using the Quick Setup..............................................57
Using the Audio Settings of Quick Setup..................58
Using the Setup Menu (HOME)................................61
Setup Menu Items.....................................................61
1. Input/Output Assign ..............................................62
2. Speaker Setup......................................................64
3. Audio Adjust..........................................................69
5. Listening Mode Preset..........................................76
6. Miscellaneous.......................................................77
7. Hardware Setup....................................................78
8. Remote Controller Setup ......................................82
9. Lock Setup............................................................82
Multi Zone....................................................................83
Making Multi Zone Connections ...............................83
Controlling Multi Zone Components .........................84
Turning On/Off the AV Receiver................................25
Connecting the Power Cord......................................25
Turning On ................................................................25
Turning Off ................................................................25
Firmware Update Notification....................................26
About the HYBRID STANDBY indicator....................26
Initial Setup..................................................................26
for the On-screen Setup Menus .............................26
Audyssey MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup ........................26
Source Connection....................................................27
Remote Mode Setup.................................................27
Network Connection..................................................27
Terminating the Initial Setup .....................................27
Using the Automatic Speaker Setup .........................28
Performing Wireless LAN Setup ...............................31
En-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
Connections
Features
Amplifier
• 9 HDMI Inputs (1 on front panel) and 2 Outputs
• 4K (up-scaling and Passthrough)-compatible HDMI
Inputs
• 135 Watts/Channel @ 8 ohms (FTC)
• 185 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (IEC)
• 230 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (JEITA)
• WRAT–Wide Range Amplifier Technology
(5 Hz to 100 kHz bandwidth)
• Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry
• H.C.P.S. (High Current Power Supply) Massive
High Power Transformer
• Zone 2 HDMI Output
• Onkyo pfor System Control
• 6 Digital Inputs (3 Optical/3 Coaxial)
• Component Video Switching (2 Inputs/1 Output)
• Banana Plug-Compatible Speaker Posts
*
In Europe, using banana plugs to connect speakers to an
audio amplifier is prohibited.
• Powered Zone 2/3
• 3 Stage Inverted Darlington Amplifier Design
• Bi-Amping Capability for FL/FR with FHL/FHR
• Analog RGB Video Input (D-sub 15) for PC
• Internet Radio Connectivity
• Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files
• Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Connectivity
• Wireless Music Playback via Bluetooth
• Front-Panel USB Input for Memory Devices
• MHL-Enabled AUX Front Input
Processing
• THX Select2 Plus Certified
• Incorporates Qdeo™ technology for HDMI Video
Upscaling (to 4K Compatible)
• HDMI (Audio Return Channel, 3D, DeepColor,
x.v.Color, Lip Sync, 4K (up-scaling and
Passthrough), DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DSD and Multi-CH PCM)
Miscellaneous
• Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio
• 40 FM/AM Presets
®
®
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz and Audyssey DSX
• Audyssey MultEQ XT32 to correct room acoustic
problems
• DTS Neo:X
®
• Audyssey Dynamic EQ for loudness correction
• Non-Scaling Configuration
• A-Form Listening Mode Memory
• Direct Mode
®
• Audyssey Dynamic Volume to maintain optimal
listening level and dynamic range
• Crossover Adjustment
• Pure Audio Mode
(40/50/60/70/80/90/100/120/150/200 Hz)
• A/V Sync Control Function (up to 800 ms)
• Auto Standby Function
• Music Optimizer for Compressed Digital Music files
• Phase Matching Bass System
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A Converters
• Powerful and Highly Accurate 32-bit Processing
DSP
• On-Screen Display via HDMI
• Preprogrammed (with onscreen display setup)
RI-Compatible Learning Remote with 4 Activities
and Mode-Key LEDs
• Jitter Cleaning Circuit Technology
• Digital Processing Crossover Network
• ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) Video Calibration
En-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
For detailed information, see the pages in
parentheses.
k PHONES jack (24)
l BLUETOOTH button (35, 81)
m ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 buttons (84)
n TONE and Tone Level buttons (58, 59)
o MONITOR OUT button (62)
p DISPLAY button (53)
b Remote control sensor (13)
q TUNING q/w(42), PRESET e/r(42), cursor
and enter (middle) buttons
53)
r DIMMER button (North American models) (53)
g HYBRID STANDBY indicator (26)
t TUNING MODE button (42)
u LISTENING MODE buttons (45)
w SETUP MIC jack (29)
j Front flap
Gently push on the lower end of the front panel to
open the flap.
x QUICK SETUP button (57)
y HOME button (56)
z RETURN button
A USB port (36)
B AUX INPUT jacks (20)
C RT/PTY/TP button (European and Australian
models) (43)
En-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
Display
s
a
b c d e f
g
h
i
j
k l
m
n
o
p q
For detailed information, see the pages in
parentheses.
i Input indicators (22)
HDMI indicator (78)
DIGITAL indicator
a Speaker/channel indicators
b Z2 (Zone 2) indicator (84)
ANALOG indicator
j Bi AMP indicator
c Z3 (Zone 3) indicator (84)
d Listening mode and format indicators (45, 76)
e M.Opt (Music Optimizer) indicator (60)
f 1, 3and cursor indicators (36)
g NET indicator (36 to 40, 81)
h Tuning indicators
l Headphone indicator (24)
n MUTING indicator (54)
RDS indicator (excluding North American
models) (43)
AUTO indicator (42)
p USB indicator (36)
TUNED indicator (42)
FM STEREO indicator (42)
En-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
e Composite video and analog audio jacks
Rear Panel
(BD/DVD IN, CBL/SAT IN, STB/DVR IN, GAME 1
IN, PC IN, TV/CD IN, PHONO IN)
ab
cd
e
f
g h i d j k l
m
f HDMI IN and HDMI output (HDMI OUT MAIN and
HDMI OUT SUB/ZONE 2) jacks
g COMPONENT VIDEO IN and MONITOR OUT
jacks
i ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 12V TRIGGER OUT jacks
j ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 LINE OUT jacks
k FM ANTENNA jack and AM ANTENNA terminal
l PC IN jack
n DIGITAL IN COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks
o GND screw
p MONITOR OUT V jack
q PRE OUT jacks
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK
L/R, FRONT HIGH L/R, FRONT WIDE L/R,
SUBWOOFER)
no
p
q
r
r Speaker terminals
See “Connecting the AV Receiver” for connection
(➔ pages 14 to 24).
d Wireless antenna
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK
L/R, FRONT HIGH/ZONE 3 L/R and FRONT
WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R)
When the AV receiver is connected to the network
by wireless, adjust the position of the antenna
(➔ pages 31, 35).
a u REMOTE CONTROL jack
b ETHERNET port
90°
c RS232 port
90°
Terminal for control.
180°
180°
En-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
■ Controlling the tuner
To control the AV receiver’s tuner, press TUNER (or
RECEIVER).
You can select AM or FM by pressing TUNER
repeatedly.
For detailed information, see the pages in
parentheses.
Remote Controller
a 8RECEIVER button (25)
Controlling the AV Receiver
b ACTIVITIES buttons (55, 95)
To control the AV receiver, press RECEIVER to
select Receiver mode.
c REMOTE MODE/INPUT SELECTOR buttons
b D.TUN button (42)
d CH +/– button (43)
e Number buttons (42)
(33)
d SP (speaker layout) button (54)
e q/w/e/rand ENTER buttons
f Q SETUP button (57)
g Listening Mode buttons (45)
h DIMMER button (53)
j MUTING button (54)
k VOL q/wbutton (33)
l RETURN button
a*2
c*2
i
c
*1
When you want to change the remote controller mode
(target component) without changing the current input
source, press MODE and within about 8 seconds, press
REMOTE MODE. Then, using the same AV receiver’s
remote controller, you can control the component
corresponding to the button you pressed.
j*2
k*2
*1
RECEIVER
*2
These buttons can also be used when a REMOTE
MODE other than Receiver mode is selected.
d
m HOME button (56)
d
e
n SLEEP button (53)
a
f
Tip
l
m
• You can also use the remote controller to control Onkyo
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, CD player, and other
components.
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for more details
(➔ page 87).
g
e
h
b
n
En-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
■ Aiming the remote controller
To use the remote controller, point it at the AV
receiver’s remote control sensor, as shown below.
Remote control sensor
AV receiver
Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)
■ Installing the batteries
Batteries (AA/R6)
Note
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try replacing
the batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of
batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long time,
remove the batteries to prevent damage from leakage or
corrosion.
• Remove expired batteries as soon as possible to prevent
damage from leakage or corrosion.
En-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
*1
By using a combination of the built-in power amplifier for
9-channel and an external power amplifier for 2-channel,
you can enjoy up to 11.1-channel playback.
Speaker Configuration
The following table indicates the channels you should
use depending on the number of speakers that you
have.
Using Powered Subwoofers
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered
subwoofer is recommended for a really powerful and
solid bass.
Connections
To get the best from your surround sound system,
you need to set the speaker settings automatically
(➔ page 28) or manually (➔ page 65).
Corner
position
Number of
speakers
2 3 4 5 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 10 11
Front
speakers
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔
✔
✔
Connecting the AV
Receiver
1/3 of wall
position
Center
speaker
✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
To find the best position for your subwoofer, while
playing a movie or some music with good bass,
experiment by placing your subwoofer at various
positions within the room, and choose the one that
provides the most satisfying results.
Surround
speakers
Connecting Your Speakers
Surround
back speaker
✔
✔ ✔
✔
ab
c IJ KL f
You can connect the powered subwoofer with two
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks respectively.
The same signal is output from each jack.
Surround
back
speakers
✔
✔ ✔
✔
✔
Front high
speakers
✔
✔
✔
✔ ✔
✔
✔
Tip
• If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re using an
external amplifier, connect the subwoofer pre out jack to an
input on the amplifier.
Front wide
speakers
✔
✔ ✔ ✔
Speaker Configuration
5.1-channel: abcdef
7.1-channel: abcdef+ G H
7.1-channel: abcdef+ I J
7.1-channel: abcdef+ K L
de GH
Front speakers
Center speaker
a b
c
9.1-channel: abcdef+ G H + I J
Surround speakers
Subwoofer(s)
de
f
9.1-channel: abcdef+ G H + K L
9.1-channel: abcdef+ I J + K L
Surround back speakers
Front high speakers
Front wide speakers
G H
I J
K L
*1
11.1-channel : abcdef
+
G H
+
I J
+
K L
En-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Attaching the Speaker Cable Labels
The speaker terminals are color-coded for
identification purpose.
Speaker
Color
Front left, Front high left, Front wide
left, Zone 2 left, Zone 3 left
White
Front right, Front high right, Front wide Red
right, Zone 2 right, Zone 3 right
Center
Green
Surround left
Blue
Gray
Brown
Tan
Surround right
Surround back left
Surround back right
The supplied speaker cable labels are also color-
coded and you should attach them to the positive (+)
side of each speaker cable in accordance with the
table above. Then all you need to do is to match the
color of each label to the corresponding speaker
terminal.
En-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. In
Connecting the Speaker Cables/Powered Subwoofers
other words, connect positive (+) terminals only to
positive (+) terminals, and negative (–) terminals
only to negative (–) terminals. If you get them the
wrong way around, the sound will be out of phase
and will sound unnatural.
Please connect a, b, c, d, eand ffor 5.1-channel surround.
■ 9.1-channel playback
In addition to 5.1-channel playback connection, if surround back, front high, and front wide speakers are
connected, selecting the speakers for 9.1-channel playback (surround back and front high, surround back and
front wide, or front high and front wide) is possible. You can set which speakers you want to use by priority. See
“Selecting Speaker Layout” (➔ page 54).
Before connecting the power cord, connect all of
your speakers and AV components. A setup wizard
is launched upon first-time use to let you perform
the settings (➔ page 26).
J
Front high
speaker R
L
Front wide
speaker R
b
Front
speaker R
a
Front
speaker L
K
Front wide
speaker L
I
Front high
speaker L
If you’re using only one
surround back speaker,
connect it to the SURR
BACK L terminals.
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.
• By default, speakers for 7.1-channel surround are
configured to use: front right/front left/center/
surround right/surround left/surround back right/
surround back left/subwoofer.
c
Center speaker
Red
Red
Red
Green
White
White
White
■ Screw-type speaker terminals
Strip 1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm) of insulation from the
ends of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires
tightly, as shown.
1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm)
■ Banana Plugs (North American models)
• If you are using banana plugs, tighten the speaker
terminal before inserting the banana plug.
• Do not insert the speaker code directly into the
center hole of the speaker terminal.
Gray
Tan
Brown
Blue
Powered
subwoofer
f
Powered
subwoofer
f
Surround
speaker R
e
Surround back
speaker R
H
Surround back
speaker L
G
Surround
speaker L
d
En-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ 11.1-channel playback
■ Speaker Connection Precautions
Bi-amping the Front Speakers
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure to
remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’ tweeter
(high) and woofer (low) terminals.
By using a combination of the built-in power amplifier
for 9-channel and an external power amplifier for
2-channel, you can enjoy up to 11.1-channel
playback. Connect the external power amplifier’s
analog audio input jacks to FRONT WIDE PRE OUT
of the AV receiver with audio cables. To perform the
11.1-channel playback, set the “11ch Playback”
setting to “Yes” (➔ page 65).
• You can connect speakers with an impedance of
between 4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of
the connected speakers is 4 ohms or more, but less
than 6 ohms, be sure to set the minimum speaker
impedance to “4ohms” (➔ page 65). If you use
speakers with a lower impedance, and use the
amplifier at high volume levels for a long period of
time, the built-in protection circuit may be activated.
• Unnecessarily long, or very thin speaker cables may
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.
• Be careful not to short the positive and negative
wires. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.
• Make sure the metal core of the wire does not have
contact with the AV receiver’s rear panel. Doing so
may damage the AV receiver.
• Bi-amping can be used only with speakers that support
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
Bi-amping provides improved bass and treble
performance.
When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to a 7.1 speaker system in the main room.
Perform bi-amping connections by using FRONT
below.
Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections
and turned on the AV receiver, you must set the
speaker setting to enable bi-amping (➔ page 65).
Power amplifier
• Don’t connect more than one cable to each speaker
terminal. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.
• Don’t connect one speaker to several terminals.
Front wide
speaker R
Front wide
speaker L
Tweeter (high)
Woofer (low)
Note
• If the “11ch Playback” setting is set to “Yes”, no sound is
output from the FRONT WIDE terminals.
Front right
Front left
En-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Using Speakers Without Crossover Network
Important:
• Speakers without crossover network are speakers with no built-in crossover network.
• With speakers without crossover network, be careful NOT to connect tweeters and
woofers the wrong way around, as this may damage your speakers.
• With speakers without crossover network, be careful NOT to set “Speakers Type(Front)”
to “Bi-Amp” as this may damage your speakers. Make sure that this setting is set to
“Digital Crossover”.
Using Dipole Speakers
You can use dipole speakers for the surround and
surround back speakers. Dipole speakers output the
same sound in two directions.
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on
them to indicate how they should be positioned. The
surround dipole speakers (a) should be positioned so
the surround back dipole speakers (b) should be
positioned so that their arrows point toward each
other, as shown.
TV/screen
• Confirm that your speakers are without crossover network by referring to your speaker
manual.
a
a
Connecting speakers without crossover network provide a fine, three-dimensional
sound field that extends bass and treble performance to the fullest extent. When
speakers without crossover network are used, the AV receiver is able to drive up
to a 7.1 speaker system in the main room.
b
b
(low) terminals, and FRONT HIGH (HIGH FREQUENCY) terminals and the
speaker’s Tweeter (high) terminals as shown below.
You must enable “Digital Crossover” in “Speakers Type(Front)” (➔ page 65)
and make the settings of “Digital Processing Crossover Network” (➔ page 68).
Connecting a Power Amplifier
You can use the AV receiver as a preamp. Connect all speaker outputs to the
power amplifier. See the manuals supplied with your amplifier for details.
Note
• You need to make the setting before connecting the speakers.
Power amplifier
Tweeter (high)
Woofer (low)
Note
• Specify “None” for any channel that you don’t want to output (➔ page 65).
• To perform the 11.1-channel playback, set the “11ch Playback” setting to “Yes”
(➔ page 65).
Front right
Front left
En-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Use this jack to connect to the game consoles,
etc.
E
G
Connecting the TV/AV components
Use this port to connect to a LAN port on a router
so the AV receiver can be connected to your
home network.
Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your speakers and AV components. To display the setup
menu on the TV screen, connecting the TV to HDMI OUT MAIN is required.
F
G
I
J
E
D
C
B
A H
Use jack and terminal here to connect the
supplied FM antenna and AM loop antenna.
H
I
Use this jack to make connections using an
analog audio cable.
With this connection, you can also enjoy analog
audio from external components while you are in
Zone 2/3.
Use this jack to make connections using a
component video cable.
K
Use this jack to connect to the camcorder/MHL-
enabled mobile device, etc.
Tip
If you select the input selector button, the signal from
the component connected to the assigned jack is
played.
Connections
• To listen to the audio of a component connected via HDMI
through your TV’s speakers, enable “HDMI Through”
(➔ page 78) and set the AV receiver to standby mode.
• In the case of Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, if no sound is
output despite following the above-mentioned procedure,
set your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s HDMI audio settings to
PCM.
• Connect a turntable (MM) that has a built-in phono preamp
to TV/CD IN, or connect it to PHONO IN with the phono
preamp turned off. If your turntable (MM) doesn’t have a
phono preamp, connect it to PHONO IN. If your turntable
has a moving coil (MC) type cartridge, you’ll need a
commercially available MC head amp or MC transformer to
connect to PHONO IN. See your turntable’s manual for
details. If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the
AV receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables,
connecting the ground wire may produce an audible hum. If
this happens, disconnect it.
Use this jack to connect to the HDMI input of the
TV. If your TV doesn’t support Audio Return
A
*1
Channel (ARC) , you need to connect an optical
digital cable together with the HDMI cable to jack
F.
Another TV can be connected to the HDMI OUT
SUB jack.
Input selector
buttons
*1
ARC is the function that carries the audio signal
from the TV to jack A. With ARC, a single HDMI
cable can connect the TV and the AV receiver.
B C D E
K
• Before making any AV connections, read the
manuals supplied with your AV components.
• Push plugs in all the way to make good connections
(loose connections can cause noise or
malfunctions).
Use this jack to connect to your Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player, etc.
B
C
D
Use this jack to connect to the Satellite/cable set-
top box, etc.
• To prevent interference, keep audio and video
cables away from power cords and speaker cables.
• If you connect your personal computer to PC IN (Analog
RGB), you must assign “- - - - -” to the “PC” input selector
(➔ pages 63, 64).
Use this jack to connect to the set top box/digital
video recorder, etc.
En-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ MHL (Mobile High-Definition Link)
Network connection by wireless LAN is possible. See
“Performing Wireless LAN Setup” for connections
(➔ page 31).
About RIHD
With its support for MHL (Mobile High-Definition Link),
the AUX (Front) input allows you to deliver high-
definition video from a connected mobile device.
The AV receiver allows interoperability of the CEC
(Consumer Electronics Control) specified in the HDMI
standard, which is known as RIHD. Various linked
operations can be performed by connecting the AV
receiver to an RIHD-compatible TV, player, or
recorder.
Internet radio
K
Router
WAN
LAN
MHL
OUT
Modem
Default setting is set to off, so it is required to change
the setting to on.
MHL-enabled mobile device, etc.
Perform this setting after the initial setup.
Connecting to the Network (Optional)
About p-compatible components
■ TV
• Sharp TV
Computer or media server
The following diagram shows how you can connect
the AV receiver to your home network. In this
example, it’s connected to a LAN port on a router,
which has a 4-port 100Base-TX switch built-in.
Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB
port on your computer. Music on your computer
cannot be played through the AV receiver in this way.
(As of January 2013).
The default of the assignment for the input selector buttons and jacks are as shown below. These settings can
be changed. (The assignment for the composite video jacks, analog audio jacks, DIGITAL AUX INPUT jack and
HDMI AUX INPUT jack cannot be changed.)
■ Players/Recorders
• Onkyo and Integra p-compatible players
• Toshiba players and recorders
• Sharp players and recorders (only when used
together with Sharp TV)
Input selector buttons HDMI jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL IN COAXIAL Composite video and
jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL IN
IN 1 COAXIAL 1
COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL IN
and OPTICAL jacks
analog audio jacks
*
BD/DVD
CBL/SAT
STB/DVR
GAME 1
HDMI IN 1
HDMI IN 2
HDMI IN 3
HDMI IN 4
VIDEO/AUDIO IN
BD/DVD
Models other than those mentioned above may have some
interoperability if compatible with CEC, which is part of the
HDMI Standard, but operation cannot be guaranteed.
VIDEO/AUDIO IN
CBL/SAT
IN 2
COAXIAL 2
Note
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL 3
VIDEO/AUDIO IN
STB/DVR
• For proper linked operations, do not connect more
p-compatible components than the quantities
specified below, to the HDMI input terminal.
–Blu-ray Disc/DVD players: up to three.
–Blu-ray Disc/DVD recorders/Digital Video Recorders: up
to three.
DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL 1
VIDEO/AUDIO IN
GAME 1
GAME 2
PC
HDMI IN 5
HDMI IN 6
AUDIO IN PC
–Cable/Satellite Set-top boxes: up to four.
• Do not connect the AV receiver to another AV receiver/AV
amplifier via HDMI.
• Proper linked operations are not guaranteed when more
p-compatible components than the above-
mentioned quantities are connected.
AUX
HDMI AUX INPUT
DIGITAL AUX INPUT VIDEO/AUDIO AUX
INPUT
TV/CD
DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL 2
AUDIO IN TV/CD
PHONO
AUDIO IN PHONO
En-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
• On the TV, when you select anything other than the HDMI
jack to which the AV receiver is connected, the input on the
AV receiver will be switched to “TV/CD”.
• The AV receiver will automatically power on in conjunction
when it determines it to be necessary. Even if the AV
receiver is connected to an pcompatible TV or
player/recorder, it will not power on if it is not necessary. It
may not power on in conjunction when the TV is set to
Operations that can be performed with
Confirm the settings
pconnection
1. Turn on the power for all connected components.
2. Turn off the power of the TV, and confirm that the
power of the connected components is turned off
automatically with the link operation.
3. Turn on the power of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player/recorder.
■ For p-compatible TV
The following linked operations are enabled by
connecting the AV receiver to an p-compatible
TV.
• The AV receiver will enter standby mode when the
TV is set to standby.
4. Start playback on the Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player/recorder, and verify the following:
• The AV receiver automatically turns on, and
selects the input to which the Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player/recorder is connected.
• The TV automatically turns on, and selects the
input to which the AV receiver is connected.
5. Following the operating instructions of the TV,
select “Use the TV speakers” from the menu
screen of the TV, and confirm that the audio is
output from the speakers of the TV, and not from
the speakers connected to the AV receiver.
6. Select “Use the speakers connected from the AV
receiver” from the menu screen of the TV, and
confirm that the audio is output from the speakers
connected to the AV receiver, and not from the TV
speakers.
• Linked functions with the AV receiver may not work
depending on the component model connected. In such
cases, operate the AV receiver directly.
• You can set on the menu screen of the TV to either
output the audio from the speakers connected to the
AV receiver, or from the speakers of the TV.
• It is possible to output the audio coming from the
tuner or auxiliary input of your TV to the speakers of
the AV receiver. (A connection such as an optical
digital cable or similar is required in addition to the
HDMI cable.)
• Input to the AV receiver can be selected with the
remote controller of the TV.
• Operations such as volume adjustment or similar for
the AV receiver can be performed from the remote
controller of the TV.
Connection Tips
The video and audio signal flow
Connect the AV receiver between the AV
components and the TV. The signal from the AV
components is carried through the AV receiver. You
can enjoy the audio of the TV through the AV
receiver.
Blu-ray Disc/
■ For p-compatible players/recorders
The following linked operations are enabled by
connecting the AV receiver to an p-compatible
player/recorder.
DVD player, etc.
AV receiver
Note
• Audio from DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD may not output
from the TV speakers. You will be able to output the audio
from the TV speakers by setting the audio output of the
DVD player to 2ch PCM. (It may not be possible depending
on the player models.)
• Even if you set to output audio on the TV speakers, audio
will be output from the speakers connected to the AV
receiver when you adjust the volume or switch the input on
the AV receiver. To output audio from the TV speakers, re-
do the corresponding operations on the TV.
Audio
• When playback is started on the player/recorder, AV
receiver will switch to the HDMI input of the
player/recorder that is playing back.
Video, audio
TV, projector, etc.
Video components can be connected by using any
one of the following video connection formats:
composite video, PC IN (Analog RGB), component
video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture
quality.
• Operation of the player/recorder is possible using
the remote controller supplied with the AV receiver.
*
Depending on the model used, not all operations may be
available.
• In case of an pconnection with uand uaudio
control compatible components, do not connect the u
cable at the same time.
Note
• Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD selector at this
time, otherwise appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics
Control) operation will not be guaranteed.
En-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
*2
This is possible when “Audio Return Channel” is set to
“Auto” (➔ page 79), the TV/CD input selector is
selected, and your TV is ARC capable.
Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as
shown, with composite video, PC IN (Analog RGB),
and component video sources all being upconverted
for the HDMI output(s).
Signal Selection Example
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
Tip
Composite
Component
HDMI
• When a signal is input via HDMI and the corresponding
input selector is selected, the HDMI indicator lights. In the
case of an optical or coaxial connection, the DIGITAL
indicator lights. If the analog audio is output, or if neither
indicator lights.
IN
Video Signal Flow Chart
AV receiver
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
MONITOR OUT
Component
Composite
Composite
HDMI
PC IN
Component
HDMI
(Analog RGB)
IN
AV receiver
AV Cables and Jacks
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends
that video signals pass through the system without
upconversion (e.g., component video input passing
through to component video output).
MONITOR OUT
Component
Composite
HDMI
■ HDMI
HDMI connections can carry digital video and audio.
TV, projector, etc.
• To by-pass the upconversion, set the “Picture
Mode” setting to “Bypass” (➔ page 74).
The composite video and component video outputs
pass through their respective input signals as they are.
Audio components can be connected by using any of
the following audio connection formats: analog,
optical, coaxial, or HDMI.
When choosing a connection format, bear in mind
that the AV receiver does not convert digital input
signals for analog line outputs and vice versa.
■ Component video
■ Signal Selection
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and
color difference signals (PB, PR), providing the best
picture quality (some TV manufacturers label their
component video sockets slightly differently).
If signals are present at more than one input, the
inputs will be selected automatically in the following
order of priority: HDMI, component video, composite
video.
Green
Blue
Y
However, for component video only, regardless of
whether a component video signal is actually present,
if a component video input is assigned to the input
selector, that component video input will be selected.
And if no component video input is assigned to the
input selector, this will be interpreted as no
component video signal being present.
In the Signal Selection Example shown below, video
signals are present at both the HDMI and composite
video inputs. However, the HDMI signal is
automatically selected as the source and the video is
output by the HDMI outputs.
If signals are present at more than one input, the
inputs will be selected automatically in the following
order of priority: HDMI, digital, analog.
C
B/PB
C
R/PR
Red
Audio Signal Flow Chart
■ Analog RGB
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
This is a conventional analog interface to connect a
PC and a display device (also called D-Sub or
D-subminiature).
Analog
Optical
Coaxial
*1
HDMI
IN
*1
*1
AV receiver
OUT
HDMI
*1
*2
TV, projector, etc.
*1
Depends on the “Audio TV Out (Main)” or “Audio TV
Out (Sub)” setting (➔ page 79).
En-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Composite video
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, DVDs,
and other video equipment.
Connecting the Antennas
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna.
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without any antenna connected, so you must connect the
antenna to use the tuner.
Yellow
■ Optical digital audio
Optical digital connections allow you to enjoy digital
sound such as PCM , Dolby Digital or DTS. The
audio quality is the same as coaxial.
(North American
models)
(European and
Australian models)
*1
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
Push.
Insert wire.
Release.
■ Coaxial digital audio
Coaxial digital connections allow you to enjoy digital
*1
sound such as PCM , Dolby Digital or DTS. The
audio quality is the same as optical.
Assembling the AM loop antenna
Caution
• Be careful not to injure
yourself when using
thumbtacks.
Orange
Thumbtacks, etc.
■ Analog audio (RCA)
Analog audio connections (RCA) carry analog audio.
White
Red
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Indoor FM antenna (supplied)
*1
For PCM signals, the supported sampling rates are
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz. With HDMI connections, 176.4
and 192 kHz are also supported.
Note
• Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll need to tune into a radio station and position the antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
• Keep the AM loop antenna as far away as possible from your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power cords.
Note
• The AV receiver does not support SCART plugs.
• The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type
covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and close
Tip
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna
instead.
Caution
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commercially available
outdoor AM antenna.
• To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical plug
straight when inserting and removing.
En-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting Onkyo RI Components
Using Headphones
Make sure that each Onkyo component is
Connect a pair of stereo headphones with a
standard plug (1/4 inch or ø 6.3 mm) to the
PHONES jack.
1
1
connected with an analog audio cable
(connection I in the hookup examples)
(➔ page 19).
While the headphones plug is inserted in the
PHONES jack, =indicator, speaker/channel
indicator FL and FR lights.
Make the uconnection (see the illustration).
2
3
If you’re using an RI Dock, or cassette tape
Note
deck, change the Input Display (➔ page 54).
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES
jack, the speakers are turned off. (The Zone 2/3
speakers are not turned off.)
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio.
With u(Remote Interactive), you can use the
R
L
following special functions:
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
e.g., cassette tape deck
■ System On/Auto Power On
When you start playback on a component connected
via u, while the AV receiver is on standby, the AV
receiver will automatically turn on and select that
component as the input source.
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
RI Dock
■ Direct Change
When playback is started on a component connected
via u, the AV receiver automatically selects that
component as the input source.
control your other u-capable Onkyo components,
pointing the remote controller at the AV receiver’s
remote control sensor instead of the component. You
must enter the appropriate remote control code first
(➔ page 88).
Note
• Use only ucables for uconnections. ucables are
supplied with Onkyo components.
■ Remote Control
• Some components have two ujacks. You can connect
either one to the AV receiver. The other jack is for
connecting additional u-capable components.
• Connect only Onkyo components to ujacks. Connecting
other manufacturer’s components may cause a
malfunction.
• Some components may not support all ufunctions. Refer
to the manuals supplied with your Onkyo components.
• While Zone 2/3 is on, the System On/Auto Power On and
Direct Change ufunctions do not work.
En-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver
into a different branch circuit.
Turning Off
• Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied with
the AV receiver. The supplied power cord is designed
exclusively for use with the AV receiver and should not be
used with any other equipment.
• Never disconnect the power cord from the AV receiver
while the other end is still plugged into a wall outlet. Doing
so may cause an electric shock. Always disconnect the
power cord from the wall outlet first, and then the AV
receiver.
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
1
or
Turning On & Basic
Operations
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on
the remote controller.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode. To
prevent any loud surprises when you turn on the
AV receiver, always turn down the volume before
you turn it off.
Turning On
Tip
Turning On/Off the AV
Receiver
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
1
• The HYBRID STANDBY indicator may light depending on
• For details on power management settings, see “Auto
Standby” (➔ page 80).
• If the HDMI Through setting is not set in standby mode, an
MHL-enabled mobile device cannot be charged even if it is
connected.
or
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on
the remote controller.
Connecting the Power Cord
Connect the supplied power cord to the AV
receiver’s AC INLET.
1
■ Smooth Operation in a Few Easy Steps
(Initial Setup)
To ensure smooth operation, here’s a few easy steps
to help you configure the AV receiver before you use
it for the very first time. These settings only need to
be made once. See “Initial Setup” for details
(➔ page 26).
To AC wall outlet
Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.
2
Note
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your
speakers and AV components.
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power
surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment on
En-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Use q/won the AV receiver or remote
Firmware Update Notification
Initial Setup
1
controller to select one of the following
options, and then press ENTER.
`Yes:
When a new version of the firmware is available, the
notification window “AV receiver : Firmware Update
Available” pops up. This notification only appears
when the AV receiver is connected to the Internet
(➔ pages 20, 31). To perform the firmware update,
follow the instructions on screen.
This section explains the settings that we recommend
you to make before using the AV receiver for the very
first time. A setup wizard is launched upon first-time
use to let you perform those settings.
Continues to “Audyssey MultEQ XT32:
Auto Setup”.
`No:
Tip
Skips the settings and terminates the initial
setup. The setup wizard goes to
“Terminating the Initial Setup” (➔ page 27).
You can always restart the initial setup by
selecting “Initial Setup” in the “Hardware
Setup” menu (➔ page 81).
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.
Use q/wand ENTER on the AV receiver or remote
controller to select one of the options.
`Update Now:
Selecting the Language for the On-
screen Setup Menus
Starts the firmware update.
Refer to “Firmware Update” (➔ page 104).
`Remind me Later:
This step determines the language used for the on-
screen setup menus. See “Language” in “OSD
The update notification will pop up again the
next time you turn the AV receiver on.
`Never Remind me:
Audyssey MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup
Tip
Disables the automatic update notification.
This step performs the automatic speaker setup.
• Pressing HOME will close the setup wizard. To restart the
initial setup, select “Initial Setup” in the “Hardware Setup”
menu (➔ page 81).
Tip
Use q/wto select one of the following options,
• The update notification window can be enabled or disabled
in “Update Notice” (➔ page 81).
1
and then press ENTER.
`Do it Now:
After selecting the language for on-screen setup
menus, a welcome screen is displayed.
The automatic speaker setup is performed
following instructions on screen. Refer to
step 2 of “Using the Automatic Speaker
Setup” (➔ page 28). When this setting is
complete, the setup wizard continues to
“Source Connection”.
About the HYBRID STANDBY indicator
Initial Setup
By way of optimized circuitry, this function reduces
power consumption when the AV receiver is in
light in either of the following conditions:
–“HDMI Through” is enabled (the HDMI indicator is
off).
Welcome to initial setup. Have you connected all the speakers and devices?
Before starting, please connect speakers and sources.
Now, would you like to start initial setup?
1st Step : Audyssey MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup
2nd Step : Source Connection
3rd Step : Remote Mode Setup
4th Step : Network Connection
`Do it Later:
Yes
No
Skips this setting.
Press ENTER and continue to “Source
Connection”.
HOME Exit
–“Network Standby” is enabled (the NET indicator
is off).
Note
• If Zones are turned on or, if a mobile device connected to
indicator won’t light.
En-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Follow the instructions on screen to perform
the network checking.
The checking is complete when the message
“Successfully connected.” appears at the
middle of the screen. Press ENTER to terminate
the initial setup.
Source Connection
Remote Mode Setup
2
3
This step checks the connection of source
components.
With this step, you can enter remote control codes for
the components you want to operate.
Use q/wto select one of the following options,
Use q/wto select one of the following options,
1
1
`Yes, Continue:
and then press ENTER.
`Yes:
Performs the remote control code input.
Refer to step 5 of “Looking up for Remote
Control Codes” (➔ page 87).
`No, Skip:
Tip
• If you have selected “Wireless”, you need to perform
the wireless LAN setup. See “Performing Wireless
LAN Setup” (➔ page 31). This completes the initial
setup.
Performs the checkings.
`No, Skip:
Skips this step and continues to “Remote
Mode Setup”.
If an error message appears, select one of the
following options and press ENTER.
`Retry:
Performs the checking again.
`No, Do it Later:
Skips this step and continues to “Network
Connection”.
Select the input selector for which you want to
2
check the connection and press ENTER.
The picture and sound of the corresponding
verification prompt.
When you’re finished, select one of the
following options and press ENTER.
2
`Yes, Done:
Skips this step and terminates the initial
setup. The setup wizard goes to
“Terminating the Initial Setup”.
The setup wizard continues to “Network
Connection”.
`No, not yet:
When prompted, use q/wto select one of the
3
following options and then press ENTER.
`Yes:
You can enter other remote control codes.
Confirms that the source is properly
displayed.
`No:
Terminating the Initial Setup
Displays an error report. Follow the
troubleshooting instructions and recheck the
source.
This step ends the initial setup process.
Network Connection
This step checks your network connection.
Press ENTER.
To restart the initial setup, select “Initial Setup”
1
Use q/wto select one of the following options,
4
Use q/wto select one of the following options,
1
in the “Hardware Setup” menu (➔ page 81).
and then press ENTER.
`Yes:
and then press ENTER.
`Yes:
Returns to step 2.
Performs the checkings.
`No, Done Checking:
The setup wizard continues to “Remote
Mode Setup”.
`No, Skip:
Skips this step and terminates the initial
setup.
En-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Measurement procedure
Note
Using the Automatic Speaker Setup
• Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise and
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) can disrupt the room
measurements. Close windows, televisions, radios, air
conditioners, fluorescent lights, home appliances, light
dimmers, or other devices. Turn off the cell phone (even if
it is not in use) or place it away from all audio electronics.
• The microphone picks up test tones played through each
speaker as Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup runs.
To create a listening environment in your home
theater that all listeners will enjoy,
With the supplied calibrated microphone,
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 automatically determines
®
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 takes measurements at up to
eight positions within the listening area. Position the
microphone at ear height of a seated listener with the
microphone tip pointed directly at the ceiling using a
tripod. Do not hold the microphone in your hand
during measurements as this will produce inaccurate
results.
the number of speakers connected, their size for
purposes of bass management, optimum crossover
frequencies to the subwoofer (if present), and
distances from the primary listening position.
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 then removes the distortion
caused by room acoustics by capturing room
acoustical problems over the listening area in both
the frequency and time domain. The result is clear,
well-balanced sound for everyone.
• Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker
Setup cannot be performed while a pair of headphones is
connected.
■ First measurement position
Also referred to as the Main Listening Position, this
refers to the most central position where one would
normally sit within the listening environment.
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 uses the measurements
from this position to calculate speaker distance, level,
and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 can be used with
®
Audyssey Dynamic EQ and
®
Audyssey Dynamic Volume (➔ page 72).
Before using this function, connect and position all of
your speakers.
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 offers two ways of
measuring: the “Audyssey Quick Start” and
“Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full Calibration”.
• “Audyssey Quick Start” uses the measurement
from one position to perform the speaker setting
only.
■ Second-eighth measurement positions
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the
places where the other listeners will sit). You can
measure up to eight positions.
• “Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full Calibration” uses
the measurement from eight positions to correct
room response in addition to the speaker setting.
The more positions are used in measuring, the better
the listening environment will become. We
recommend using a measurement from eight
positions to create the best listening environment.
The Quick Start takes 2 minutes and Full Calibration
takes about 20 minutes.
TV
d e f
c a b
g h
: Listening area
a to h: Listening position
Total measurement time varies depending on the
number of speakers.
En-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Turn on the AV receiver and the connected TV.
On the TV, select the input to which the AV
receiver is connected.
If “Speakers Type(Front)” is set to “Digital
Crossover”, a confirmation screen appears.
Select “Next” to display the screen for Digital
Processing Crossover Network (➔ page 68).
Continue with the settings.
Place the speaker setup microphone at the
next position, and then press ENTER.
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 performs more
measurements. This takes a few minutes.
1
2
7
Set the speaker setup microphone at the Main
Listening Position a, and connect it to the
When prompted, repeat step 7.
8
9
Adjust the subwoofer volume level to 75 dB,
and then press ENTER.
Test tones are played through the subwoofer.
Use the volume control on the subwoofer.
4
Use q/wto select an option, and then press
SETUP MIC jack
ENTER.
MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup
AUDYSSEY
Note
-- Review Speaker Configuration --
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Yes
100Hz
40Hz
100Hz
None
100Hz
120Hz
2ch
• If your subwoofer does not have a volume control,
disregard the displayed level and press ENTER to
proceed to the next step.
• If you set the subwoofer’s volume control to its
maximum and the level displayed is lower than 75 dB,
leave the subwoofer’s volume control at its maximum
and press ENTER to proceed to the next step.
Surround
Front Wide
Front High
Surround Back
Surround Back Ch
Speaker setup microphone
Save
Cancel
The speaker setting menu appears.
The options are:
`Save:
Note
Use q/wto select “Audyssey Quick Start” or
“Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full Calibration”,
and then press ENTER.
5
6
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is
connected to other video outputs, use the AV
receiver’s display when changing settings.
Save the calculated settings and exit
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction
and Speaker Setup.
Press ENTER.
®
`Cancel:
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
When you’ve finished making the settings,
press ENTER.
Cancel Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room
Correction and Speaker Setup.
Speaker Setup starts.
3
Test tones are played through each speaker as
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup runs. This process takes a few
minutes. Please refrain from talking during
speakers and the microphone.
the setup.
MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup
AUDYSSEY
Tip
Speakers Type(Front)
Powered Zone 2
Powered Zone 3
11ch Playback
Subwoofer
Normal
No
• You can view the calculated settings for the speaker
configuration, speaker distances, and speaker levels
by using e/r.
No
No
Yes
Perform the “2. Speaker Setup” according to your
speaker configuration:
–Speakers Type(Front) (➔ page 65)
–Powered Zone 2 (➔ page 65)
–Powered Zone 3 (➔ page 65)
–11ch Playback (➔ page 65)
–Subwoofer (➔ page 65)
If you select “Audyssey Quick Start”, you will go
to step 9.
If you use a powered subwoofer(s), go to step 4.
If not, go to step 5.
En-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Error Messages
Use q/wto select a target, and use e/rto
The setup of the speaker can be done manually
(➔ page 65).
The setup of the volume level of each speaker also
can be done manually (➔ pages 66, 67).
10
change the setting.
After the results of Audyssey MultEQ XT32
have been saved, the menu will display the
“Audyssey” (➔ page 71), “Dynamic EQ”
(➔ page 72), “Dynamic Volume” (➔ page 72)
settings.
While Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup is in progress, one of the error
messages below may appear.
®
MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup
AUDYSSEY
Note
Ambient noise is too high.
• Please note that THX recommends any THX main
speakers using Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction
and Speaker Setup, please make sure manually that any
THX speakers are set to “80Hz(THX)” crossover
(➔ page 65).
• Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers
and the interaction with the room, THX recommends setting
the level and the distance of the subwoofer manually.
• Sometimes due to interaction with the room, you may
notice irregular results when setting the level and/or
distance of the main speakers. If this happens, THX
recommends setting them manually.
Note
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for
measurement, “Audyssey” cannot be selected.
• These settings are applied to all input selectors.
Retry
Cancel
Press ENTER.
11
12
Error message
Disconnect the speaker setup microphone.
The options are:
`Retry:
Try again.
`Cancel:
Cancel Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room
Correction and Speaker Setup.
• Ambient noise is too high.
The background noise is too loud. Remove the
source of the noise and try again.
• Speaker Matching Error!
The number of speakers detected was different
from that of the first measurement. Check the
speaker connection.
Note
• You can cancel Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction
and Speaker Setup at any point in this procedure simply by
disconnecting the setup microphone.
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker
Setup.
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted automatically
when Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
• Changes to the room after Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room
Correction and Speaker Setup requires you run
Setup again, as room EQ characteristics may have
changed.
Using a Powered Subwoofer
If you’re using a powered subwoofer and it outputs
very low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it
may not be detected by Audyssey MultEQ XT32
Room Correction and Speaker Setup.
If the “Subwoofer” appears on the “Review Speaker
Configuration” screen as “No”, increase the
subwoofer’s volume to the half-way point, set it to its
highest crossover frequency, and then try running
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup again. Note that if the volume is set
too high and the sound distorts, detection issues may
occur, so use an appropriate volume level. If the
subwoofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or
Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual
for details.
• Writing Error!
This message appears if saving fails. Try saving
again. If this message appears after 2 or 3
attempts, contact your Onkyo dealer.
• Speaker Detect Error
This message appears if a speaker is not detected.
“No” means that no speaker was detected.
Tip
• See “Speaker Configuration” for appropriate settings
(➔ page 14).
En-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
■ PIN code method
Use q/wto select “Network Connection”, and
e/rto select “Wireless”, and then press
ENTER (➔ page 80).
Performing Wireless LAN Setup
5
6
1. Use q/wto select “PIN Code” and then press
ENTER.
A wireless LAN (WLAN) is a local area network that
relies on wireless communication.
To achieve a wireless network connection, you will
need the following component:
An 8-digit PIN code is displayed. The PIN
code is displayed scrolling on the AV
receiver’s display.
The “Wireless Setup” menu is displayed on
screen.
Tip
2. Input the provided code in your Access Point.
For information on the registration process,
please refer to the instruction manual
provided with your Access Point device.
• The same setting is available even if “Wireless” is
selected in “Network Connection” in initial setup
(➔ page 27).
■ Access point
Also known as the base station, it links your AV
receiver (wireless client) with a PC or network.
Access points fall into two categories: the bridge
type that only performs data relay in a local area
network, or the router type that has a built-in router
functionality.
Press q/wto select (North American models)
Press ENTER to confirm.
“Push Button Configuration (Other
7
Connection to your Access Point starts and Wi-Fi
indicator flashes. After the connection to your
Access Point is completed, Wi-Fi indicator lights
and the connection status is displayed on the
screen.
This completes the wireless LAN setup.
You can review your setup with the “Status”
option on the “Wireless Setup” menu.
*1
Routers)” /(excluding North American
models) “Push Button Configuration (Select
from Router)”, and press ENTER.
The method to make settings by “Push Button
Configuration” is displayed, providing the
following two options:
To achieve a wireless network connection, it is
setup can be done either automatically or manually.
You use your AV receiver as a wireless client
(wireless terminal) and connect it to a PC or to the
Internet.
Tip
*1
(North American models) To connect to Linksys
Note
E/EA Router, select “Push Button Configuration
(Linksys E/EA Router)” and make settings
following the instructions on the screen.
• If Wi-Fi indicator doesn’t light, the connection to your
Access Point is not done successfully. Configure this
setting again (➔ page 99).
Automatic wireless LAN setup
■ Push Button method
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
1
1. Use q/wto select “Push Button” and then
press ENTER.
Use e/ror q/wto select “Setup”, and then
2
2. Press the WPS button on your Access Point
device.
press ENTER.
Use q/wto select “Hardware Setup”, and then
3
Tip
press ENTER.
• How long the WPS button should be pressed differs
depending on the type of Access Point device. Refer
to the instruction manual provided with your Access
Point device for operations.
Use q/wto select “Network”, and then press
4
ENTER.
En-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Select “OK” and press ENTER.
Connection to your Access Point starts and Wi-Fi
indicator flashes. After the connection to your
Access Point is completed, Wi-Fi indicator lights
and the connection status is displayed on the
screen.
Manual wireless LAN setup
Use q/wto select the Access Point you wish to
connect to, and then press ENTER.
Depending on your encryption settings, the
security of your Access Point will provide one of
the following patterns:
7
8
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
1
Use e/ror q/wto select “Setup”, and then
2
press ENTER.
■ WEP method
This completes the wireless LAN setup.
You can review your setup with the “Status”
option on the “Wireless Setup” menu.
Use q/wto select “Hardware Setup”, and then
1. Use q/wto select “Default Key ID” and then
3
press ENTER.
press ENTER.
2. Use q/wto choose an ID between 1 and 4,
and then press ENTER.
Use q/wto select “Network”, and then press
4
Note
ENTER.
• If Wi-Fi indicator doesn’t light, the connection to your
Access Point is not done successfully. Configure this
setting again (➔ page 99).
3. Use q/wto select “Password” and then press
ENTER.
Use q/wto select “Network Connection”, and
5
e/rto select “Wireless”, and then press
4. Use the keyboard on screen to enter the
password and confirm with “OK”.
ENTER (➔ page 80).
The “Wireless Setup” menu is displayed on
screen.
■ WPA/WPA2 method
1. Use q/wto select “Password” and then press
Tip
ENTER.
• The same setting is available even if “Wireless” is
selected in “Network Connection” in initial setup
(➔ page 27).
2. Use the keyboard on screen to enter the
password and confirm with “OK”.
Use q/wto select “Search Wireless Network”
6
■ No encryption
and then press ENTER.
A list of available Access Points is displayed.
If your Access Point device is not secured by
encryption, there is no need to input any secret
key.
Tip
• If Access Point you wish to connect to is not displayed
in the list of available Access Points, the setting also
can be made by entering “SSID”, “Security”, and
“Password” manually after selecting “Direct Input”.
Tip
• When you select the Access Point you wish to connect to
from the list of available Access Points, “SSID” and
“Security” are automatically displayed. These settings can
be changed manually.
En-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Turn on the AV receiver, the TV and the AV
components.
* When you operate the AV receiver with the remote
• “Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder”
(➔ page 40)
• “Remote Playback” (➔ page 41)
• “Listening to AM/FM Radio” (➔ page 42)
• “Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources”
(➔ page 44)
1
2
controller, press the RECEIVER button first.
Select the input on the AV receiver to play the
AV components.
Playback
• “Controlling Other Components” (➔ page 87)
• “Using the Onkyo Dock” (➔ page 92)
Press the input selector button to which the AV
components to be played is connected.
Press the TV/CD button to play the audio of the
TV. Switching the input on the TV is also
required. Select the input to which the AV
receiver is connected by using the TV remote
controller.
* For the CEC compatible TV and the AV components
connected with HDMI connections, switching the input
is automatically performed. Switch the input manually
for other AV components.
1
2
This section describes the basic operation such as
connection/setup/operation.
4
Select the desired listening mode.
You can enjoy various types of listening mode.
The listening mode is switched by pressing
Listening mode button on the AV receiver or the
remote controller.
3
4
■ Screen Saver
If there is no video signal on the current input source
and no operation for a specific time (three minutes by
default), a screen saver automatically comes on.
Adjust the volume.
You can enjoy the surround sound.
3
Tip
• The time until the screen saver activates itself can be
changed in the “Screen Saver” setting (➔ page 77).
• The screen will return to its previous state if the AV receiver
is operated.
Tip
• When listening to an HDMI component through the AV
receiver, set the HDMI component so that its video can be
seen on the TV screen (on the TV, select the input of the
HDMI component connected to the AV receiver). If the TV
power is off or the TV is set to another input source, this
may result in no sound from the AV receiver or the sound
may be cut off.
See also:
• “Playing an Audio from Bluetooth-enabled Device”
(➔ page 35)
• “Playing a USB Device” (➔ page 36)
• “Listening to TuneIn” (➔ page 36)
• “Registering Other Internet Radio” (➔ page 38)
• “Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA)”
(➔ page 38)
1 2
3
En-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
TOP MENU
This button displays the top menu for each media or
service.
REPEAT
a
b
o
Controlling Contents of USB or
Network Devices
Press this button repeatedly to cycle through the repeat
modes.
(➔ page 35)
q/wand ENTER
Tip
These buttons navigate through the menus.
• See “Controlling Other Components” about the operation of
other components (➔ page 87).
image file format of JPEG, PNG, and BMP is possible. The
image file format cannot be displayed in either of the
following cases:
–Total number of horizontal and vertical pixels is more than
2048 x 2048.
–Image data size (JPEG/PNG) is more than 4 MB.
Press USB or NET first.
e/r
This button cycles through pages.
c
d
1
This button starts playback.
h
7
This button selects the beginning of the current song.
Pressing this button twice selects the previous song.
e
f
g
5
Note
This button fast-reverses the current song.
• The buttons you can use will differ depending on the
devices and media used for playback.
3
This button pauses playback.
• When you select the NET input selector on the AV receiver
for the first time, “DISCLAIMER” screen is displayed on TV.
Please read the contents thoroughly before using network
service. Select “Agree” if you agree with the content. If you
disagree, network service is not available on the AV
receiver (➔ page 103).
SEARCH
a
b
i
j
You can toggle between the playback screen and the
list screen during playback.
DISPLAY
h
i
c
d
This button switches between song information during
playback.
Press this button while the list screen is displayed to
return to the playback screen.
k
l
m
n
o
e
f
g
MENU
This button displays the menu of Internet radio
services.
RETURN
This button returns to the previous menu.
j
k
6
This button selects the next song.
l
m
n
4
This button fast-forwards the current song.
2
This button stops playback.
RANDOM
This button performs random playback.
En-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Pairing the AV receiver with a Bluetooth-
enabled device
Understanding Icons on the Display
Playing an Audio from Bluetooth-
enabled Device
This section describes icons that appear on the AV
receiver’s display during media playback.
Pairing is an operation where Bluetooth-enabled
devices register with each other beforehand. Use the
procedure below to pair the AV receiver with your
Bluetooth-enabled device. Once a pairing operation is
performed, it does not need to be performed again.
About the Bluetooth Wireless Technology
Icon
Description
Bluetooth wireless technology is a short-range
wireless technology that enables wireless data
communication between digital devices. Bluetooth
wireless technology operates within a range of about
15 meters (49 feet). You do not need to use a cable
for connection, nor is it necessary for the devices to
face one another, such is the case with infrared
technology.
Folder
Track
Place the Bluetooth-enabled device within
1 meter (3.3 feet) from the AV receiver.
1
Playback
Select “BLUETOOTH” in “Input” in Quick
2
Pause
Setup, and press ENTER (➔ page 57).
BLUETOOTH indicator flashes and the AV
receiver is put to pairing mode.
“Now Pairing” appears on the AV receiver’s
display.
Tip
Fast Forward
Fast Reverse
Artist
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
• If your Bluetooth-enabled device supports A2DP protocol,
its audio file will play through the AV receiver.
• Connection is not guaranteed for all Bluetooth-enabled
devices.
Tip
• The same operation can be done by pressing
BLUETOOTH button on the AV receiver.
• When connecting a Bluetooth-enabled device paired
with the AV receiver to the AV receiver,
Album
Operating on the Remote Controller
Repeat One Track
Repeat Folder (USB Device)
Repeat
“BLUETOOTH” input selector is automatically
selected.
The Bluetooth-enabled device can be operated by the
supplied remote controller.
• If you connect the AV receiver to another Bluetooth-
enabled device, hold down BLUETOOTH button until
BLUETOOTH indicator flashes or make settings in
“Status” of “Bluetooth” for pairing (➔ page 81).
• Some Bluetooth-enabled device may need to re-
establish pairing for each connection.
Tip
• To operate your Bluetooth-enabled device by the remote
controller, the Bluetooth-enabled device must support
profile: AVRCP.
• Operation by the remote controller is not guaranteed for all
Bluetooth-enabled devices.
Shuffle
Note
• “BLUETOOTH” cannot be selected, if you’ve selected
NET or USB as input selector in Multi Zone.
En-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
enabled device closer to the AV receiver and retry the
operation.
During this period (about 2 minutes), you can
operate the Bluetooth-enabled device to pair
with the AV receiver.
Use q/wto select a music file, and press
3
4
4
ENTER or 1to start playback.
• When disconnecting on your Bluetooth-enabled device,
BLUETOOTH indicator on the AV receiver will go off.
• If there is no sound output even after the pairing is done
successfully, consult the instruction manual of the
Bluetooth-enabled device, and then select the model name
of the AV receiver as the audio output device.
• While connected to a Bluetooth-enabled device, the AV
established from another Bluetooth-enabled device.
• If you cannot connect with a paired Bluetooth-enabled
device, perform the pairing operation between the AV
receiver and the Bluetooth-enabled device again.
Note
Note
• When establishing a connection with the AV receiver,
select the profile (A2DP, AVRCP) at the Bluetooth-
enabled device. If the Bluetooth-enabled device does
not support the AVRCP profile, you cannot perform
playback or other operations with the AV receiver.
• While the message “Connecting...” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, do not disconnect the USB cable
supplied with the USB device from the USB port.
Listening to TuneIn
Tip
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ pages 20, 31).
• For details on the Bluetooth connection, refer to the
instruction manual of the Bluetooth-enabled device.
Note
Once the AV receiver is detected and the
model name of the AV receiver appears on the
display of your Bluetooth-enabled device,
select the model name.
When a Bluetooth connection is established
successfully, BLUETOOTH indicator will light.
Tip
• Due to the characteristic of Bluetooth wireless technology,
the sound played on the AV receiver may slightly delay from
the sound played on the Bluetooth-enabled device.
connected to HDMI outputs.
TuneIn is a new radio service which offers the music,
sports and news all over the world.
Over 70,000 radio stations and 2 million on-demand
programs are registered, and you can easily enjoy
them by selecting stations or programs of your
choice. TuneIn is preprogrammed on the AV receiver.
Playing a USB Device
Tip
Tip
• The model name appeared on the display of your
Bluetooth-enabled device is “Onkyo TX-NR929”.
The model name displayed on your Bluetooth-enabled
device can be changed in Web Setup (➔ page 38).
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
This section explains how to play music files from a
See also:
Press NET.
1
*
If passkey is required on the display of the
The network service screen appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, the AV receiver
is not connected to the network correctly. If wired
LAN connection is selected, verify that the
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver. If wireless LAN connection is selected,
verify that the Wi-Fi indicator lights.
5
6
Bluetooth-enabled device, enter “0000”.
The AV receiver only supports numerical
passkey up to 4 digits.
* Passkey may be called “Passcode”, “PIN code”, “PIN
number” or “Password”.
• “Network/USB Features” (➔ page 108).
Press USB to select the “USB” input.
1
2
Plug your USB device into the AV receiver’s
USB port.
Play back the desired music on the Bluetooth-
enabled device.
The audio is output from the AV receiver.
Tip
The USB indicator lights. It will flash if the AV
receiver cannot read the USB device.
• The same operation can be done by selecting
“Network Service” in the Home menu.
Press ENTER.
Tip
3
Use q/w/e/rto select “TuneIn” and then
2
A list of the device’s contents appears. To open a
folder, use q/wto select it, and then press
ENTER.
• The AV receiver may not work as normal depending on the
circumstance even though the AV receiver is placed within
the 15 meters range. In such cases, get the Bluetooth-
press ENTER.
En-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
• Adding TuneIn radio stations or programs to My
Presets
Select “TuneIn”, and press ENTER button to display
a folder of “My Presets” on the screen that displays
Category/Area, etc. Store your favorite stations or
programs in this folder.
Setting an TuneIn account
Use q/wto select a station or a program, and
then press ENTER.
3
To create a user account for TuneIn, open a browser
window such as Internet Explorer , and connect to
Playback starts.
®
tunein.com website. With a TuneIn account, you can
quickly search and browse for stations and programs
at tunein.com website and save as your favorites
which will automatically appear in your AV receiver
My Presets account. If you have a TuneIn account,
select “Login” and then “I have a TuneIn account”
on the top list. Enter your user name and password to
login.
tunein
1. Select radio stations or programs, and press
MENU button on the remote controller.
My Music
0 : 11
Great Artist
My Favorite
2. Use q/wto select “Add to My Presets”, and
press ENTER.
Go to Menu
Tip
• If no radio stations or programs are stored in “My Presets”,
Tip
“My Presets” folder will not be displayed.
Either of the following menus can be selected by
pressing the MENU button on the remote controller or
pressing ENTER button to select “Go to Menu”.
`Add to My Presets
• Select “Login with a registration code”, and associate a
device from my page on TuneIn website by using a
registration code displayed on the screen. This allows you
to login without entering a user name and a password.
In this menu, stations or programs can be stored
in “My Presets”.
`Remove from My Presets
My Favorites/My Presets
In this menu, stations or programs stored in “My
Presets” can be deleted.
`Report a problem
There are two ways you can register specific Internet
radio stations (programs) from the TuneIn.
• Adding to My Favorites
This menu is used to report problems on TuneIn
service or resolve the problems in a wizard style.
`View Schedule
The selected program will be added to “My
Favorites” on the network service screen, which
appears when pressing NET.
In this menu, program listings of stations or
programs can be displayed.
`Clear recents
1. Select radio stations or programs, and press
MENU button on the remote controller.
In this menu, all the stations and programs
stored in “Recents” can be deleted.
`Add to My Favorites
2. Use q/wto select “Add to My Favorites”, and
press ENTER.
3. Use q/w/e/rto select “OK”, and press ENTER.
In this menu, stations or programs can be stored
in “My Favorites”.
Tip
• You can rename the stations saved in “My Favorites”
(➔ page 38).
En-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Click “Save” to save the Internet radio station.
The Internet radio station is then added to “My
Favorites”. To play the registered station, press
NET, and then select “My Favorites” on the
network service screen. A list of registered
Internet radio stations appears. Select the one
that you saved and press ENTER.
Registering Other Internet Radio
Changing the Icon Layout on the
Network Service Screen
5
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ pages 20, 31).
Tip
Tip
• You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output (HDMI
OUT MAIN) to make the following on-screen setting.
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
The layout of icons can be customized by switching
their positions on the network service screen.
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are
supported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,
depending on the type of data or audio format used
by the Internet radio station, you may not be able to
listen to some stations.
To listen to other Internet radio stations, you must
register your station in “My Favorites” of the network
service screen, as described below.
Tip
• If you want to add a new station directly from “My
Favorites”, select an empty slot in the list and press MENU.
Then, select “Create New Station” and press ENTER.
Pressing ENTER again will display the keyboard screen.
Use that keyboard to enter the station’s name and URL
respectively, and then press ENTER.
Press NET.
The network service screen appears.
1
Tip
• The same operation can be done by selecting
“Network Service” in the Home menu.
• If you want to delete a station saved in “My Favorites”,
press MENU with the station selected or while the station is
playing. Then, use q/wto select “Delete from My
Favorites” and press ENTER. You can also delete stations
from the Web Setup.
Press MODE/D (blue) on the remote controller.
2
Note
• Services available may vary depending on the region. See
the separate instructions for more information.
• Certain network service or contents available through this
device may not be accessible in case the service provider
terminates its service.
Use q/w/e/rto select an icon to move, and
3
then press ENTER.
• If you want to rename a station, select the desired station
and press MENU. Then, use q/wto select “Rename this
station” and press ENTER.
Use q/w/e/rto select another icon as the
4
destination, and then press ENTER.
The icons switch positions and the message
“Completed!” appears.
• You can save up to 40 Internet radio stations.
Select “Network” on the Setup menu to verify
your IP address (➔ page 81).
1
Take a note of the IP address.
Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA)
On your computer, start your web browser.
2
3
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ pages 20, 31).
Enter the AV receiver’s IP address in the
browser’s Internet address (URL) field.
Tip
®
If you are using Internet Explorer , you can also
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
enter the URL by selecting “Open...” on the “File”
menu.
Information on the AV receiver is then shown on
your Internet browser (Web Setup).
This section explains how to play music files on a
computer or media server through the AV receiver
(Server Playback).
Click on the “My Favorites” tab, and enter the
Internet radio station’s name and URL.
4
En-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Windows Media Player Setup
On the “Stream” menu, select “Turn on media
streaming”.
A dialog box appears.
Use q/w/e/rto select “DLNA”, and press
2
3
3
4
ENTER.
■ Windows Media Player 11 Setup
Use q/wto select a server, and then press
This section explains how to configure Windows
Media Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the
music files stored on your computer.
Tip
ENTER.
• If the media streaming is already activated, clicking on
“More streaming options...” in the “Stream” menu will
display a list of the playback devices connected to the
network. You can skip step 3.
The menu is displayed according to the server
functions.
Start Windows Media Player 11.
Note
1
2
• The search function does not work with media servers
which do not support this function.
• Photos and movies stored on a media server cannot
be accessed from the AV receiver.
• Depending on the sharing settings in the media server,
the AV receiver may not able to access the content.
See the instruction manual of the media server.
Move your cursor and click on “Turn on media
streaming”.
A list of media server appears. Wording may vary
slightly depending on the network location.
On the “Library” menu, select “Media
Sharing”.
The “Media Sharing” dialog box appears.
Select the “Share my media” check box, and
then click “OK”.
3
On the “Media streaming options”, select the
AV receiver and confirm that it is set to
“Allowed”.
4
5
A list of the supported devices appears.
Use q/wto select an item, and then press
5
Select the AV receiver in the list, and then
click “Allow”.
4
ENTER or 1to start playback.
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 12
configuration.
You can now play the music files in your
Windows Media Player 12 library.
The corresponding icon will be checked.
dlna
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 11
configuration.
5
My favorite song 1
0 :11 / 3:00
Artist name
My favorite album
You can now play the music files in your
Windows Media Player 11 library through the AV
receiver.
Playing music files on a server (DLNA)
Start your computer or media server.
1
2
Tip
Note
• Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free
from the Microsoft web site.
Press NET.
• Depending on the media server, 5/4/3may not
The network service screen appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, the AV receiver
is not connected to the network correctly. If wired
LAN connection is selected, verify that the
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver. If wireless LAN connection is selected,
verify that the Wi-Fi indicator lights.
work.
• If the message “No Item.” appears, this means that no
information can be retrieved from the server. In this
case, check your server, network, and AV receiver
connections.
■ Windows Media Player 12 Setup
This section explains how to configure Windows
Media Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the
music files stored on your personal computer.
Start Windows Media Player 12.
1
Tip
• The same operation can be done by selecting
“Network Service” in the Home menu.
En-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Playing music files on a shared folder
■ Creating a shared folder
Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder
In order to enjoy Home Media, you must first create a
shared folder on your computer.
Right-click the folder that you want to share.
This section explains how to play music files on a
computer or NAS (Network Attached Storage)
through the AV receiver.
1
2
3
Select “Properties”.
Press NET.
1
The network service screen appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, the AV receiver
is not connected to the network correctly. If wired
LAN connection is selected, verify that the
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver. If wireless LAN connection is selected,
verify that the Wi-Fi indicator lights.
On the “Sharing” tab, select “Advanced
Sharing”.
Windows 8/Windows 7 Setup
Check the check box of “Share this folder”
and then click “OK”.
■ Setting the sharing options
4
Select “Choose homegroup and sharing
options” on the Control Panel.
Under “Network File and Folder Sharing”,
select “Share”.
1
5
Tip
Select “Everyone” from the pull-down menu,
click “Add”, and then click “Share”.
Tip
6
• If this option is not available, verify that “View by:” is set
to “Category”.
• The same operation can be done by selecting
“Network Service” in the Home menu.
Tip
Select “Change advanced sharing settings”.
2
3
• With this setting, everyone is allowed to access the
folder. If you want to assign a user name and
password to the folder, make the corresponding
settings for “Permissions” in “Advanced Sharing” of the
“Sharing” tab.
Use q/w/e/rto select “Home Media”, and
2
press ENTER.
Under “Home or Work”, verify that the
following items are checked:
Use q/wto select a server, and then press
3
“Turn on network discovery”, “Turn on file and
printer sharing”, “Turn on sharing so anyone with
network access can read and write files in the
Public folders”, and “Turn off password protected
sharing”.
ENTER.
Tip
• Verify that “Workgroup” is properly set.
Note
• The server name of your computer can be viewed on
the computer properties screen.
• When using NAS (Network Attached Storage), refer to
the instruction manual provided with your NAS unit.
Use q/wto select the desired shared folder
4
Select “Save changes” and click “OK” on the
confirmation screen.
4
and then press ENTER.
When asked for a user name and password,
enter the necessary login information.
Tip
5
• The login information will be remembered for the next
time you log in.
• The login information is that of the user account set
when creating a shared folder.
Use q/wto select a music file and then press
6
ENTER or 1.
The playback of the selected file starts.
En-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 12
configuration.
You can now play the music files in your
Windows Media Player 12 library.
Adjusting the Volume.
Remote Playback
5
5
You can adjust the volume by adjusting the
volume bar in the “Remote playback” window.
The default maximum volume level is 82 (0dB). If
you wish to change this, enter the value from the
Web Setup in your browser. Refer to step 3 of
“Registering Other Internet Radio” for details
(➔ page 38).
The volume value of the remote window and the
volume value of the AV receiver may not always
match.
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ pages 20, 31).
Tip
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
Tip
• On the “Stream” menu, confirm that “Allow remote
control of my Player...” is checked.
Remote playback is supported by Windows Media
Player 12.
Remote Playback means you can play the music files
stored on a media server or personal computer with
the AV receiver by operating the controller device in
the home network.
Using Remote Playback
Adjustments you make to the volume in the AV
receiver will not be reflected in the “Remote
playback” window.
Turn on the AV receiver.
1
2
Start Windows Media Player 12.
To enable remote playback, you must first
configure Windows Media Player 12.
Windows Media Player 12 Setup
Note
This section explains how to configure Windows
Media Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the
music files stored on your personal computer.
• Remote playback cannot be used in any of the following
cases:
–Network services are being used.
On Windows Media Player 12, right-click on a
music file.
3
–Contents are being played from a USB device.
–“Agree” is not selected on the “DISCLAIMER” screen
displayed on the TV when you select the NET input
selector on the AV receiver for the first time.
The right-click menu appears.
Start Windows Media Player 12.
1
2
Tip
• For selecting another media server, select the desired
media server from the “Other Libraries” menu on
Windows Media Player 12.
On the “Stream” menu, select “Turn on media
streaming”.
A dialog box appears.
Select the AV receiver in “Remote playback”.
4
Tip
The “Play to” window appears and playback on
the AV receiver starts. Operations during remote
playback can be made from the “Play to” window
of Windows 8/Windows 7 on your personal
computer.
• If the media streaming is already activated, clicking on
“More streaming options...” in the “Stream” menu will
display a list of the playback devices connected to the
network. You can skip step 3.
Move your cursor and click on “Turn on media
streaming”.
A list of media server appears. Wording may vary
slightly depending on the network location.
3
A playback screen will be displayed on the
connected TV.
Tip
• If the operating system of your personal computer is
Windows 8, click “Play to” and select the AV receiver.
On the “Media streaming options”, select the
AV receiver and confirm that it is set to
“Allowed”.
4
En-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
■ Tuning into stations by frequency
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by
entering the appropriate frequency.
Press TUNING q/w.
Listening to AM/FM Radio
2
Searching stops when a station is found.
This section describes the procedure of using the
buttons on the front panel, unless otherwise specified.
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
lights. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the
FM STEREO indicator lights as shown.
On the remote controller, press TUNER
repeatedly to select “AM” or “FM”, followed by
D.TUN.
1
Using the Tuner
With the built-in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio
stations. You can store your favorite stations as
presets for quick selection.
TUNED
AUTO
You can also change the frequency steps
(➔ page 78).
(Actual display depends on the country.)
FM STEREO
Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to
2
Press TUNER to select either “AM” or “FM”.
1
enter the frequency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM), press 8, 7, 5
or 8, 7, 5, 0.
If you have entered the wrong number, you can
retry after 8 seconds.
In this example, FM has been selected.
Each time you press TUNER, the radio band
changes between AM and FM.
Tip
• Tuning into weak FM stereo stations
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may
be impossible to get good reception. In this case,
switch to manual tuning mode and listen to the station
in mono.
Band
Frequency
Presetting AM/FM Stations
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your
favorite AM/FM radio stations as presets.
(Actual display depends on the country.)
Tuning into Radio Stations
■ Auto tuning mode
■ Manual tuning mode
In manual tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
Tune into the AM/FM station that you want to
store as a preset.
1
Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
indicator goes off on the AV receiver’s
display.
1
See the previous section.
Press MEMORY.
The preset number flashes.
2
Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
1
Press and hold TUNING q/w.
2
indicator lights on the AV receiver’s display.
The frequency stops changing when you release
the button.
Press the buttons repeatedly to change the
frequency one step at a time.
(Actual display depends on the country.)
While the preset number is flashing (about 8
3
seconds), use PRESET e/rto select a preset
from 1 through 40.
En-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
■ What is RDS?
■ Displaying Radio Text (RT)
Press MEMORY again to store the station or
channel.
The station or channel is stored and the preset
number stops flashing.
Repeat this procedure for all of your favorite
AM/FM radio stations.
4
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method
of transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was
developed by the European Broadcasting Union
(EBU) and is available in most European countries.
Many FM stations use it these days. In addition to
displaying text information, RDS can also help you
find radio stations by type (e.g., news, sport, rock,
etc.).
Press RT/PTY/TP once.
The RT information scrolls across the AV
receiver’s display.
1
Note
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV
receiver waits for the RT information.
• If the message “No Text Data” appears, no RT
information is available.
■ Selecting Presets
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS
information:
PS (Program Service)
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS
information, the station’s name will be displayed.
Pressing DISPLAY will display the frequency for 3
seconds.
To select a preset, use PRESET e/ron the AV
1
receiver, or the remote controller’s CH +/–.
Tip
■ Finding Stations by Type (PTY)
You can search for radio stations by type.
• You can also use the remote controller’s number
buttons to select a preset directly.
Press RT/PTY/TP twice.
The current program type appears on the AV
receiver’s display.
1
RT (Radio Text)
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting
text information, the text will be shown on the AV
receiver’s display.
PTY (Program Type)
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations by
type.
TP (Traffic Program)
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that
broadcast traffic information (➔ page 44).
■ Deleting Presets
Use PRESET e/rto select the type of
2
Select the preset that you want to delete.
See the previous section.
program you want.
See the table shown later in this chapter.
1
While holding down MEMORY, press TUNING
MODE.
To start the search, press the enter button.
2
3
The AV receiver searches until it finds a station of
the type you specified, at which point it stops
briefly before continuing with the search.
The preset is deleted and its number disappears
from the AV receiver’s display.
When a station you want to listen to is found,
press the enter button.
If no stations are found, the message “Not
Found” appears.
4
Using RDS (excluding North American
models)
Note
• RDS works only in areas where RDS broadcasts are
available.
When tuned into an RDS station, the RDS indicator
lights.
When the station is broadcasting text information, the
text can be displayed.
• In some cases, the text characters displayed on the AV
receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the
radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be
displayed when unsupported characters are received. This
is not a malfunction.
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data may be
displayed intermittently or not at all.
En-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
■ Listening to Traffic News (TP)
RDS program types (PTY)
Playing Audio and Video from Separate
Sources
Type
Display
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic
news.
None
None
You can listen to the audio of one input source while
watching the video of another. This function takes
advantage of the fact that when an audio-only input
source (PHONO, TV/CD, TUNER) is selected, the
video input source remains unchanged. The following
procedure shows how to listen to a CD player’s audio
source connected to TV/CD IN while watching a
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s video source connected to
BD/DVD.
News reports
Current affairs
Information
Sport
News
Press RT/PTY/TP three times.
Affairs
1
If the current radio station is broadcasting TP
(Traffic Program), “[TP]” will appear on the AV
receiver’s display. If “TP” without square brackets
appears, this means that the station is not
broadcasting TP.
Info
Sport
Education
Educate
Drama
Culture
Science
Varied
Pop M
Rock M
Easy M
Light M
Classics
Other M
Weather
Finance
Children
Social
Drama
Culture
To locate a station that is broadcasting TP,
press the enter button.
Science and technology
Varied
2
Tip
The AV receiver searches until it finds a station
that’s broadcasting TP.
If no stations are found, the message “Not
Found” appears.
Pop music
Rock music
Middle of the road music
Light classics
Serious classics
Other music
Weather
assign all video inputs to “- - - - -” (➔ pages 63, 64).
Press BD/DVD.
1
2
Press TV/CD.
The audio output changes to the CD source, but
the video of previously-selected BD/DVD is
retained.
Finance
Children’s programmes
Social affairs
Religion
Start playback on your Blu-ray Disc/DVD and
CD players.
3
Religion
Phone In
Travel
You can now enjoy watching your Blu-ray
Disc/DVD with the sound of your CD player.
Phone in
Travel
Leisure
Leisure
Jazz
Jazz music
Country music
National music
Oldies music
Folk music
Documentary
Alarm test
Country
Nation M
Oldies
Folk M
Document
TEST
Alarm
Alarm!
En-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Note
Using the Listening Modes
About Listening Modes
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes can only be
selected if your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player is connected to the
AV receiver with a digital audio connection (coaxial, optical,
or HDMI).
• The listening modes you can select depends on the format
of the input signal. To check the format, see “Displaying
Source Information” (➔ page 53).
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall,
with high fidelity and stunning surround sound.
the following listening modes: Pure Audio, Mono, Direct,
and Stereo.
Selecting Listening Modes
PURE AUDIO
MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME,THX
■ Listening Mode Buttons
MOVIE/TV button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with movies and TV.
Press RECEIVER first.
MUSIC button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with music.
GAME button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with video games.
THX button
This button selects the THX listening modes.
PURE AUDIO button and indicator
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s display
and analog video circuitry are turned off. Only video
signals input through HDMI input can be output from
the HDMI output. The indicator lights when this mode
is selected. Pressing this button again will select the
previous listening mode.
SP (speaker layout)
MUSIC
MOVIE/TV
GAME
THX
En-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Input Source
*1
*2
After enabling the corresponding speakers, press RECEIVER followed by SP (speaker
layout) repeatedly to select the speakers you want to use: surround back and front high,
surround back and front wide, or front high and front wide (➔ page 54).
This layout is only available when the external power amplifier is connected to FRONT
WIDE PRE OUT of the AV receiver and the “11ch Playback” setting is set to “Yes”
(➔ pages 17, 65).
The following audio formats are supported by the listening modes.
This is mono (monophonic) sound.
A
This is stereo (stereophonic) sound. Two independent audio signal channels
are reproduced through two speakers.
S
This is 5.1-channel surround sound. This surround system has five main
channels of sound and a sixth subwoofer channel (called the point-one
channel).
D
■ Onkyo-Original DSP Listening Modes
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Speaker
Source Layout
This is 7.1-channel surround sound. This is a further sound enhancement to
5.1-channel sound with two additional speakers that provide greater sound
envelopment and more accurate positioning of sounds.
F
Orchestra
Suitable for classical or operatic music,
this mode emphasizes the surround
channels in order to widen the stereo
image, and simulates the natural
reverberation of a large hall.
A CNM
S <
D
O r c h e s t r a
This is DTS-ES surround sound. This surround system can produce a discrete
or a matrix-encoded sixth channel from existing DTS 5.1 encoded material.
G
F
This is Dolby Digital EX surround sound. This provides a center back surround
channel from 5.1-channel sources.
H
G
Unplugged
and jazz, this mode emphasizes the
front stereo image, giving the impression
of being right in front of the stage.
H
U n p l u g g e d
Speaker Layout
The illustration shows which speakers are activated in each channel. See
“Speaker Configuration” for the speaker setup (➔ page 65).
Studio-Mix
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening
to music in this mode creates a lively
sound field with a powerful acoustic
image, like being at a club or rock
concert.
S t u d i o – M i x
Z
X
TV Logic
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV
shows produced in a TV studio,
surround effects to the entire sound, and
clarity to voices.
T V L o g i c
Game-RPG
In this mode, the sound has a dramatic
feel with a similar atmosphere to
Orchestra mode.
B
J
b
K
V
L
G a me – R PG
N
M
Game-Action
In this mode, sound localization is
distinct with emphasis on bass.
G a me – A c t i o n
Game-Rock
In this mode, sound pressure is
emphasized to heighten live feel.
*2
<
G a me – R o c k
Game-Sports
Suitable for audio source with much
reverberation.
*1
G a me – S p o r t s
En-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Listening Mode
All Ch Stereo
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
Listening Mode
Stereo
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
Ideal for background music, this mode
fills the entire listening area with stereo
sound from the front, surround, and
surround back speakers.
Sound is output from the front left and
right speakers and subwoofer.
A XCN
S M<
D
A ZXC
S NM<
D
A l
l
C h S t e r e o
S t e r e o
Mono
Use this mode when watching an old
movie with a mono soundtrack, or use it
with the foreign language soundtracks
recorded in the left and right channels of
some movies. It can also be used with
DVDs or other sources containing
multiplexed audio, such as karaoke
DVDs.
F
F
Full Mono
In this mode, all speakers output the
same sound in mono, so the sound you
hear is the same regardless of where
you are within the listening room.
M o n o
G
G
H
H
F u l
l
M o n o
T-D (Theater-
Dimensional)
With this mode you can enjoy a virtual
surround sound even with only two or
three speakers. This works by
controlling how sounds reach the
listener’s left and right ears. Good
results may not be possible if there’s too
much reverb, so we recommend that
you use this mode in an environment
with little or no natural reverb.
ZXC
NM<
T – D
Multichannel
This mode is for use with PCM
multichannel sources.
D XCN
F M<
M u l
t
i c h
DSD*3
is output without surround-sound
processing. The speaker configuration
(presence of speakers), crossover
frequency, speaker distance, A/V Sync
and much of the processing set via the
audio setup are enabled. See “On-
screen Setup” for more details
D XCN
M<
D S D
Dolby Digital
D o l b y
D
■ Listening Modes
Dolby Digital Plus*4
D XCN
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
M<
D o l b y
D
+
(➔ page 57).
*2
Pure Audio*1
In this mode, the display and video
circuitry are turned off, minimizing
possible noise sources for the ultimate in
high-fidelity audio reproduction. (As the
analog video circuitry is turned off, only
video signals input through HDMI IN can
be output from the HDMI output.)
F XCN
M<
A ZXC
*2
S N M
P u r e A A u d i o
D <
F
Dolby TrueHD
D XCN
M<
G
*2
F XCN
H
M<
Direct
In this mode, audio from the input source
is output without surround-sound
DTS
D XCN
M<
D i r e c t
D T S
processing. The speaker configuration
(presence of speakers) and speaker
distance settings are enabled, but much
of the processing set via the audio setup
is disabled. See “On-screen Setup” for
more details (➔ page 57).
DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio
D XCN
M<
*2
D T S – HD HR
F XCN
M<
En-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
DTS-HD Master
Audio
In this mode, audio from the input source
is output without surround-sound
processing. The speaker configuration
(presence of speakers), crossover
frequency, speaker distance, A/V Sync
and much of the processing set via the
audio setup are enabled. See “On-
screen Setup” for more details
If you’re not using any surround back
speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II will be
used instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.
• Dolby PLIIx Movie
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby
Surround (Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV,
DVD, VHS).
D XCN
S XCN
P L
P L
P L
P L
P L
P L
M o v i e
M u s i c
G a m e
M<
M<
*2
D T S – HD MS T R
F XCN
M<
DTS Express
D XCN
M<
x
x
x
M o v i e
M u s i c
G a m e
D T S E x p r e s s
• Dolby PLIIx Music
(➔ page 57).
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby
Surround (Pro Logic) music source
(e.g., CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS,
DVD).
DTS 96/24*5
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24
sources. This is high-resolution DTS
with a 96 kHz sampling rate and 24-bit
resolution, providing superior fidelity.
Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS
96/24 logo.
D XCN
M<
D T S 9 6 / 2 4
• Dolby PLIIx Game
especially those that bear the Dolby
Pro Logic II logo.
DTS-ES Discrete*6
This mode is for use with DTS-ES
Discrete soundtracks, which use a
discrete surround back channel for true
6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven
totally separate audio channels provide
better spatial imaging and 360-degree
sound localization, perfect for sounds
that pan across the surround channels.
Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-ES
logo, especially those with a DTS-ES
Discrete soundtrack.
G V
J
K
<
• Dolby PLIIx Movie
• Dolby PLIIx Music
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx modes to expand 5.1-channel
sources for 7.1-channel playback.
D V
H J
K
E S D i s c r e t e
<
Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height
Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height is designed
to more effectively use existing program
material when height channel speaker
outputs are present. Dolby Pro Logic
IIz Height can be used to upmix a
variety of sources from movies and
music, but are particularly well-suited to
upmix game content.
S B
D J
F L
G <
P L
z
H e i g h t
DTS-ES Matrix*6
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix
soundtracks, which use a matrix-
encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. Use it with DVDs that
bear the DTS-ES logo, especially those
with a DTS-ES Matrix soundtrack.
H
E S M a t r i x
Dolby EX
These modes expand 5.1-channel
sources for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.
They’re especially suited to Dolby EX
soundtracks that include a matrix-
encoded surround back channel. The
additional channel adds an extra
dimension and provides an enveloping
surround sound experience, perfect for
rotating and fly-by sound effects.
D V
H J
K
D o l b y E X
Dolby Pro Logic IIx*7 Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2-
Dolby Pro Logic II
channel source for 7.1-channel
<
D o l b y
D
E X
playback. It provides a very natural and
seamless surround-sound experience
that fully envelops the listener. As well
as music and movies, video games can
also benefit from the dramatic spatial
effects and vivid imaging.
En-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Listening Mode
DTS Neo:X*8
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*7 Movie +
Audyssey DSX
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Music +
Audyssey DSX
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Game +
Audyssey DSX
This mode expands various sources and
various inputs up to 11.1 channel.
DTS Neo:X provides semi-spherical
sound field adding height/wide speakers
to create a natural, immersive and
spacious surround soundscape.
S B
P L
P L
P L
M o v i e D S X
bM
<
M u s i c D S X
G a m e D S X
• DTS Neo:X Cinema
This mode is suitable for movie
viewing.
• DTS Neo:X Music
This mode is suitable for any music
source.
II/IIx and Audyssey DSX modes can be
used.
S XCN
D M<
F
N e o : XC i n e m a
N e o : X M u s i c
N e o : X G a m e
G
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie +
Audyssey DSX
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music +
Audyssey DSX
and Audyssey DSX modes can be
used.
D J
H K
<
P L
P L
x
x
M o v i e D S X
M u s i c D S X
H
• DTS Neo:X Game
This mode is suitable for video games.
Audyssey DSX*9
• Audyssey DSX
D B
F bM
G <
H
Audyssey DSX® is a scalable system
that adds new speakers to improve
surround impression. Starting with a
5.1 system Audyssey DSX first adds
Wide channels for the biggest impact
on envelopment. Research in human
hearing has proven that information
from the Wide channels is much more
critical in the presentation of a realistic
soundstage than the Back Surround
channels found in traditional 7.1
systems. Audyssey DSX then creates
a pair of Height channels to reproduce
the next most important acoustical and
perceptual cues. In addition to these
new Wide and Height channels,
Audyssey DSX applies Surround
Envelopment Processing to enhance
the blend between the front and
surround channels.
A u d y s s e y D S X
• Dolby EX + Audyssey DSX
The combination of Dolby EX and
Audyssey DSX modes can be used.
D J
H K
<
D o l b y E X D S X
THX
Founded by George Lucas, THX
develops stringent standards that
ensure movies are reproduced in movie
theaters and home theaters just as the
director intended. THX Modes carefully
optimize the tonal and spatial
characteristics of the soundtrack for
reproduction in the home-theater
environment. They can be used with
2-channel matrixed and multichannel
sources. Surround back speaker output
depends on the source material and the
selected listening mode.
En-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
• THX Cinema
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Cinema
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Music
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Games
Height and THX Cinema/Music/Games
modes can be used.
D CNM
F <
G
S B
D J
F L
G <
T H X C i n e m a
T HXMu s i c
T H X G a m e s
THX Cinema mode corrects theatrical
soundtracks for playback in a home
theater environment. In this mode, THX
Loudness Plus is configured for cinema
levels and Re-EQ, Timbre Matching,
and Adaptive Decorrelation are active.
• THX Music
THX Music mode is tailored for listening
to music, which is typically mastered at
significantly higher levels than movies.
In this mode, THX Loudness Plus is
configured for music playback and only
Timbre Matching is active.
H
H
The PLIIz and THX indicators light on
the AV receiver’s display.
• DTS Neo:X Cinema + THX Cinema
• DTS Neo:X Music + THX Music
The combination of DTS Neo:X
Cinema/Music/Game and THX
Cinema/Music/Games modes can be
used. The Neo:X indicator lights on the
AV receiver’s display.
*10
C N
M<
• THX Games
THX Games mode is meant for
spatially accurate playback of game
audio, which is often mixed similarly to
movies but in a smaller environment.
THX Loudness Plus is configured for
game audio levels, with Timbre
Matching active.
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*7 Movie + THX
Cinema
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Music + THX
Music
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Game + THX
Games
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic
II/IIx and THX Cinema/Music/Games
modes can be used.
• THX Select2 Cinema
D V
H J
K
T HXS2 C i n e m a
T H X S 2 M u s i c
T H X S 2 G a m e s
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1
movie using 8 speakers giving you the
best possible movie watching
experience. In this mode, THX ASA
processing blends the side surround
speakers and back surround speakers
providing the optimal mix of ambient
and directional surround sounds.
• THX Select2 Music
For the replay of multichannel music,
the THX Select2 Music should be
selected. In this mode, THX ASA
processing is applied to the surround
channels of all 5.1 encoded music
sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital,
DVD-Audio, etc. to provide a wide and
stable rear soundstage.
S CNM
<
<
The PLII/PLIIx and THX indicators light
on the AV receiver’s display.
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie + THX
Cinema
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music + THX
Music
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIx
and THX Cinema/Music modes can be
used.
D V
H J
K
<
The PLIIx and THX indicators light on
the AV receiver’s display.
En-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
• THX Select2 Games
For the replay of stereo and
• THX Surround EX
D V
H J
K
D V
H J
K
T H X S u r r E X
This mode expands 5.1-channel
sources for 6.1/7.1- channel playback.
It’s especially suited to Dolby Digital EX
sources. THX Surround EX, also
known as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is
Laboratories and THX Ltd.
multichannel game audio, the THX
Select2 Games mode should be
selected. In this mode, THX ASA
processing is applied to the surround
channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded
game sources such as analog, PCM,
DTS, and Dolby Digital. This accurately
places all game audio surround
information creating a full 360 degree
playback environment. THX Select2
Games is unique as it gives you a
smooth transition of audio in all points
of the surround field.
<
<
Note
*1
Pure Audio cannot be selected when Zone 2/3 is active.
Besides, if you activate Zone 2/3 while Pure Audio is selected, the listening mode will
automatically switch to Direct.
Based on the audio channel signal contained in the source, the corresponding speakers
will output the sound.
The AV receiver can input the DSD signal from HDMI IN. Depending on the player,
setting the output on the player side to PCM might bring better sound.
For the Blu-ray Discs, Dolby Digital is used in a 3.1/5.1-channel speaker system.
DTS is used depending on the configuration of the AV receiver.
If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used.
If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
DTS Neo:X cannot be selected in the case of 192 kHz input signals.
This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied:
*2
*3
• Dolby Pro Logic II Game + THX
Select2 Games
S V
J
K
<
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II
Game and THX Select2 Games modes
can be used. The PLII and THX
indicators light on the AV receiver’s
display.
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Select2 Games
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height and THX Select2 Games modes
can be used.
S J
D <
H
–Center speaker is connected.
–Either the front high or front wide speakers are connected.
*10 This type of speaker layout is available only when the input source is stereo sound.
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Select2 Cinema
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Select2 Music
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height and THX Select2 Cinema/Music
modes can be used.
D J
H <
En-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
be sure to go to the THX Audio Setup screen and
choose the setting that closely corresponds to the
back speaker spacing (➔ page 67). This will re-
optimize the surround sound field.
ASA is used in seven modes: THX Select2 Cinema,
THX Select2 Music, THX Select2 Games, Dolby Pro
Logic II Game + THX Select2 Games, Dolby Pro
Logic IIz Height + THX Select2 Games, Dolby Pro
Logic IIz Height + THX Select2 Cinema and Dolby
Pro Logic IIz Height + THX Select2 Music.
Dialogue Normalization
spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the
THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically
added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX
Surround EX).
Dialogue Normalization (DialogNorm) is a feature of
Dolby Digital, which is used to keep the programs at
the same average listening level so the user does not
have to change the volume control between Dolby
Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD
Timbre Matching
The human ear changes our perception of a sound
depending on the direction from which the sound is
coming. In a movie theater, there is an array of
surround speakers so that the surround information is
all around you. In a home theater, you may only have
two speakers located to the side of your head. In this
case, the Timbre Matching feature filters the
information going to the surround speakers so that
they more closely match the tonal characteristics of
the sound coming from the front speakers. This
ensures seamless panning between the front and
surround speakers.
programs. When playing back software which has
been encoded in Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and
Dolby TrueHD, sometimes you may see a brief
message in the front panel display which will read
“DialogNorm: X dB” (X being a numeric value). The
display is showing how the program level relates with
THX calibration level. If you want to play the program
at calibrated theatrical levels, you may wish to adjust
the volume. For example, if you see the following
message: “DialogNorm: + 4 dB” in the front panel
display, to keep the overall output level at THX
calibrated loudness, just turn down the volume control
by 4 dB. However, unlike a movie theater where the
playback loudness is preset, you can choose your
preferred volume setting for best enjoyment.
The listening mode may not be selected depending
on the input signal. The signal input from the
external AV components can be displayed by the
function on the next page.
Adaptive Decorrelation
In a movie theater, a large number of surround
speakers help create an enveloping surround sound
experience. If a home theater only has two sidewall
surround speakers, the surround speakers may
sound similar to headphones lacking spaciousness
and envelopment. Surround sounds will also collapse
toward the closet speaker as you move away from the
middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation
slightly changes one surround channel’s time and
phase relationship with respect to the other surround
experience as in a movie theater using only two
speakers.
THX Cinema Processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and
technologies established by the world-renowned film
production company Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from
George Lucas’ personal desire to make your
experience of the film soundtrack in both movie
theaters and in your home theater as faithful as
possible to what the director intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special environments
called dubbing stages and are designed to be played
back in movie theaters with similar equipment and
conditions. Most of those soundtracks are remixed
using flat response loudspeakers similar to those
used in the small home theater environment before
being transferred onto Blu-ray Discs, DVD, etc.
THX engineers developed patented technologies to
accurately translate the sound from the movie theater
environment into the home, correcting the tonal and
ASA (Advanced Speaker Array)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which
processes the audio on the two side and two back
surround speakers for the optional surround sound
experience. When you set up your home theater
system using eight speaker outputs (Left, Center,
Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right,
Surround Back Left, Surround Left, and Subwoofer),
En-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Displaying Source Information
Using the Sleep Timer
Setting the Display Brightness
You can display various information about the current
input source as follows.
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver to
turn off automatically after a specified period.
You can adjust the brightness of the AV receiver’s
display, and switch the MASTER VOLUME indicator
off and on in conjunction.
Press RECEIVER once followed by DISPLAY
repeatedly to cycle through the available
information.
Press RECEIVER once followed by SLEEP
1
1
repeatedly to select the required sleep time.
The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10 minutes
in 10 minute steps.
Press RECEIVER once followed by DIMMER
repeatedly to cycle through the following
patterns:
1
Tip
• Normal brightness + indicator off.
• Dim brightness + indicator off.
• Dimmer brightness + indicator off.
• Normal brightness + indicator on (default).
The SLEEP indicator lights on the AV receiver’s
display when the sleep timer has been set. The
specified sleep time appears for about 5
seconds, then the previous display reappears.
• Alternatively, you can use DISPLAY on the AV
receiver.
The following information can be typically displayed.
Tip
Tip
Input source
• If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator goes off.
• To check the time remaining until the AV receiver
sleeps, press SLEEP. Note that if you press again on
SLEEP as the time being displayed is 10 minutes or
less, the sleep timer will go off.
Listening mode
• (North American models) Alternatively, you can use
DIMMER on the AV receiver.
Signal format*1
Sampling
frequency
Input signal
resolution
Output resolution
*1
If the input signal is digital, the signal format is displayed.
En-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Changing the Input Display
Selecting Speaker Layout
Using the Whole House Mode
You can set which speakers you want to use by
priority.
The Whole House Mode is useful when you want to
add extra background music to your home party; this
allows you to enjoy the same stereo music as the
main room in separate rooms (Zone 2/3).
The Whole House Mode selects the same input
source for Multi Zone as the main room’s.
See also:
When you connect an u-capable Onkyo
component, you must configure the input display so
that ucan work properly.
Press RECEIVER followed by SP (speaker
layout) repeatedly to select:
1
This setting can be done only from the front panel.
Press TV/CD or GAME1.
■ 9.1 ch playback
1
“TV/CD” or “GAME1” appears on the AV
receiver’s display.
Important:
• “2. Speaker Setup” (➔ page 64)
• “Multi Zone” (➔ page 83)
corresponding speakers are enabled.
Press and hold down the same button (about
2
3 seconds) to change the input display.
Repeat this step to select the desired input
display.
Press WHOLE HOUSE MODE on the front
panel.
1
To cancel the Whole House Mode, change the
input source for the main room or select a
listening mode (➔ page 45).
The sounds from surround back and front
high speakers are output by priority.
■ TV/CD:
TV/CD → DOCK
→
TAPE
wide speakers are output by priority.
`Speaker Layout:FH/FW:
Note
■ GAME1:
GAME1 ↔ DOCK
• The Whole House Mode only supports analog audio
and audio from NET or USB input selector.
• To adjust the volume of Multi Zone, switch the AV
receiver to Multi Zone control. See “Adjusting the
Volume for Zones” (➔ page 85) for the volume
adjustment of Multi Zone.
• The Whole House Mode is not available in either of the
following cases:
–The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”
(➔ page 79) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set
to “On” (➔ page 79) and you’re listening through
your TV speakers.
–“HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 78) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
–a pair of headphones is connected.
–The “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to
“Digital Crossover” (➔ page 65).
“
Note
The sounds from front high and front wide
speakers are output by priority.
• “DOCK” can be selected for the “TV/CD” or “GAME1”
input selector, but not at the same time.
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using
the remote controller for the first time (➔ page 88).
Note
–The “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or
“Digital Crossover” (➔ page 65).
–The “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes”
(➔ page 65).
• Playback conditions may be limited depending on the
settings in “Speaker Settings” (➔ page 64) and
“Speaker Configuration” (➔ page 65).
• When a listening mode which doesn’t support front high,
front wide or surround back speakers is used, this setting
cannot be selected.
Muting the AV Receiver
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV
receiver.
Press RECEIVER followed by MUTING.
The output is muted and the MUTING indicator
flashes on the AV receiver’s display.
1
Tip
• To unmute, press MUTING again or adjust the volume.
• Muting is automatically cancelled when the AV
receiver is set to standby.
En-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Turning Off the Components
Restoring Default
Using Easy Macros
This button turns off all components activated by the
Easy Macro mode.
You can restore ACTIVITIES to the default settings.
By using ACTIVITIES in Easy macro mode, you can
sequentially operate Onkyo components via simple
commands from a single-button press.
These commands are user-definable. See “Using
Normal Macros” (➔ page 95).
While holding down HOME, press and hold
down ALL OFF until ALL OFF lights (about 3
seconds).
1
Press ALL OFF.
1
Release HOME and ALL OFF, and press ALL
OFF again.
First, the related components stop and turn off.
Second, the AV receiver turns off. Finally, the TV
1
*1*2
ALL OFF flashes twice.
turns off (or enters standby mode).
MY MUSIC) to start the Easy macro command.
The default sequences of actions are described
below.
*1
This step doesn’t apply to MY MUSIC, with the default
settings.
*2
With some televisions, the power may not be turned off
To change the related source component, see
“Changing the Source Components” shown later
in this chapter.
(or enter standby mode).
Changing the Source Components
■ MY MOVIE
First, the TV, the Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player, and the
AV receiver are turned on. The input selector is set to
You can change the source components activated by
the Easy Macro mode.
*1
While holding down REMOTE MODE for the
“BD/DVD”. Finally the player starts playback.
1
*1
playback component you wish to assign,
press and hold down the ACTIVITIES to be
changed (MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC)
(about 3 seconds).
Depending on the start-up time of your Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player, the AV receiver may not activate this playback
command. In this case, press 1on the remote
controller.
ACTIVITIES flashes twice, indicating that the
change is complete.
■ MY TV
First, the TV, the cable set-top box, and the AV
receiver are turned on. Then the input selector is set
to “CBL/SAT”.
Examples:
If you wished to use MY MUSIC to start the Onkyo
CD player, you would press and hold down
MY MUSIC (about 3 seconds) while holding down
TV/CD until it flashes twice.
■ MY MUSIC
The Onkyo CD player and the AV receiver are turned
on. The input selector is set to “TV/CD”. Finally, the
player starts playback.
Note
• While the Easy Macro command is being processed, you
cannot use other ACTIVITIES. If you want to operate other
components, first press ALL OFF and use the desired
ACTIVITIES.
En-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
a short while after the AV receiver is turned on.
you can easily switch between inputs as their
previews are displayed on a single screen.
Press ENTER to display the main preview
(currently selected HDMI input) and the
additional previews (HDMI IN 1/2/3/4/AUX
thumbnail and pressing ENTER will switch the
AV receiver to that input source.
Using the Home Menu
Please wait until it becomes operable.
Press ENTER to display the network service
screen. If you want to use the Internet radio
services, use q/w/e/rto select the desired
service. Pressing ENTER again switches to that
selection. If you want to play music files on a
computer or media server, use q/w/e/rto
select “DLNA” and then press ENTER. If you
want to play music files on a computer or NAS
(Network Attached Storage), use q/w/e/rto
select “Home Media” and then press ENTER.
The Home menu provides quick access to frequently
used menus.
Tip
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
The Home menu will be superimposed on the TV
screen.
Tip
1
• If no video signals are present, the thumbnails will be
filled in black.
well as their positioning on screen (➔ page 80).
Tip
■ USB
• Alternatively, you can use HOME on the AV receiver.
portable players and USB storage devices
connected to the AV receiver’s USB port
(➔ page 36). Note that this selection will be
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver
is turned on. Please wait until it becomes
operable.
Note
• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be
properly rendered on the preview thumbnails of
InstaPrevue.
*1
main preview, HDMI IN 4 is also displayed on the
preview thumbnails.
Press ENTER to select a drive or browse the
contents of the media connected, followed by
q/wto select the desired folder or track.
Pressing ENTER as a track is selected will start
playback.
Use e/ror q/wand ENTER to make the
2
desired selection.
Press HOME to close the menu.
■ Firmware Update
`With this selection, you can update the firmware
of the AV receiver. Note that this selection will be
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver
is turned on. Please wait until it becomes
operable.
■ Setup
`With this selection, you can access the common
settings of the on-screen Setup menu.
Press ENTER to display the Setup menu
(➔ page 61).
Press ENTER to start the procedure
(➔ page 104).
■ Network Service
Tip
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ pages 20, 31).
• You can also access frequently used settings from Quick
Setup (➔ page 57).
`With this selection, you can use various Internet
40). Note that this selection will be grayed out for
■ InstaPrevue
`With this selection, you can preview audio/video
streams coming from HDMI inputs. Even with
multiple components connected through HDMI,
En-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
*1
■ Input
Using the Quick Setup
`You can select input sources and view the
following information: the name of input selectors,
input assignments, the name of the device paired
with the AV receiver via Bluetooth, radio
Advanced Operations
On-screen Setup
information, and ARC function setting.
RECEIVER
In addition, previews of the video streams coming
from HDMI inputs (HDMI IN 1/2/3/4/AUX
*2
*3
INPUT ) are displayed.
Use q/wto select an input source and view the
related information. Pressing ENTER switches to
the selected input source.
ENTER,
q/w/e/r
■ Audio (➔ page 58)
Q SETUP
RETURN
Program”, “Bass”, “Treble”, “Phase Matching
Bass”, “Subwoofer Level”, “Center Level”,
This section describes the procedure for using the
remote controller unless otherwise specified.
*4
Press RECEIVER followed by Q SETUP.
The Quick Setup will be superimposed on the TV
screen.
“Audyssey”, “Dynamic EQ ”,
1
With the AV receiver connected to a TV, there are two
ways of changing the settings on-screen: using the
Quick Setup or the Setup Menu (HOME).
*4
“Dynamic Volume ”, “Late Night”, “Music
Optimizer”, “Re-EQ” , “Re-EQ(THX)” and
“Screen Centered Dialog”.
Tip
■ Quick Setup
*5
■ Video
• Alternatively, you can use QUICK SETUP on the AV
The Quick Setup provides quick access to frequently
used settings. You can change settings and view the
current information.
receiver.
`You can change the following settings: “Wide
*6
Mode” and “Picture Mode ”.
See also:
■ Setup menu (HOME)
• “Picture Adjust” (➔ page 74)
The Setup menu (HOME) provides a convenient way
to change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings
are organized into 9 categories.
B D / DV D
I n p u t
A u d i o
V i d e o
I n f o r m a t i o n
L i s t e n i n g M o d e
*7
■ Information
`You can view the information of the following
items: “Audio”, “Video” and “Tuner”.
Tip
*8
■ Listening Mode
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.
`You can select the listening modes that are
grouped in the following categories: “MOVIE/TV”,
“MUSIC”, “GAME”, and “THX”.
Use q/wand ENTER to make the desired
selection.
2
Press Q SETUP to close the menu.
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.
Use q/wto select the category and e/rto
select the listening mode. Press ENTER to
switch to the selected listening mode.
En-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Tone Control
Note
Using the Audio Settings of Quick
Setup
*1
“BLUETOOTH” cannot be selected, if you’ve selected
■ Bass
NET or USB as input selector in Multi Zone.
When HDMI IN 1/2/3/AUX INPUT is displayed on the
main preview, HDMI IN 4 is also displayed on the
preview thumbnails.
*2
`–10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps.
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds
output from the front speakers.
You can change various audio settings from the
Quick Setup (➔ page 57).
Note
*3
*4
*5
*6
Monitor Out” setting is set to “Use” (➔ page 62).
• The video of the currently-selected input is displayed on
the main screen, not on a preview thumbnail.
“Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” cannot be
selected when any of the THX listening modes is
selected, with “Loudness Plus” set to “On” or “Preserve
THX Settings” set to “Yes” (➔ pages 67, 68).
cannot be selected (➔ page 62).
■ Treble
• These settings are not available in either of the following
cases:
–The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”
(➔ page 79) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set to
“On” (➔ page 79) and you’re listening through your TV
speakers.
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds
output from the front speakers.
You can adjust the bass and treble for the front
speakers, except when the Direct, Pure Audio or THX
listening mode is selected.
–“HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 78) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
• This setting cannot be used with the “NET”, “USB” and
Sound Program
Operating on the AV receiver
Only when you have selected “Custom” in the “Picture
adjust the following items via the Quick Setup:
“Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Hue” and “Saturation”. Press
RETURN to return to the “Picture Mode” setting.
Depending on the input source and listening mode, not
all channels shown here output the sound.
• This setting is not available in either of the following
cases:
Press TONE repeatedly to select either “Bass”
or “Treble”.
■ Sound Program
1
Source 3, Multich Source 1, Multich Source 2,
Multich Source 3
Use – and + to adjust.
2
*7
*8
`Off
With this setting, you can select the combination of
settings that you registered in “Sound Program Edit”
(➔ page 71).
– The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”
“On” (➔ page 79) and you’re listening through your TV
speakers.
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
Note
• If the input selector is changed, the “Sound Program”
setting is switched back to “Off”.
Explanatory Notes
■ Phase Matching Bass
`Off
a
b
`On
aSetting target
bSetting options (default setting underlined)
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 57)
En-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
–Any listening mode other than Direct or Pure Audio is
selected.
Phase Matching Bass
Speaker Levels
–A pair of headphones is not connected.
■ Phase Matching Bass
`Off
`On
■ Subwoofer Level
`–15.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB steps.
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.
• “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” cannot be selected
when any of the THX listening modes is selected, with
“Loudness Plus” set to “On” or “Preserve THX Settings”
set to “Yes” (➔ pages 67, 68).
■ Center Level
deep frequencies of electronic music, a good audio
system should be able to deliver plenty of bass
resonance.
While traditional enhancement systems effectively
the effects of phase shifting, which can overwhelm
mid-range frequencies and muddy the sound. Our
Phase-Matching Bass Boost technology effectively
preserves mid-range clarity-allowing vocals and
strings to shine-while maintaining a smooth, powerful
bass response at all volume levels.
`–12.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB steps.
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while
listening to an input source.
AV receiver is set to standby. To save the setting you
made here, go to “Level Calibration” (➔ page 66)
before setting the AV receiver to standby.
• When “Sound Program” is enabled, the setting must be
made with “Sound Program Edit” (➔ page 71).
Late Night
■ Late Night
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources,
the options are:
`Off
Note
• You cannot use these function while the AV receiver is
muted.
is connected.
“Speaker Configuration” (➔ page 65) cannot be adjusted.
• When “Sound Program” is enabled, “Subwoofer Level”
cannot be used if the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No” in
“Sound Program Edit” (➔ page 71).
`Low:
Small reduction in dynamic range.
`High:
Note
• The Phase Matching Bass is disabled when the Direct,
Pure Audio, or THX listening mode is selected.
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting is fixed
to “Off”.
• When “Sound Program” is enabled, this setting cannot be
used if the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No” in “Sound
Program Edit” (➔ page 71).
Large reduction in dynamic range.
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options are:
`Auto:
The Late Night function is set to “On” or “Off”
automatically.
`Off
®
Audyssey
■ Audyssey
See “Audyssey” in “4. Source Setup” (➔ page 71).
`On
Operating on the AV receiver
Turn this setting on to reduce the dynamic range of
Dolby Digital material so that you can still hear quiet
parts even when listening at low volume levels—ideal
for watching movies late at night when you don’t want
to disturb anyone.
■ Dynamic EQ
See “Dynamic EQ” in “4. Source Setup” (➔ page 72).
Press TONE repeatedly to select “Phase
Matching Bass”.
1
Use – and + to change the setting.
■ Dynamic Volume
See “Dynamic Volume” in “4. Source Setup”
(➔ page 72).
2
Note
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the
material that you are playing and the intention of the original
sound designer, and with some material there will be little
or no effect when you select the different options.
• The Late Night function can be used only when the input
source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or Dolby
TrueHD.
Note
• These technologies can be used when all the following
conditions are met:
–Room Correction and Speaker Setup is completed. Note
that “Audyssey” requires the “Audyssey MultEQ XT32
Full Calibration” method.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 57)
En-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
• The Late Night function is set to “Off” when the AV receiver
is set to standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources, it will be set
to “Auto”.
• With Dolby TrueHD sources, the Late Night function cannot
be used when “TrueHD Loudness Management” is set to
“Off”.
Re-EQ (Re-Equalization)
Screen Centered Dialog
Movie soundtracks were designed for playback in
large movie theaters using professional equipment. If
the movies were not remixed for the home theater,
the tonal balance of the soundtracks can be
excessively bright and harsh when played back over
home audio equipment. In those instances, Re-
Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for
listening to a movie soundtrack in a smaller home
environment.
By using the front high speaker, this function moves
the center image of dialogs etc. upwards, so that the
image of dialogs is fixed to the display height.
■ Screen Centered Dialog
As the value increases, the center image moves
`0
Music Optimizer
■ Music Optimizer
`Off
`On
The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound
quality of compressed music files. When set to “On”,
the M.Opt indicator lights on the AV receiver’s
display.
`1 to 5:
Screen Centered Dialog on.
■ Re-EQ
`Off
`On
Note
• The “Screen Centered Dialog” can be used when a
compatible listening mode is selected.
• This setting cannot be used while a pair of headphones is
connected.
This function can be used with the following listening
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, Multichannel, DTS, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS
Express, DSD, Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height,
Dolby PLIIx Movie, DTS Neo:X Cinema.
Note
• The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM digital
audio input signals with a sampling rate below 48 kHz and
analog audio input signals.
When NET or USB input selector is selected, this function
even works with digital audio input signals with a sampling
rate below 48 kHz (except DSD signals and Dolby TrueHD
signals) regardless of the PCM digital audio input signals
with a sampling rate below 48 kHz.
• The Music Optimizer is disabled when the Direct or Pure
Audio listening mode is selected.
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.
• When “Sound Program” is enabled, the setting must be
made with “Sound Program Edit” (➔ page 71).
■ Re-EQ(THX)
`Off
`On
This function can be used with the following listening
modes: THX Cinema, THX Surround EX, and
THX Select2 Cinema.
Note
• These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones
is connected.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 57)
En-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Main menu item
Sub menu item
Using the Setup Menu (HOME)
Setup Menu Items
5. Listening Mode Preset BD/DVD
(➔ page 76)
CBL/SAT
Main menu item
Sub menu item
STB/DVR
GAME1
GAME2
PC
1. Input/Output Assign
(➔ page 62)
Monitor Out
HDMI Input
Component Video Input
Digital Audio Input
Speaker Settings
Speaker Configuration
Speaker Distance
Level Calibration
Equalizer Settings
THX Audio Setup
RECEIVER
AUX
2. Speaker Setup
(➔ page 64)
TUNER
TV/CD
PHONO
NET
ENTER,
q/w/e/r
RETURN
USB
HOME
BLUETOOTH
Digital Processing
Crossover Network
6. Miscellaneous
(➔ page 77)
Volume Setup
OSD Setup
Tuner
3. Audio Adjust
(➔ page 69)
Multiplex/Mono
Dolby
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
1
2
7. Hardware Setup
(➔ page 78)
DTS
HDMI
press ENTER.
Audyssey DSX
Theater-Dimensional
LFE Level
Auto Standby
Network
Use q/wto select a main menu item, and then
3
4
5
Initial Setup
Remote ID
Remote Mode Setup
press ENTER.
Sound Program Edit
Audyssey
8. Remote Controller
Setup
(➔ page 82)
Use q/wto select a sub menu item, and then
4. Source Setup
(➔ page 71)
press ENTER.
IntelliVolume
A/V Sync
9. Lock Setup
(➔ page 82)
Setup
Use q/wto select a setting target, and use e/r
to change the setting.
Name Edit
Press HOME to close the menu.
Picture Adjust
Audio Selector
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.
Note
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using HOME, the cursor and enter (middle) buttons.
• During Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup, messages, etc., that are displayed on the
TV screen will appear on the AV receiver’s display.
En-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Explanatory Notes
Note
1. Input/Output Assign
Monitor Out
• The “HDMI Through” setting is only available for the HDMI
OUT MAIN jack (➔ page 78).
2. Speaker Setup
a
b
Operating on the AV receiver
On the “Monitor Out” settings, you can select
whether or not to have the video sources’ images
If you connect your TV to HDMI output, “Monitor Out”
setting is automatically set and composite video and
Speaker Configuration
Press MONITOR OUT on the front panel.
The current setting is displayed.
■ Subwoofer
`Yes
c
d
1
`No
*
component video sources are upconverted and
aMain Menu
output.
bSub Menu
Composite video,
component video
Press MONITOR OUT on the AV receiver
repeatedly to select:
`Main, Sub or Both.
2
cSetting target
HDMI
HDMI
dSetting options (default setting underlined)
IN
■ Zone 2 Monitor Out
`Not Use
`Use
When this setting is enabled, the TV connected to
HDMI OUT ZONE 2 can be used as the TV of Zone 2.
OUT
Composite video,
component video
Note
Tip
• See “The video and audio signal flow” (➔ page 21) for
charts showing how the “Monitor Out” and “Resolution”
settings affect the video signal flow through the AV
receiver.
• On the connected component, select the mode in which the
delay between the video and audio does not occur much if
the video signal delay occurs during the playback on the
video component connected to the AV receiver.
Sub Menu
Main Menu
■ Monitor Out
`Main:
Note
• This setting cannot be selected if the “Monitor Out” setting
is set to “Sub” or “Both”.
• When this setting is set to “Use”, the “11ch Playback”
setting is fixed to “No” (➔ page 65).
Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT
MAIN.
`Sub:
• When this setting is set to “Use” and “GAME2” is selected
as the input source for Zone 2, if this setting is changed to
“Not Use”, the input source for Zone 2 will be changed to
“Zone 2 Selector: Source” (➔ page 84).
Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT
SUB.
`Both:
Select this if your TVs are connected to HDMI
OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals
are output from both HDMI outputs at the
resolution supported by both TVs.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ Resolution
`Through:
Select this to pass video through the AV receiver
at the same resolution and with no conversion.
`Auto:
■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME1, GAME2,
PC, TV/CD, PHONO
`HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, HDMI5, HDMI6,
HDMI7, HDMI8:
Select the input to which the component has
been connected.
`- - - - -:
Output composite video and component video
sources from the HDMI output. The video output
signal from the HDMI output is the one
configured in “Component Video Input”.
Each HDMI input cannot be assigned to two input
selectors or more. When HDMI1 - HDMI8 have
already been assigned, you must first set any
unable to assign HDMI1 - HDMI8 to other input
selectors.
HDMI Input
If you connect a video component to an HDMI input,
you must assign that input to an input selector. For
example, if you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
to HDMI IN 2, you must assign “HDMI2” to the
“BD/DVD” input selector.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with
an HDMI cable, composite video and component
HDMI output. You can set this for each input selector
by selecting the “- - - - -” option. See “The video and
audio signal flow” for more information on video
signal flow and upconversion (➔ page 21).
Select this to have the AV receiver automatically
convert video at resolutions supported by your
TV.
*1
`480p (480p/576p), 720p, 1080i, 1080p :
Select the desired output resolution.
`4K:
*
Select this for an output resolution four times
that of 1080p. Depending on the resolution
supported by your TV, it will result in either 3840
× 2160 or 4096 × 2160 pixels.
Composite video,
component video
HDMI
HDMI
`Source:
Select this for an output following the resolution
You can specify the output resolution for HDMI OUT
MAIN and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture
resolution as necessary to match the resolution
supported by your TV.
IN
Note
• The assignment of input selector selected for Zone 2
cannot be changed when the “Zone 2 Monitor Out” is set
to “Use” (➔ page 62).
• If no video component is connected to the HDMI input (even
if the HDMI input is assigned), the AV receiver selects the
video source based on the setting of “Component Video
Input”.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as
explained here, the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority
in the “Digital Audio Input”. In this case, if you want to use
the coaxial or optical audio input, make the appropriate
selection in the “Audio Selector” setting (➔ page 76).
• Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD selector while
“HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 78), otherwise
appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) operation
will not be guaranteed.
• If you assign “- - - - -” to an input selector that is currently
selected in “HDMI Through” (➔ page 78), the “HDMI
Through” setting will be automatically switched to “Off”.
• “AUX” is used only for input from the front panel.
OUT
Composite video,
component video
Tip
Here are the default assignments.
• You can see the picture by pressing ENTER to check the
“Resolution” setting for HDMI OUT MAIN (excluding
Input selector
BD/DVD
CBL/SAT
STB/DVR
GAME1
GAME2
PC
Default assignment
HDMI1
HDMI2
Note
HDMI3
• With some TVs, video signals are processed in the same
way as “Through” when this setting is set to “4K”.
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Sub”, this setting is
fixed to “Through”.
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both”, this setting is
fixed to “Auto”.
HDMI4
HDMI5
HDMI6*1
AUX
Front/MHL (Fixed)
- - - - -
TV/CD
• For optimum video performance, THX recommends using
the HDMI output and setting the video resolution to
“Through”.
PHONO
- - - - -
*1
*1
If you connect your personal computer to PC IN (Analog
RGB), you must assign “- - - - -” to the “PC” input
selector.
When signal is 1080p input at 24 frames per second, it
will be 1080p output at 24 frames per second.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Component Video Input
Digital Audio Input
2. Speaker Setup
If you connect a video component to a component
video input, you must assign that input to an input
selector. For example, if you connect your Blu-ray
Disc/DVD player to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2, you
must assign “IN2” to the “BD/DVD” input selector.
Here are the default assignments.
If you connect a component to a digital audio input,
you must assign that input to an input selector. For
example, if you connect your CD player to the
OPTICAL IN 1, you must assign “OPTICAL1” to the
“TV/CD” input selector.
Here you can check the settings made by
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup function, or set them manually, which
is useful if you change one of the connected speakers
after using Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction
and Speaker Setup function (➔ page 28).
®
Here are the default assignments.
Input selector
BD/DVD
CBL/SAT
STB/DVR
GAME1
GAME2
PC
Default assignment
Input selector
BD/DVD
CBL/SAT
STB/DVR
GAME1
GAME2
PC
Default assignment
COAXIAL1
COAXIAL2
COAXIAL3
OPTICAL1
- - - - -
Note
IN1
• These settings are not available in either of the following
cases:
–a pair of headphones is connected.
–The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”
(➔ page 79) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set to
speakers.
–“HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 78) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
IN2
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
AUX
AUX
FRONT (Fixed)
OPTICAL2
- - - - -
TV/CD
TV/CD
PHONO
PHONO
Speaker Settings
■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME1, GAME2,
PC, AUX, TV/CD, PHONO
■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME1, GAME2,
PC, TV/CD, PHONO
If you change these settings, you must run
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup again (➔ page 28).
`IN1, IN2:
`COAXIAL1, COAXIAL2, COAXIAL3, OPTICAL1,
OPTICAL2:
Select the input to which the component has
been connected.
Select the input to which the component has
If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more
but less than 6, set the minimum speaker impedance
to 4 ohms.
been connected.
`- - - - -:
`- - - - -:
Output composite video sources from the HDMI
output.
Select if the component is connected to an
analog audio input.
If you bi-amp the front speakers, you must change the
“Speakers Type(Front)” setting. For details on
speaker wire connection, see “Bi-amping the Front
Speakers” (➔ page 17). When connecting speakers
without crossover network, you need to change the
“Speakers Type(Front)” setting beforehand. For
details on connection, refer to “Using Speakers
Without Crossover Network” (➔ page 18).
Note
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in
“HDMI Input” (➔ page 63), the same HDMI IN will be set
as a priority in this assignment. In this case, if you want to
use the coaxial or optical audio input, make the appropriate
selection in the “Audio Selector” (➔ page 76).
• Supported sampling rates for PCM signals (stereo/mono)
from a digital input (optical and coaxial) are
Note
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz/16, 20, 24 bit.
• “AUX” is used only for input from the front panel.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to drive up
to 7.1 speakers in the main room.
• Before you change these settings, turn down the volume.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ Speaker Impedance
`4ohms:
Select if the impedance of any speaker is
4 ohms or more but less than 6.
`6ohms:
■ Subwoofer
`Yes
`No
Note
• Powered Zone 3 is not available in the following cases:
–The “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or
“Digital Crossover”.
–The “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “No”.
• When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes” while
Powered Zone 2 is enabled (➔ page 84), the surround
back speakers cannot be used.
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes”, the
front wide speakers cannot be used.
• When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes”, the
front high speakers cannot be used.
• “11ch Playback” is not available in the following cases:
–The “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or
“Digital Crossover”.
–The “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes”.
–The “Zone 2 Monitor Out” setting is set to “Use”.
• If the “11ch Playback” setting is set to “Yes”, the audio of
front wide channel is output from FRONT WIDE PRE OUT
only.
■ Front
`Full Band
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,
200Hz
Select if the impedances of all speakers are
between 6 and 16 ohms.
■ Speakers Type(Front)
`Normal:
Select this if you’ve connected your front
speakers normally.
`Bi-Amp:
Select this if you’ve bi-amped your front
speakers.
`Digital Crossover:
Note
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, the “Front” setting
is fixed at “Full Band”.
*1
*1
■ Center , Surround
`Full Band
200Hz
`None
Select this if you’re using speakers without
crossover network.
*1*2*4*6*7
*1*2*5*6
■ Front Wide
`Full Band
, Front High
Tip
• If “Speakers Type(Front)” is set to “Digital Crossover”, a
confirmation screen appears. Select “Next (2-7. Digital
Processing Crossover Network)” to display the screen
for Digital Processing Crossover Network (➔ page 68).
Continue with the settings.
Speaker Configuration
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,
200Hz
`None
This setting is set automatically by
*2*3*8*9
■ Surround Back
®
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
`Full Band
■ Powered Zone 2, Powered Zone 3
Speaker Setup function (➔ page 28).
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,
200Hz
`None
`No
`Yes:
With these settings, you can specify which speakers
are connected and a crossover frequency for each
speaker. Specify “Full Band” for speakers that can
output low frequency bass sounds adequately, for
example, speakers with a good sized woofer. For
smaller speakers, specify a crossover frequency.
Sounds below the crossover frequency will be output
by the subwoofer instead of the speaker. Refer to
your speaker’s manuals to determine the optimum
crossover frequencies. If you set up your speakers
using Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup, please make sure manually that any
THX speakers are set to “80Hz(THX)” crossover.
Zone 2/3 speakers can be used (Powered
Zone 2/3 enabled).
Note
*1
“Full Band” can be selected only when “Full Band” is
selected in the “Front” setting.
If the “Surround” setting is set to “None”, this setting
cannot be selected.
If the “Surround” setting is set to anything other than
“Full Band”, “Full Band” cannot be selected here.
When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes”, this
setting cannot be selected.
■ 11ch Playback
`No
`Yes
For 11.1-channel playback, set this setting to “Yes”. If
you select front wide speakers setting in Speaker
Configuration is set to “None”, it will be automatically
switched to “80Hz (THX)”.
*2
*3
*4
*5
When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes”, this
setting cannot be selected.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
*6
This setting cannot be selected if the “Speakers Type
(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or “Digital
Crossover”.
If the “11ch Playback” setting is enabled, “None” cannot
be selected.
When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes”
(➔ page 65) while Powered Zone 2 is enabled
(➔ page 84), this setting cannot be selected.
When the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to
“Bi-Amp” or “Digital Crossover” while Powered Zone 2
`meters:
Note
Distances can be set in meters. Range: 0.15m
to 9.00m in 0.15 meter steps.
(The default setting varies from country to country.)
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot
be selected.
*7
*8
■ Double Bass
■ Left, Front Wide Left, Front High Left, Center,
Front High Right, Front Wide Right, Right,
Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround
Back Left, Surround Left, Subwoofer
`Specify the distance from each speaker to your
listening position.
This setting is NOT set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup function (➔ page 28).
*9
®
`On
`Off(THX)
■ Surround Back Ch
Note
`1ch:
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in
Turn this setting on to boost bass output by feeding
bass sounds from the front left, right, and center
channels to the subwoofer. Default setting: “- - - - -”
Select if only one surround back speaker L is
connected.
`2ch:
“Speaker Configuration” cannot be selected (➔ page 65).
(➔ page 65) while Powered Zone 2 is enabled
(➔ page 84), the surround back speakers cannot be used.
• When the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to
“Bi-Amp” or “Digital Crossover” while Powered Zone 2 is
enabled (➔ page 84), the surround back speakers cannot
be used.
Note
Select if two (left and right) surround back
speakers are connected.
• When the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No” or the “Front”
setting to anything other than “Full Band”, this setting is
fixed to “- - - - -”.
• This setting is set to “On” automatically when the
“Subwoofer” and “Front” settings are set for the first time
to “Yes” and “Full Band” respectively.
Note
• If the “Surround Back” setting is set to “None”, this setting
cannot be selected.
Level Calibration
■ LPF of LFE
• If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “Off(THX)”.
(Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel)
`80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz
`Off:
Speaker Distance
This setting is set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup function (➔ page 28).
Low-Pass Filter is not applied.
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff
frequency of the LFE channel’s low-pass filter
(LPF), which can be used to filter out unwanted
hum. The LPF only applies to sources that use the
LFE channel.
This setting is set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup function (➔ page 28).
Here you can adjust the level of each speaker with
the built-in test tone so that the volume of each
speaker is the same at the listening position.
Here you can specify the distance from each speaker
to the listening position so that the sound from each
speaker arrives at the listener’s ears as the sound
designer intended.
*1
■ Left, Front Wide Left, Front High Left, Center ,
Note
Front High Right, Front Wide Right, Right,
Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround
Back Left, Surround Left
• If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “80Hz”.
■ Subwoofer Phase
`0º
`180º:
■ Unit
`feet:
`–12.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB steps.
*1
■ Subwoofer
Distances can be set in feet. Range: 0.5ft to
30.0ft in 0.5 foot steps.
`–15.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB steps.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
–The “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes”
(➔ page 65) while Powered Zone 2 is enabled
(➔ page 84).
–The “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or
“Digital Crossover” while Powered Zone 2 is enabled
(➔ page 84).
Note
Use q/wto select a frequency, and then use
the e/rto adjust the level at that frequency.
The volume at each frequency can be adjusted
from –6dB to 0dB to +6dB in 1 dB steps.
2
3
• These settings cannot be calibrated when the AV receiver
is muted.
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in
“Speaker Configuration” cannot be selected (➔ page 65).
• When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes”
(➔ page 65) while Powered Zone 2 is enabled
(➔ page 84), the surround back speakers cannot be used.
• When the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to
enabled (➔ page 84), the surround back speakers cannot
be used.
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX, which
is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you normally listen
at volume settings below this, be careful because the test
tone will be much louder.
Tip
■ THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer
`No
`Yes
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set this
setting to “Yes”.
“2.5kHz”, “6.3kHz”, or “16kHz”. And for the subwoofer,
“25Hz”, “40Hz”, “63Hz”, “100Hz”, or “160Hz”.
• Low frequencies (e.g., 63 Hz) affect bass sounds; high
frequencies (e.g., 16 kHz) affect treble sounds.
Use qto select “Channel”, and then use e/r
to select another speaker.
Note
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each speaker.
You cannot select speakers that you set to “No”
or “None” in the “Speaker Configuration”
(➔ page 65).
*1
For the center speaker and subwoofer, the level settings
■ BGC
`Off
`On
made by using the Quick Setup are saved in this menu
(➔ page 59).
`Off:
Tone off, response flat.
Tip
If your listening room layout (for practical or aesthetic
reasons) locates most of the listeners close to the
rear wall, the resulting bass level can be sufficiently
reinforced by the boundary that the overall sound
becomes “boomy”. THX Select2 Plus receivers
contain a Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC)
feature to improve bass balance.
•
If you’re using a handheld sound level meter, adjust the level
of each speaker so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listening
position, measured with C-weighting and slow reading.
Note
• When the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected,
the equalizer settings have no effect.
• If “Audyssey” is enabled, it prevails over this setting
(➔ page 71).
Equalizer Settings
speakers individually with a 7-band equalizer. The
volume of each speaker can be set.
Note
THX Audio Setup
• This setting is only available if “THX Ultra2/Select2
Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot
be selected (➔ page 65).
■ Manual Equalizer
`On:
■ Surr Back Speaker Spacing
`<1ft (<0.3m)
`1ft-4ft (0.3m-1.2m)
`>4ft (>1.2m)
You can specify the distance between your surround
back speakers.
You can adjust the equalizer for each speaker
manually. Continue with the following procedure:
■ Loudness Plus
`Off
`On
When the “Loudness Plus” setting is set to “On”, it is
possible to enjoy even subtle nuances of audio
expression at low volume. This is only available when
the THX listening mode is selected.
Press wto select “Channel”, and then use
1
e/rto select a speaker.
Note
• Cannot be set if:
–“Surround Back” is set to “None” (➔ page 65).
–“Surround Back Ch” is set to “1ch” (➔ page 66).
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ Preserve THX Settings
`Yes
`No
physical offset between sound drivers. At a digital
processing level, it corrects this offset by delaying the
related audio signal.
■ Overlap
`No
`Yes
Although this function is meant for speakers without
crossover network, it can also be used with bi-amped
speakers.
If this setting is set to “Yes”, Dynamic EQ and
Dynamic Volume have no effect in THX listening
mode.
With this setting, a frequency band near the specified
crossover frequency is output by both tweeters and
woofers. Based on the frequency selected for
“Crossover”, the cutoff frequency of the low-pass
filter (LPF) will be set to 1/3 octave up and that of the
high-pass filter (HPF) to 1/3 octave down. Example:
With a “Crossover” of “3200Hz”, the cutoff frequency
of the woofers’ LPF will be “4000Hz”, and the
tweeters’ HPF will be “2500Hz”.
Tip
Note
• This setting can be done while listening to an audio source.
• Press MODE/D (Blue) to switch from the current audio
source to test noises. Pressing MODE/D (Blue) again or the
cursor buttons will stop the test noises and switch back to
the original audio source.
• This setting is fixed at “Yes” if “Loudness Plus” is set to
“On”.
THX Loudness Plus
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control
technology featured in THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX
Select2 Plus™ Certified receivers. With THX
Loudness Plus, home theater audiences can now
experience the rich details in a surround mix at any
volume level. A consequence of turning the volume
below Reference Level is that certain sound elements
can be lost or perceived differently by the listener.
THX Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and
spatial shifts that occur when the volume is reduced
by intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel
levels and frequency response. This enables users
experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless
of the volume setting. THX Loudness Plus is
automatically applied when listening in any THX
listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music,
and THX Games modes are tailored to apply the
proper THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of
content.
Note
Tip
• This setting can only be made when “Speakers Type
(Front)” is set to “Digital Crossover” (➔ page 65).
Network are played.
• You can switch from the current audio source to test noises
by pressing MODE/D (Blue).
• In the case of usage of the bi-amped speakers, if there is a
difference between the crossover frequency in the
speakers’ built-in network and the crossover frequency to
be set on the AV receiver, the frequency dip may be
caused. Therefore, it is recommended that this function
should be set to “Yes”.
■ Crossover
`“250Hz”, “320Hz”, “400Hz”, “500Hz, “630Hz”,
“800Hz”, “1000Hz”, “1250Hz”, “1600Hz”,
“2000Hz”, “2500Hz”, “3200Hz”, “4000Hz”,
“5000Hz”
Output Band for Test
`High + Low, High, Low:
Select the output for the audio signal.
■ High Level, Low Level
`–6.0dB to 0.0dB to +6.0dB in 0.5 dB steps.
With this setting, you can set the volume of tweeters
and woofers.
Tip
• Pressing MODE/D (Blue) button plays band-limited test
noises which center on the specified frequency.
• We recommend choosing a crossover value that creates no
volume difference between “High” and “Low”.
Tip
• Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover
Network are played.
Note
• You can switch from the current audio source to test noises
by pressing MODE/D (Blue).
• Refer to your speaker manual when setting without the use
of test noises.
Digital Processing Crossover Network
■ High Phase, Low Phase
`0°
`180°:
With this setting, you can adjust the phase of tweeters
and woofers.
Digital Crossover provides a separate routing system
by splitting the audio signal into separate frequency
bands optimized for each speaker driver. It provides a
fine, three-dimensional sound field that extend each
driver’s performance to the uppermost. With its built-
in time alignment function, this system also adjusts
the sound shifting that occurs when there is a
Cutoff frequencies of the woofers’ low-pass filter
(LPF) and the tweeters’ high-pass filter (HPF) are
set according to the frequency specified for
“Crossover”.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Dolby
Tip
3. Audio Adjust
• Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover
Network are played.
• You can switch from the current audio source to test noises
by pressing MODE/D (Blue).
■ PL IIx Music (2ch Input)
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo
sources.
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.
Multiplex/Mono
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro
■ High Distance, Low Distance
`0inch(0.0cm) to 12inch(30.0cm) in 1 inch
(2.5 cm) steps.
With this setting, you can adjust the virtual position of
tweeter and woofer units. Adjusting “High Distance”
virtually shifts woofers behind tweeters. Adjusting
“Low Distance” virtually shifts tweeters behind
woofers.
■ Multiplex
Input Channel
`Main
`Sub
`Main/Sub
This setting determines which channel of a stereo
multiplex source is output. Use it to select audio
channels or languages with multiplex sources,
multilingual TV broadcasts, and so on.
Panorama
`On
`Off
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the
front stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Music listening mode.
Dimension
`–3 to 0 to +3
Tweeter
With this setting, you can move the sound field
forward or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music listening mode. Higher settings move the
sound field backward. Lower settings move it forward.
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much
surround sound, move the sound field forward to
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround
sound, move it backward.
■ Mono
Distance
Distance
Input Channel
`Left + Right
`Left
`Right
This setting specifies the channel to be used for
playing any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby
Digital, or 2-channel analog/PCM source in the Mono
listening mode.
Woofer
(Low Distance)
(High Distance)
Tip
Center Width
`0 to 3 to 7
Output Speaker
`Center:
Mono audio is output by the center speaker.
`Left / Right:
Mono audio is output by the front left and right
speakers.
This setting determines which speakers output mono
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.
• Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover
Network are played.
• You can switch from the current audio source to test noises
by pressing MODE/D (Blue).
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the
sound from the center speaker when using the Dolby
Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re
using a center speaker, the center channel sound is
output from only the center speaker. (If you’re not
using a center speaker, the center channel sound will
be distributed to the front left and right speakers to
create a phantom center.) This setting controls the
front left, right, and center mix, allowing you to adjust
the weight of the center channel sound.
Note
• If the “Center” setting is set to “None” (➔ page 65), this
setting cannot be selected.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ PL IIz Height Gain
■ TrueHD Loudness Management
Theater-Dimensional
`Low
`Off
■ Listening Angle
`Mid
`On
`Wide:
`High
This setting specifies whether or not to apply the Late
Night processing on a Dolby TrueHD source.
Select if the listening angle is greater than 30
degrees.
`Narrow:
The Height Gain Control in Dolby Pro Logic IIz
enables the listener to select how much gain is
applied to the front high speakers. There are three
settings, “Low”, “Mid” and “High”, and the front high
speakers are accentuated in that order. While “Mid” is
the default listening setting, the listener may adjust
the Height Gain Control to their personal preference.
Note
• When this setting is set to “Off”, the Late Night function for
Dolby TrueHD sources is automatically fixed to “Off”.
• When this setting is set to “Off”, the Dialogue Normalization
information is not available for Dolby TrueHD sources.
Select if the listening angle is less than 30
degrees.
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-
Dimensional listening mode by specifying the angle of
the front left and right speakers relative to the
listening position. Ideally, the front left and right
speakers should be equidistant from the listening
position and at an angle close to one of the two
available settings.
DTS
Note
• If the “Front High” settings is set to “None” (➔ page 65),
this setting cannot be selected.
■ Neo:X Music
Center Image
`0 to 2 to 5
■ Dolby EX
`Auto:
The DTS Neo:X Music listening mode creates
11-channel surround sound from 2-channel stereo
sources. With this setting, you can specify by how
much the front left and right channel output is
attenuated in order to create the center channel.
Changing the value from “0” to “5” will spread the
sound of the center channel to left and right
(outwards).
Front left speaker
Front right speaker
If the source signal contains a Dolby EX flag, the
Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening mode is
used.
Listening angle: 30°
`Manual:
You can select any available listening mode.
This setting determines how Dolby EX encoded
signals are handled. This setting is unavailable if no
is effective with Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and
Dolby TrueHD only.
Note
• For best results, we recommend setting “Narrow” to 20°
and “Wide” to 40°.
®
Audyssey DSX
LFE Level
Note
■ Soundstage
• If the “Surround Back” setting is set to “None”
(➔ page 65), this setting cannot be selected.
• When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes”
(➔ page 65) while Powered Zone 2 is enabled
(➔ page 84), this setting cannot be selected.
• When the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to
“Bi-Amp” or “Digital Crossover” while Powered Zone 2 is
enabled (➔ page 84), this setting cannot be selected.
• If the “Front High” or “Front Wide” setting is enabled
(➔ page 65), this setting is fixed to “Manual”.
`–3dB to Reference to +3dB
With this setting, you can adjust the sound stage when
using Audyssey DSX.
*1
*2
■ Dolby Digital , DTS , Multich PCM, Dolby
*3
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DSD
`–QdB, –20dB, –10dB, or 0dB
Note
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE
(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for each
input sources.
• This listening mode can be selected only when all the
following conditions are satisfied:
–The center speaker is connected.
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud
when using one of these sources, change the setting
to –20 dB or –QdB.
–Either the front high or front wide speakers are connected.
*1
Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources
Operating
procedure
En-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(➔ page 61)
Advanced Operations
*2
*3
*1
DTS and DTS-HD High Resolution sources
DSD (Super Audio CD) sources
■ Equalizer
`Off
4. Source Setup
`Manual:
Items can be set individually for each input selector.
Press the input selector buttons to select an input
source.
Sound Program Edit
The manual setting in “Equalizer Settings”
(➔ page 67) is applied.
■ Sound Program
*1
■ Audyssey
`Off, Movie, Music
See “Audyssey” (➔ page 59).
`Stereo Source 1, Stereo Source 2, Stereo
Multich Source 3
When playing back different content types on the
®
Audyssey
The tone for each speaker is set automatically by
®
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
*1*2
■ Dynamic EQ
`Off, On
See “Dynamic EQ” (➔ page 59).
Speaker Setup. To enable the following settings, you
must first perform the Room Correction and Speaker
Setup (➔ page 28).
• These technologies cannot be used when a pair of
headphones is connected.
*1*2
■ Dynamic Volume
`Off, Light, Medium, Heavy
See “Dynamic Volume” (➔ page 59).
■ Audyssey
Tip
`Off
Note
• To select the registered settings, see “Sound Program”
(➔ page 58).
`Movie:
• “Listening Mode” is only available when the input signal
matches the setting of “Sound Program”.
• You cannot select the “Subwoofer” setting if you set it to
“No” in “Speaker Configuration”.
• “Music Optimizer” is only available when “Stereo
Source 1”, “Stereo Source 2” or “Stereo Source 3” is
selected.
Select this setting for movie material.
The Audyssey indicator will light.
`Music:
■ Listening Mode
You can assign a default listening mode that will be
selected automatically when you select the sound
program.
The “Last Valid” option means that the listening
mode selected last will be used.
The “Straight Decode” option means that straight
decoding listening mode (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.) is
selected.
Select this setting for music material.
The Audyssey indicator will light.
Note
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for
measurement, the “Audyssey”setting cannot be selected.
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for
measurement, “Audyssey” cannot be selected.
*1
This setting cannot be used when the “Listening Mode”
setting is set to “Pure Audio” or “Direct”.
To enable this setting, you must first perform the Room
*2
Correction and Speaker Setup.
■ Subwoofer
`No, Yes
You can choose whether or not to use the subwoofer
with the sound program.
*1
■ Music Optimizer
`Off, On
See “Music Optimizer” (➔ page 60).
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
®
■ Dynamic EQ
`Off
`On:
will play at reference level when the master volume
control is set to the 0 dB position. At that level you
can hear the mix as the mixers heard it.
About Audyssey Dynamic EQ
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by
taking into account human perception and room
acoustics. Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency
response and surround levels moment-by-moment at
any user-selected volume setting. The result is bass
response, tonal balance and surround impression
that remain constant despite changes in volume.
Dynamic EQ combines information from incoming
source levels with actual output sound levels in the
room, a prerequisite for delivering a loudness
®
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the standard
film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the
reference response and surround envelopment when
the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film
reference level is not always used in music or other
Level Offset provides three offsets from the film level
selected when the mix level of the content is not
within the standard.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ becomes active.
The Dynamic EQ indicator will light.
With Audyssey Dynamic EQ, you can enjoy great
sound even when listening at low volume levels.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by
taking into account human perception and room
acoustics. It does so by selecting the correct
frequency response and surround volume levels
moment-by-moment so that the content sounds the
way it was created at any volume level — not just at
reference level.
correction solution. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in
tandem with Audyssey MultEQ XT32 to provide well-
balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.
Note
• If “Dynamic EQ” setting is set to “Off”, this technology
®
cannot be used.
About Audyssey Dynamic Volume
■ Reference Level
Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of
large variations in volume level between television
programs, commercials, and between the soft and
loud passages of movies. Dynamic Volume looks at
the preferred volume setting by the user and then
monitors how the volume of program material is being
perceived by listeners in real time to decide whether
an adjustment is needed. Whenever necessary,
Dynamic Volume makes the necessary rapid or
gradual adjustments to maintain the desired playback
volume level while optimizing the dynamic range.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into
Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is
adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response,
tonal balance, surround impression and dialog clarity
remain the same whether watching movies, flipping
between television channels or changing from stereo
to surround sound content.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset
`0dB:
This should be selected for movie contents.
`5dB:
Select this setting for content that has a very
wide dynamic range, such as classical music.
`10dB:
Select this setting for jazz or other music that
has a wider dynamic range. This setting should
also be selected for TV content as that is usually
mixed at 10 dB below film reference.
`15dB:
■ Dynamic Volume
`Off
`Light:
Activates Light Compression Mode.
`Medium:
Activates Medium Compression Mode.
`Heavy:
Activates Heavy Compression Mode. This
setting affects volume the most. It quiets the
loud parts, such as explosions, and boosts the
quiet parts so they can be heard.
Note
Select this setting for pop/rock music or other
program material that is mixed at very high
listening levels and has a compressed dynamic
range.
• If you want to use Audyssey Dynamic EQ or
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® with THX listening modes, set
the “Loudness Plus” setting to “Off” and set “Preserve
THX Settings” to “No” (➔ pages 67, 68).
• If you make Dynamic Volume active, “Dynamic EQ” is set
to “On”. The Dynamic Vol indicator will light.
Movies are mixed in rooms calibrated for film
reference. To achieve the same reference level in a
home theater system each speaker level must be
adjusted so that –30 dBFS band-limited (500 Hz to
2000 Hz) pink noise produces 75 dB sound pressure
level at the listening position. A home theater system
• When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “Off”, “Dynamic Volume” is
automatically switched to “Off”.
®
automatically calibrated by Audyssey MultEQ XT32
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
–“HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 78) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
IntelliVolume
Name input area
• A/V Sync is disabled when the Pure Audio or Direct
listening mode is used with an analog input source.
• This setting cannot be used with the “NET”, “USB” and
“BLUETOOTH” input selectors.
■ IntelliVolume
4 - 4. Name Edit
Name
BD/DVD
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for
each input selector individually. This is useful if one of
your source components is louder or quieter than the
others.
a
n
b
o
c
p
d
q
e
r
f
g
t
h
u
i
j
k
x
l
m
z
s
v
9
w
0
y
^
1
,
2
.
3
/
4
;
5
:
6
@
7
[
8
]
–
\
Space
Name Edit
Shift
Back Space
OK
You can enter a custom name for each individual
input selector and radio preset for easy identification.
When entered, the custom name will appear on the
display.
The custom name is edited using the keyboard
screen.
+10
Shift
CLR
All Erase
Use e/rto set the level.
If a component is noticeably louder than the others,
use eto reduce its input level. If it’s noticeably
quieter, use rto increase its input level.
A
N
!
B
O
˝
C
P
#
D
Q
$
E
R
F
S
&
`
G
T
’
H
I
J
K
L
M
U
(
V
)
W
_
X
=
Y
˜
Z
|
%
<
>
?
+
{
}
Space
Note
Shift
Back Space
OK
• IntelliVolume does not work for Zone 2/3.
■ Name
+10
Shift
CLR
All Erase
A/V Sync
Use q/w/e/rto select a character, and then
*1
*2
1
a
b
c d
e
press ENTER.
Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters.
a Toggles between lower and upper case
■ A/V Sync
*1
characters.
`0msec to 800msec in 5 msec steps
When using progressive scanning on your Blu-ray
Disc/DVD player, you may find that the picture and
sound are out of sync. With this setting, you can
correct this by delaying the audio signals.
Press ENTER to view the TV picture while setting the
delay when the video source is output to HDMI OUT
MAIN.
To store a name when you’re done, be sure to
2
b Moves the cursor left or right in the Name input
select “OK” by using q/w/e/r, and then press
area.
ENTER.
c Moves the cursor backward and deletes one
*2
character.
d Enters a space character.
e Confirms your entry.
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
Tip
• To name a radio preset, use TUNER to select AM or FM,
and then select the preset (➔ page 42).
The range of values you can adjust will depend on
whether your TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync
and if the “Lip Sync” setting is set to “On” or not
(➔ page 79).
• To restore a name to its default, erase all characters with
CLR, select “OK” and then press ENTER.
*1
This can also be performed by using +10 on the remote
controller.
*2
Note
Press CLR on the remote controller to delete all the
characters you have input.
• This setting is not available in either of the following cases:
–The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”
(➔ page 79) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set to
“On” (➔ page 79) and you’re listening through your TV
speakers.
Note
• This setting cannot be used for the “NET”, “USB” and
“BLUETOOTH” input selectors.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
*2*3*4
details on the monitor output setting
(➔ page 62).
■ Game Mode
`Off
`On
Picture Adjust
Using Picture Adjust, you can adjust the picture
quality and reduce any noise appearing on the
screen.
Press ENTER to view the TV picture while setting
when the video source is output to HDMI OUT MAIN.
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
*1
■ Picture Mode
`Custom:
All settings can be performed manually.
`ISF Day:
Select when the room is bright.
If video signal delay occurs during playback on a video
component (i.e., game console), select the
corresponding input source and set the “Game Mode”
setting to “On”. The delay will decrease but in return
the picture quality will become poor.
`ISF Night:
Select when the room is dark.
`Cinema:
Select when the picture source is a movie or
alike.
`Game:
*1*6
■ Wide Mode
*2*4
■ Film Mode
`Video:
This setting determines the aspect ratio.
`4:3:
“Film Mode” detection is not applied and the
input signal is handled as a video source.
`Auto:
Detects whether the input signal is a video or a
movie. If it is a movie, the appropriate
conversion is applied.
Select when the video source is a game
console.
`Standard:
The AV receiver will adjust to the picture source,
automatically converting it to the appropriate
progressive signal and reproducing the natural quality
of the original picture.
Does not adjust picture quality (changes
resolution).
`Bypass:
Does not adjust picture quality (does not change
resolution).
*2*4*5
■ Edge Enhancement
With “Picture Mode”, you can change the following
settings to be suitable for the movie or game screen
by one operation; “Game Mode”, “Film Mode”, “Edge
Enhancement”, “Noise Reduction”, “Resolution”,
“Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Hue”, “Saturation”,
“Color Temperature”, “Gamma”, “Red Brightness”,
“Red Contrast”, “Green Brightness”, “Green
Contrast”, “Blue Brightness” or “Blue Contrast”.
The receiver has been designed to incorporate setup
and calibration standards established by the Imaging
Science Foundation (ISF). The ISF has developed
carefully crafted, industry-recognized standards for
optimal video performance and has implemented a
training program for technicians and installers to use
these standards to obtain optimal picture quality from
the receiver. Accordingly, Onkyo recommends that
setup and calibration be performed by an ISF
Certified installation technician.
`Off
`Low
`Mid
`High
`Zoom:
With this setting, you can make the picture appear
sharper.
*2*4*5
■ Noise Reduction
`Off
`Low
`Mid
`Wide Zoom:
`High
With this setting, you can reduce noise appearing on
the screen. Select the desired level.
`Auto:
According to the input signals and monitor
output setting, the AV receiver automatically
selects the aspect ratio. See “Monitor Out” for
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
*2*4*7
*1*2*4
*2*4
■ Resolution
■ Saturation
■ Blue Brightness
`Through:
`–50 to 0 to +50
`–50 to 0 to +50
Select this to pass video through the AV receiver
at the same resolution and with no conversion.
With this setting, you can adjust saturation. “–50” is
the weakest color. “+50” is the strongest color.
With this setting you can adjust the brightness of blue
color. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
`Auto:
*2*4
*2*4
■ Color Temperature
`Warm
`Normal
`Cool
■ Blue Contrast
Select this to have the AV receiver automatically
convert video at resolutions supported by your
TV.
`–50 to 0 to +50
With this setting you can adjust the contrast of blue
*8
`480p (480p/576p), 720p, 1080i, 1080p :
Select the desired output resolution.
`4K:
With this setting, you can adjust the color
temperature.
Note
• “Picture Adjust” cannot be used when:
–The “NET”, “USB” or “BLUETOOTH” input selector is
selected, or
–“Monitor Out” is set to “Sub”.
This procedure can also be performed on the remote
supported by your TV, it will result in either 3840
× 2160 or 4096 × 2160 pixels.
*2*4
■ Gamma
in relation to the output color signal.
controller by using the Quick Setup (➔ page 57).
When the “Picture Mode” setting is set to anything other
than “Custom”, this setting cannot be used.
If the “Resolution” setting is set to “4K” (➔ pages 63,
75), this setting is fixed at “Off”.
Press CLR if you want to reset to the default value.
If the “Game Mode” setting is set to “On”, this setting is
fixed at “Off”.
When a 3D video source is input, “Wide Mode” is fixed to
“Full”.
resolution as necessary to match the resolution
supported by your TV.
This setting is available only when “Source” has been
selected in “Resolution” of the “Monitor Out” setting
(➔ page 63).
*2
*2*4
■ Red Brightness
*3
`–50 to 0 to +50
With this setting you can adjust the brightness of red
color. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*2*4
■ Red Contrast
*1*2*4
■ Brightness
`–50 to 0 to +50
brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
`–50 to 0 to +50
With this setting you can adjust the contrast of red
color. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
With some TVs, video signals are processed in the same
way as “Through” when this setting is set to “4K”.
When signal is 1080p input at 24 frames per second, it
will be 1080p output at 24 frames per second.
*2*4
■ Green Brightness
`–50 to 0 to +50
*1*2*4
■ Contrast
`–50 to 0 to +50
With this setting, you can adjust contrast. “–50” is the
least. “+50” is the greatest.
With this setting you can adjust the brightness of
green color. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the
brightest.
*1*2*4
■ Hue
*2*4
■ Green Contrast
`–50 to 0 to +50
`–50 to 0 to +50
With this setting, you can adjust the color hue
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
*1
You can select “ARC” if you select the TV/CD input
selector. But you cannot if you’ve selected “Off” in the
“Audio Return Channel” setting (➔ page 79).
Audio Selector
5. Listening Mode Preset
■ Audio Selector
`ARC:
You can assign a default listening mode to each input
source that will be selected automatically when you
select each input source. For example, you can set
the default listening mode to be used with Dolby
Digital input signals. You can select other listening
modes during playback, but the mode specified here
will be resumed once the AV receiver has been set to
standby.
Setting the Incoming Digital Signal (Fixed
Mode)
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent
to HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver.
With this selection, the TV’s audio can be
automatically selected as a priority among other
assignments.
*1
■ Fixed Mode
`Off:
The format is detected automatically. If no digital
input signal is present, the corresponding analog
input is used instead.
`HDMI:
This can be selected when HDMI IN has been
assigned as an input source. If both HDMI
(HDMI IN) and digital audio inputs (COAXIAL IN
or OPTICAL IN) have been assigned, HDMI
input is automatically selected as a priority.
`COAXIAL:
Use q/wto select the input source that you
1
`PCM:
want to set, and then press ENTER.
The following menu appears.
Only 2-channel PCM format input signals will be
heard. If the input signal is not PCM, the PCM
indicator will flash and noise may also be
produced.
5-1. Listening Mode Preset
BD/DVD
This can be selected when COAXIAL IN has
been assigned as an input source. If both
coaxial and HDMI inputs have been assigned,
coaxial input is automatically selected as a
priority.
Analog/PCM
Mono/Multiplex Source
2ch Source
Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD
DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD
Other Multich Source
Last Valid e r
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
`DTS:
Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) format input signals
will be heard. If the input signal is not DTS, the
dts indicator will flash and there will be no
sound.
Default listening mode for analog and PCM sources.
`OPTICAL:
When “HDMI”, “COAXIAL” or “OPTICAL” is selected
in the “Audio Selector” setting, you can then specify
the signal type in “Fixed Mode”.
Normally, the AV receiver detects the signal format
automatically. However, if you experience either of
the following issues when playing PCM or DTS
material, you can manually set the signal format to
PCM or DTS.
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are
cut off, try setting the format to PCM.
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or
reversing a DTS CD, try setting the format to DTS.
This can be selected when OPTICAL IN has
been assigned as an input source. If both optical
and HDMI inputs have been assigned, optical
`Analog:
The AV receiver always outputs analog signals.
You can set priorities of audio output when there are
both digital and analog inputs.
Use q/wto select the signal format that you
want to set, and then use e/rto select a
listening mode.
2
Only listening modes that can be used with each
input signal format can be selected (➔ pages 45
to 52).
The “Last Valid” option means that the listening
mode selected last will be used.
The “Straight Decode” option means that
straight decoding listening mode (Dolby Digital,
DTS, etc.) is selected.
Note
• This setting can be made only for an input source that is
assigned to HDMI IN, COAXIAL IN, or OPTICAL IN.
• This setting cannot be used with the “NET”, “USB” and
“BLUETOOTH” input selectors.
• When using the Whole House Mode, this setting cannot be
selected.
Note
Note
• The setting will be reset to “Off” when you change the
setting in “Audio Selector”.
• For the “TUNER” input selector, only “Analog” will be
available.
• For the “NET” or “USB” input selector, “Digital” and
“TrueHD” will be available.
• With the GAME2 input selector, “Analog” cannot be used.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ Headphone Level
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB
With this setting, you can specify the headphone
volume relative to the main volume. This is useful if
there’s a volume difference between your speakers
and your headphones.
• For the “BLUETOOTH” input selector, only “Digital” is
available.
6. Miscellaneous
Volume Setup
■ Analog/PCM/Digital
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when an analog (CD, TV, LD, VHS, MD,
turntable, radio, cassette, cable, satellite, etc.) or
PCM digital (CD, DVD, etc.) audio signal is played.
■ Volume Display
`Absolute:
`Relative(THX):
OSD Setup
Note
Displayed range is –QdB, –81.5dB to +18.0dB.
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level
is displayed.
■ On Screen Display
`On
`Off
This preference determines whether operation details
are displayed on-screen when an AV receiver
function is adjusted.
• For the “GAME2” input selector, only “PCM” is available.
■ Mono/Multiplex Source
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative
value 0 dB.
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when a mono digital audio signal is played
(DVD, etc.).
Note
• If the absolute value is set to 82, “82.0Ref” will appear on
the display and the THX indicator will flash.
Even when “On” is selected, operation details may
not be output if the input source is connected to an
HDMI IN.
■ 2ch Source
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when 2-channel (2/0) stereo digital sources,
such as Dolby Digital or DTS, are played.
■ Muting Level
`–QdB (fully muted), –50dB to –10dB in 10 dB
■ Language
steps.
■ Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD
(North American models)
`English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,
Nederlands, Svenska
This setting determines how much the output is muted
when the muting function is used (➔ page 54).
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus format
digital audio signals are played (DVD, etc.). Specifies
the default listening mode for Dolby TrueHD sources,
such as Blu-ray or HD DVD (input via HDMI).
■ Maximum Volume
`Off, 50 to 99 (Absolute display)
`Off, –32dB to +17dB (Relative display)
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
To disable this setting, select “Off”.
(European and Australian models)
`English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,
Nederlands, Svenska, Русский язык, 中文
This setting determines the language used for the on-
screen menus.
■ DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when DTS or DTS-HD High Resolution format
digital audio signals are played (DVD, LD, CD, etc.).
Specifies the default listening mode for DTS-HD
Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD
(input via HDMI).
■ Power On Volume
`Last, Min, 1 to 99 or Max (Absolute display)
■ Screen Saver
`3min, 5min, 10min
`Off
With this setting, you can set the time until the screen
saver activates itself. Once active, the screen saver
will go off and the screen will return to its previous
state if the AV receiver is operated in any way.
`Last, –QdB, –81dB to +18dB (Relative display)
With this preference, you can specify the volume
setting to be used each time the AV receiver is turned
on.
To use the same volume level that was used when
the AV receiver was turned off, select “Last”.
The “Power On Volume” setting cannot be set higher
than the “Maximum Volume” setting.
■ Other Multich Source
Specifies the default listening mode for multichannel
PCM sources from HDMI IN such as DVD-Audio, and
DSD multichannel sources such as Super Audio CD.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ HDMI Through
`Off
`BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME1, GAME2,
PC, AUX, TV/CD, PHONO:
Selects the input source for which the HDMI
Through function is enabled.
`Last:
Note
7. Hardware Setup
Tuner
• When the setting is set to “On” and the menu is closed, the
names of connected p-compatible components and
“RIHD On” are displayed on the AV receiver.
“Search…” → “(name)” → “RIHD On”
■ AM/FM Frequency Step (North American
models)
`10kHz/200kHz:
`9kHz/50kHz:
When the AV receiver cannot receive the name of the
component, it is displayed as “Player*” or “Recorder*”, etc.
(“*” shows up and indicates the number of components,
when two or more are received).
The HDMI Through function is activated on the
input source selected at the time of setting the
AV receiver to standby mode.
Select the frequency step according to your
area.
• When an p-compatible component is connected to
the AV receiver via an HDMI cable, the name of the
connected component is displayed on the AV receiver
display. For example, while you are watching TV
broadcasting, if you operate a Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
(being powered on) with the remote control of the AV
receiver, the name of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player will be
displayed on the AV receiver.
• Set it to “Off” when a connected piece of equipment is not
compatible or it is unclear whether the equipment is
compatible or not.
• If operation is not normal when set to “On”, change the
setting to “Off”.
When enabling the HDMI Through function,
regardless of whether the AV receiver is on or in
standby, both audio and video streams from an HDMI
input will be output to the TV or other components via
in standby mode. Note that the indicator may not light
under certain conditions (➔ page 26).
This setting is fixed to “Auto” automatically when the
above “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”,
resulting in automatic input source selection.
■ AM Frequency Step (European and Australian
models)
`10kHz:
`9kHz:
Select the frequency step according to your
area.
For AM/FM tuning to work properly, you must specify
the AM/FM frequency step used in your area.
Note
Note
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for
details.
• When this setting is changed, all radio presets will be
deleted.
• Only an input source assigned to an HDMI IN via
“HDMI Input” setting is enabled (➔ page 63).
• The power consumption in standby mode will increase
during the HDMI Through function; however in the following
cases, the power consumption can be saved:
–The TV is in standby mode.
–You are watching a TV program.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for
details.
• Depending on the connected component, the correct input
source may not be selected with the setting fixed to “Auto”.
• This setting is set to “Off” automatically when the “HDMI
CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “Off”.
• When the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”, the
power consumption on standby mode slightly increases.
(Depending on the TV status, the AV receiver will enter
standby mode as usual.)
• The HDMI component (connected to HDMI IN 1/2/3/AUX
INPUT) selected for Zone 2 cannot be operated with the
remote controller through the AV receiver using RIHD
function and also cannot be operated on the TV connected
to HDMI OUT MAIN using CEC function.
HDMI
■ HDMI CEC (RIHD)
`Off
`On
Turn this setting on to allow p-compatible
components connected via HDMI to be controlled by
the AV receiver (➔ page 20).
• The HDMI component (connected to HDMI IN 1/2/3/AUX
INPUT) selected for Zone 2 can be operated on the TV in
Zone 2 using CEC function.
• When the source equipment is connected with the u
connection, it may malfunction if “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set
to “On”.
• This function is only available for the HDMI OUT MAIN jack.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
HDMI OUT SUB) the audio is output from the speakers
connected to the AV receiver.
■ Audio TV Out (Main)
`Off
■ Audio TV Out (Sub)
`Off
`On
`On
■ Audio Return Channel
This preference determines whether the incoming
audio signal is output from HDMI OUT MAIN. You
may want to turn this preference on if your TV is
to the audio from a connected component through
your TV’s speakers. Normally, this should be set to
“Off”.
This preference determines whether the incoming
audio signal is output from HDMI OUT SUB. You may
want to turn this preference on if your TV is
to the audio from a connected component through
your TV’s speakers. Normally, this should be set to
“Off”.
`Off
`Auto:
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent
to HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver.
The audio return channel (ARC) function allows an
ARC capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI
OUT MAIN of the AV receiver. To use this function,
you must select the TV/CD input selector and your TV
must be ARC capable. Default setting: “- - - - -”
Note
Note
• If “On” is selected and the audio can be output from the TV,
the AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers.
In this case, “TV Speaker” appears on the AV receiver’s
display by pressing DISPLAY.
fixed to “Auto”.
• When “Speakers Type(Front)” is set to “Digital
Crossover”, this setting is fixed to “Off”.
• This setting is fixed to “Off” when “Monitor Out” is set to
“Sub” (➔ page 62).
• If “On” is selected and the audio can be output from the TV,
the AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers.
In this case, “TV Speaker” appears on the AV receiver’s
display by pressing DISPLAY.
• When “Speakers Type(Front)” is set to “Digital
Crossover”, this setting is fixed to “Off”.
• This setting is fixed to “Off” when “Monitor Out” is set to
“Main” (➔ page 62).
• When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both” (➔ page 62), and this
setting is enabled, set audio output of source component to
2ch PCM.
Note
(RIHD)” setting is set to “Off”.
• This setting is set to “Auto” automatically when the “HDMI
CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On” for the first time.
• If you set “Audio Return Channel” to “Auto”, the “Audio
Selector” settings of the TV/CD input selector will be
automatically switched to “ARC” (➔ page 76).
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output
even when this setting is set to “On”.
Tip
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output
even when this setting is set to “On”.
• After changing the settings of the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)”,
“HDMI Through” or “Audio Return Channel”, turn off the
power on all connected pieces of equipment and then turn
them on again. Refer to the user’s manuals for all
connected pieces of equipment.
• When “Audio TV Out (Main)” or “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set
to “On” and you’re listening through your TV’s speakers,
turning up the AV receiver’s volume control will make the
sound be output from the AV receiver’s front left and right
speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing
sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or
turn down the AV receiver’s volume.
• When “Audio TV Out (Sub)” is set to “On” and you’re
listening through your TV’s speakers, turning up the AV
receiver’s volume control will make the sound be output
from the AV receiver’s front left and right speakers. To stop
the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the
settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
receiver’s volume.
• Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set
to “On” and the audio is output from the TV.
• When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both” (➔ page 62) and only
“Audio TV Out (Sub)” is set to “On”, the audio is not output
from the TV connected to HDMI OUT SUB except in the
case the audio input is via HDMI.
■ Lip Sync
`Off
`On
• Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set
to “On” and the audio is output from the TV.
This function allows the AV receiver to automatically
correct any delay between the video and the audio,
based on the data from the connected monitor.
• If the audio signal from the player is not supported by the
TV, the audio is not output from the TV even if this setting
is enabled. When the audio cannot be output from the TV,
(When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both”, the audio cannot be
output form the TV connected to both HDMI OUT MAIN and
HDMI OUT SUB) the audio is output from the speakers
connected to the AV receiver.
Note
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible TV
supports HDMI Lip Sync.
• If the audio signal from the player is not supported by the
TV, the audio is not output from the TV even if this setting
is enabled. When the audio cannot be output from the TV,
(When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both”, the audio cannot be
output form the TV connected to both HDMI OUT MAIN and
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ InstaPrevue
Network
Note
These settings apply to “InstaPrevue” of the Home
menu (➔ page 56) and specify the preview display of
HDMI video streams.
• Set to “On”, the Auto Standby function may activate itself
during playback with some sources.
• The Auto Standby function does not work when Zone 2/3 is
on.
This section explains how to configure the AV
receiver’s network settings manually.
After modifying the network settings, you must
confirm the changes by executing “Save”.
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t
need to change any of these settings, as the AV
receiver is set to use DHCP to configure itself
automatically by default (i.e., DHCP is set to
“Enable”). If, however, your router’s DHCP server is
disabled (you’re for example using static IP), you’ll
need to configure these settings yourself, in which
case, a knowledge of Ethernet networking is
Sub Window
`Multi:
Displays preview thumbnails all at once.
`Single:
Displays preview thumbnails one-by-one.
With this setting, you can set the number of preview
thumbnails displayed.
■ HDMI Through
`Off
`On
This setting enables or disables the Auto Standby
during HDMI Through by detecting the audio/video
input signal.
When this setting is set to “On”, the AV receiver will
automatically enter standby mode if there is no audio
and no video signal input during HDMI Through for 30
when Zone 2/3 is on.)
Position
(with “Sub Window” set to “Multi”)
`Top, Bottom, Left, Right
(with “Sub Window” set to “Single”)
`Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Left, Lower
Right
What’s DHCP?
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used
by routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other
devices to automatically configure themselves on a
network.
When this setting is set to “Off”, the status of HDMI
Through is continued regardless of audio/video input
signal.
With this setting, you can set the position of preview
thumbnails on the TV screen.
What’s DNS?
Tip
Note
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain
names into IP addresses. For example, when you
enter a domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in
your Web browser, before accessing the site, your
browser uses DNS to translate this into an IP
address, in this case 63.148.251.142.
• Entering standby mode is possible by setting “HDMI CEC
(RIHD)” to “On” and using CEC-compatible component
regardless of the above-mentioned setting.
See “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” in “7. Hardware Setup” for linked
operation (➔ page 78).
• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be
properly rendered on the preview thumbnails of
InstaPrevue.
Auto Standby
• When the HDMI Through is enabled, the power
consumption slightly increases.
■ Network Connection
`Wired
■ Auto Standby
`Off
Note
• This setting is fixed to “Off” when “Auto Standby” is set to
“Off”.
`Wireless
`On
This setting determines whether you connect the AV
receiver to network by wired LAN or wireless LAN. If
you connect by wireless LAN, select “Wireless”. See
“Performing Wireless LAN Setup” for setting
(➔ page 31).
When “Auto Standby” is set to “On”, the AV receiver
will automatically enter standby mode if there is no
operation for 30 minutes with no audio and no video
signal input.
“Auto Standby” will appear on the AV receiver’s
display and OSD 30 seconds before the Auto
Standby comes on.
Tip
• The same setting is available even if “Wireless” is selected
in “Network Connection” in initial setup (➔ page 27).
Default setting: On (European and Australian
models), Off (North American models)
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ MAC Address
This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access
Control) address. This address cannot be changed.
■ Proxy Port
If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port
number here.
Tip
• If pairing setting is not set, “Ready” appears on-screen
display. The name of the device paired with the AV receiver
is displayed if pairing setting is set.
• For details on the Bluetooth connection, refer to the
instruction manual of the Bluetooth-enabled device.
• The pairing can be done by holding down BLUETOOTH
button on the AV receiver until BLUETOOTH indicator
■ DHCP
`Enable
`Disable
`On
`Off
network.
When enabled, the NET indicator will be dimly-lit
while the AV receiver is in standby mode. Note that
the indicator may not light under certain conditions
(➔ page 26).
This setting determines whether or not the AV
receiver uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP
Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server
settings.
Note
• This setting cannot be selected if you’ve selected NET or
USB as input selector in Multi Zone.
Note
• If you select “Disable”, you must configure the “IP
Address”, “Subnet Mask”, “Gateway”, and “DNS Server”
settings yourself.
Initial Setup
Note
• When set to “On”, the power consumption slightly
increases in standby mode.
If you skipped the initial setup wizard, for example on
first-time use, you can reaccess it from here.
See “Initial Setup” (➔ page 26).
■ IP Address
`Class A:
`Class B:
“172.16.0.0” to “172.31.255.255”
`Class C:
“192.168.0.0” to “192.168.255.255”
Enter a static IP address provided by your Internet
Service Provider (ISP).
■ Update Notice
`Enable
`Disable
When this setting is enabled, you will be notified if a
firmware update via network of high importance is
available.
Note
• This setting cannot be selected if the “Monitor Out” setting
is set to “Sub”.
Note
• Selecting “Never Remind me” on the notification window
will switch this setting to “Disable” (➔ page 26).
• For details on the update notification, see “Firmware
Update Notification” (➔ page 26).
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.
■ Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP
(typically 255.255.255.0).
■ Bluetooth
This setting enables the AV receiver to pair with
Bluetooth-enabled device.
■ Gateway
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.
Status
■ DNS Server
Enter the DNS server address provided by your ISP.
Press ENTER button to display “Now Pairing” and
start pairing.
■ Proxy URL
To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
8. Remote Controller Setup
Remote ID
9. Lock Setup
With this preference, you can protect your settings by
locking the setup menus.
■ Remote ID
`1, 2, or 3
■ Setup
`Locked
When several Onkyo components are used in the
same room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To
differentiate the AV receiver from other components,
you can change its remote ID from “1”, to “2” or “3”.
`Unlocked
When “Locked” is selected, the setup menus will be
locked and you cannot change any setting.
Note
• If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure to
change the remote controller to the same ID (see below),
otherwise, you won’t be able to control it with the remote
controller.
Changing the remote controller’s ID
While holding down RECEIVER, press and
hold down Q SETUP until the RECEIVER lights
(about 3 seconds).
1
Use the number buttons to enter ID 1, 2, or 3.
RECEIVER flashes twice.
2
Remote Mode Setup
See “Looking up for Remote Control Codes”
(➔ page 87).
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Multi Zone
In addition to the main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in the other room, or as we call Multi Zone. And, you can select a different source for each room.
Making Multi Zone Connections
Connecting Your Zone Speakers Directly to the AV receiver
Connecting the Zone Speakers to an Additional Amplifier
This setup allows you to select different sources for Main room and Zone 2/3. This
is called Powered Zone, as the Zone 2/3 speakers are powered by the AV
receiver.
This setup allows 9.1-channel playback in your main listening room and 2-channel
stereo playback in Zone 2/3.
To use this setup, you must activate the Powered Zone 2/3 setting (➔ page 65).
Main room
Main room
AV receiver
AV receiver
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 2
Zone 3
Receiver/
Receiver/
integrated amp
integrated amp
R
L
R
L
Note
• With this setup, the volume of Zone 2/3 is controlled by the AV receiver.
Note
• The volume of Zone 2/3 must be set on the Zone 2/3 amplifier.
• When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main room is reduced to 7.1 channels.
• When Powered Zone 3 is used, playback in the main room is reduced to 5.1 channels.
En-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
12V Trigger Out
To turn on Zone 2/3 and select an input source,
press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 followed by an input
selector button within 8 seconds.
Zone 2/3 turns on, the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on
the AV receiver’s display.
Note
1
• If you use HDMI OUT ZONE 2, make sure to set “Zone 2
Monitor Out” to “Use” (➔ page 62).
• Video and audio signals from an HDMI input will be output
to HDMI OUT ZONE 2.
• The information of connected component appears on a TV
in Zone 2 by pressing DISPLAY.
When Zone 2/3 is turned on, the output from the 12V
TRIGGER OUT jack goes high (+12 V and max.
150 mA for Zone 2, +12 V and max. 25 mA for
Zone 3). Connecting this jack to a 12-volt trigger input
on a component in Zone 2/3 will make that
component turn on or off as the AV receiver turns on
or off the Zone 2/3.
Tip
• The corresponding trigger output goes high (+12 V).
To select AM or FM, press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3
and the TUNER input selector repeatedly.
Controlling Multi Zone Components
Zone 2 Video Output
■ Operating on the AV receiver
To select the same source as the main room’s,
press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 twice. “Zone 2
Selector: Source” or “Zone 3 Selector: Source”
appears on the AV receiver’s display.
Input selector buttons
Tip
• The on-screen information appears on the TV screen in
Zone 2 by connecting the TV to HDMI OUT ZONE 2 of the
AV receiver with HDMI cable.
8ON/STANDBY
MASTER VOLUME
To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3
followed by 8ON/STANDBY within 8 seconds.
The zone is turned off.
2
The AV receiver allows you to enjoy the HDMI
audio/video in Zone 2 by connecting the TV of
Zone 2.
Tip
Main room
TV
• The corresponding trigger output goes low (0 volts).
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
■ Operating on the remote controller
To control Zone 2/3, you must press ZONE on the
remote controller first.
ZONE turns red when Zone 2 is on, and green when
Zone 3 is on.
Tip
AV receiver
• The Whole House Mode function shares the input source of
main room with Multi Zone (➔ page 54).
8RECEIVER
ZONE
Input selector buttons
MUTING
Zone 2
TV
VOLq/w
En-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
• The component connected to HDMI input other than HDMI
IN 1/2/3/AUX INPUT is selected as an input source for
Zone 2, the linked operations of pmay not work
properly. In this case, set the linked operations to Off on the
source component.
Muting Zones
Press ZONE repeatedly, then point the remote
controller at the AV receiver and press
8RECEIVER.
1
■ Operating on the remote controller
Zone 2/3 turns on, the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on
the AV receiver’s display.
Press ZONE repeatedly, and then press
MUTING.
1
• When setting the AV receiver to standby mode while Zone
2/3 is active, the Z2 or Z3 indicator is dimly lit.
Tip
• Activating Zones in the main room when the listening mode
is set to Pure Audio will automatically switch it to Direct.
• “GAME2” cannot be selected as input sources for Zone 3.
• When “GAME2” is the input source of Main room and
Zone 3 is set to share the same source, no sound will be
output from Zone 3.
• Even if you repeatedly press the remote controller’s ZONE
to select zones, the last zone selection will be retained once
you have switched to other components by pressing other
REMOTE MODE after pressing ZONE.
• The corresponding trigger output goes high (+12 V).
Tip
To select an input source for Zone 2/3, press
ZONE repeatedly, followed by an INPUT
SELECTOR button.
To select AM or FM, press ZONE and the TUNER
input selector repeatedly.
• To unmute, press ZONE followed by MUTING again. Zones
can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
2
3
Note
• ZONE 2 LINE OUT and ZONE 2 L/R output 2ch PCM,
analog, NET or USB input sources. To listen to the PCM
source, you need to make an HDMI connection.
• Only analog, NET or USB input source is output from the
ZONE 3 LINE OUT jacks and ZONE 3 L/R terminals.
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations for your
main room and Zone 2/3. The same AM/FM radio station
will be heard in each room. Namely, if you have selected an
FM station for the main room, that station will also be output
in Zone 2/3.
To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE repeatedly,
followed by 8RECEIVER.
The zone is turned off.
Tip
• The corresponding trigger output goes low (0 volts).
Adjusting the Volume for Zones
• If an HDMI component selected in Zone 2 outputs the
sound other than PCM, the sound is not output from
ZONE 2 L/R and ZONE 2 LINE OUT.
■ Operating on the remote controller
• Both audio and video outputs from an HDMI component
may interrupt when the main room and Zone 2 are set to
share the same source or not.
Press ZONE repeatedly.
1
• You cannot select different input selector NET or USB for
your main room and Zone 2/3. Namely, if you have selected
USB input selector for Zone 2/3, USB input selector will be
selected in main room even if NET has been selected for
main room.
Use VOL q/w.
2
■ Operating on the AV receiver
Press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 (the Z2/Z3 indicator
on the AV receiver’s display flashes).
• “BLUETOOTH” cannot be selected as input selector in
Multi Zone. If you play audio from Bluetooth-enabled device
in Multi Zone, select “Zone 2 Selector: Source” or “Zone 3
Selector: Source”, and “BLUETOOTH” as input selector in
Main room.
1
Use MASTER VOLUME control within 8
seconds.
2
• When Zone 2/3 is activated and its input selector is
selected, the power consumption of standby mode slightly
increases.
• While Zone 2/3 is on, ufunctions will not work.
If your Zone 2/3 speakers are connected to a receiver
or integrated amplifier in Zone 2/3, use its volume
control to adjust the volume.
En-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Using a Multiroom Kit with Other
Components
Using the Remote Controller in
Zone and Multiroom Control Kits
From the connecting block
Miniplug cable
In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV
receiver’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals
received at the AV receiver’s IR IN jack are fed
through to the other component via the IR emitter.
Signals picked up by the AV receiver’s remote control
sensor are not output.
To control the AV receiver with the remote controller
while you’re in Zone, you’ll need a commercially
available multiroom remote control kit for each zone.
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear
line of sight to the AV receiver’s remote sensor, such
as when it’s installed inside a cabinet.
AV receiver
Signal flow
Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone
Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet
IR
Connecting
receiver
block
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone picks up the
infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds
them through to the AV receiver in the main room via
the connecting block.
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared
signals from the remote controller and feeds them to
the AV receiver located in the cabinet via the
connecting block.
IR IN
AV receiver
IR Emitter
IR IN
Remote controller
Other component
IR
IR
Connecting
receiver
block
Connecting
receiver
block
Signal flow
IR IN
The IR emitter should be connected to the AV
receiver’s IR OUT jack, as shown below.
Remote controller
From the connecting block
Inside
cabinet
Miniplug cable
Remote control sensor
AV receiver
Other component
Main room
Signal flow
Zone
Remote controller
Signal flow
The miniplug cable from the connecting block should
be connected to the AV receiver’s IR IN jack, as
shown below.
Emitter
Miniplug
IR Emitter
Signal flow
En-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
If you can control the component, use q/wto
select “OK”, and then press ENTER.
The on-screen menu returns to the “Remote
Mode Setup” front screen.
Controlling Other
Components
1
2
9
Use e/ror q/wto select “Setup”, and then
press ENTER.
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to
control your other AV components, including those
made by other manufacturers. This section explains
how to enter the remote control code for a component
that you want to control: DVD, TV, CD, etc.
See “Learning Commands” for learning commands
directly from another component’s remote controller
(➔ page 94).
Use q/wto select “Remote Controller Setup”,
3
4
5
If you cannot control the component, use q/w
to select “Try Next Code” and press ENTER.
The next code is displayed.
and then press ENTER.
Use q/wto select “Remote Mode Setup”, and
then press ENTER.
Use q/wto select a remote mode, and then
Entering Remote Control Codes
press ENTER.
You’ll need to enter a code for each component that
you want to control.
The menu of category selection appears.
See “Using Normal Macros” for programming
ACTIVITIES to perform a sequence of remote control
actions (➔ page 95).
Use q/wto select a category, and then press
6
7
ENTER.
Look up the appropriate remote control code
The keyboard screen for brand name input
appears.
in the separate Remote Control Codes list.
The codes are organized by category (e.g., DVD
player, TV, etc.).
Preprogrammed Remote Control
Codes
Use q/w/e/rto select a character, and then
press ENTER.
While holding down the REMOTE MODE
The following REMOTE MODE buttons are
preprogrammed with remote control codes for
controlling the components listed. You do not need to
enter a remote control code to control these
components.
2
Repeat this step for the first three characters of
the brand name.
button to which you want to assign a code,
press and hold down DISPLAY (about 3
seconds).
When you have entered the 3rd character, select
“Search” and press ENTER.
A list of brand names is retrieved.
The REMOTE MODE button lights.
For details on controlling these components, see the
indicated pages.
Note
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for
RECEIVER and the multi zone button.
Use rto select “Not Listed”, and then press
BD/DVD Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player (➔ page 89)
ENTER.
• Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV.
• Except for RECEIVER, TV, and the multi zone button,
remote control codes from any category can be
assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons. However,
these buttons also work as input selector buttons, so
choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds
with the input to which you connect your component.
For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD
input, choose TV/CD when entering its remote control
code.
TV/CD
Onkyo CD player (➔ page 88)
appears.
STB/DVR Apple TV
Use q/wto select a brand, and then press
ENTER.
8
Looking up for Remote Control Codes
A remote control code with its instructions are
displayed. Follow the procedure.
You can look up for an appropriate remote control
code from the on-screen menu.
Note
• You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output (HDMI
OUT MAIN) to make the following on-screen setting.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
En-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
`30627:
Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to
enter the 5-digit remote control code.
The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice.
If the remote control code is not entered
successfully, the REMOTE MODE button will
flash once slowly.
Note
3
Onkyo DVD player without u
• If any other button than the colored buttons is pressed, the
operation will be cancelled.
• This operation cannot be done while the AV receiver is in
Receiver mode or when Zone 2/3 is active.
`71817:
Onkyo CD player without u
`32900/33100/33500:
Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player
`32901/33104/33504:
Onkyo HD DVD player
`70868:
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo
Components Connected via RI
Note
• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at
the time of release, they are subject to change.
Onkyo components that are connected via uare
controlled by pointing the remote controller at the AV
receiver, not the component. This allows you to
control components that are out of view, in a rack, for
example.
Onkyo MD recorder without u
`71323:
Onkyo CD recorder without u
`82990:
Remapping Colored Buttons
You can change the configuration of colored buttons,
with which REMOTE MODE buttons are preset.
Onkyo Dock without u
Make sure the Onkyo component is connected
1
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons
with an ucable and an analog audio cable
While holding down the REMOTE MODE
1
(RCA).
button that you want to program, press and
hold down A (Red) until the REMOTE MODE
button lights (about 3 seconds).
You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default
remote control code.
See “Connecting Onkyo RI Components” for
details (➔ page 24).
You can only change colored buttons for
components whose codes belong to categories
of the Remote Control Codes list (BD/DVD
player, TV, cable set-top box, etc).
Enter the appropriate remote control code for
a REMOTE MODE button, by referring to the
previous section.
While holding down the REMOTE MODE
2
1
button that you want to reset, press and hold
down HOME until the REMOTE MODE button
lights (about 3 seconds).
`42157:
Onkyo cassette tape deck with u
Within 30 seconds, press the colored buttons
Within 30 seconds, press the REMOTE MODE
button again.
2
2
in the order that you want to reassign them.
The button presses are assigned to each button
from left to right. The REMOTE MODE button
flashes twice, indicating that the sequence has
been successfully assigned. If the sequence is
not successfully assigned, the REMOTE MODE
button will flash once slowly.
`81993:
Onkyo Dock with u
The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice,
indicating that the button has been reset.
Each REMOTE MODE button is preprogrammed
with a remote control code. When a button is
reset, its preprogrammed code is restored.
Press the REMOTE MODE button, point the
3
remote controller at the AV receiver, and
operate the component.
Controlling Onkyo components without u
If you want to control an Onkyo component by
pointing the remote controller directly at it, or you
want to control an Onkyo component that’s not
connected via u, use the following remote control
codes:
Note
• The learning command is also reset.
Tip
• To reset the REMOTE MODE buttons to their default
settings, see “Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons”.
En-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
Controlling Apple TV
Controlling a Blu-ray Disc/DVD Player, HD
DVD Player or DVD Recorder
Resetting the Remote Controller
By programming the supplied remote controller with
the appropriate remote control code, you can use it to
operate your Apple TV.
You can reset the remote controller to its default
settings.
BD/DVD is preprogrammed with the remote control
code for controlling a component that supports the
Use the following remote control codes:
`02615:
*1
(limited to some models). The component
While holding down RECEIVER, press and
hold down HOME until RECEIVER lights
(about 3 seconds).
1
must be able to receive remote control commands via
pand be connected to the AV receiver via
Apple TV
Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.
RECEIVER flashes twice, indicating that the
remote controller has been reset.
2
Controlling MHL-Enabled Mobile Device
Use the following remote control codes:
`32910/33101/33501/31612:
By programming the supplied remote controller with
the appropriate remote control code, you can use it to
operate your MHL-enabled mobile device.
Connect your MHL-enabled mobile device to the AUX
INPUT MHL jack. We advise you to program the
remote control code on the AUX button.
Use the following remote control codes:
(North American models)
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player with p
Controlling Other Components
*1
The psupported by the AV receiver is the CEC
system control function of the HDMI standard.
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
programmed with the remote control code for your
component, you can control your component as
described below.
For details on entering a remote control code for other
components, see “Entering Remote Control Codes”
(➔ page 87).
`33101:
MHL-enabled mobile device
(European and Australian models)
`32910:
Controlling a TV
MHL-enabled mobile device
Note
TV is preprogrammed with the remote control code
*1
for controlling a TV that supports the p
• With some mobile devices, reliable operation cannot be
guaranteed.
(limited to some models). The TV must be able to
receive remote control commands via pand
be connected to the AV receiver via HDMI. If
controlling your TV via pdoesn’t work very
well, program your TV’s remote control code into TV
and use the TV remote mode to control your TV.
Use the following remote control codes:
`11807/13100/13500:
TV with p
En-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
■ DVD player/DVD recorder operation
■ TV operation
Press the appropriate REMOTE
MODE button first.
Available buttons
Available buttons
Number: 1 to 9, 0
TOP MENU
DISPLAY
a 8, INPUT, TV VOL q/w g
b
h
Number: +10*1
DISPLAY
MUTING
CH +/–
GUIDE
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
i 8SOURCE
b
SETUP
MUTING
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
h
j
k
l
m
n
d
j
h
i
CH +/–
SETUP
k
d
DISC +/–
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
*1
MENU
7, 6
PREV CH
RETURN
CLR
f
l
A (Red)*1
B (Green)
C (Yellow)*1
D (Blue)*1
RETURN
CLR
m
n
f
B (Green)*1
C (Yellow)*1
D (Blue)*1
j
k
Number: 1 to 9, 0
g
Number: +10*1
a
b
■ VCR/PVR operation
Available buttons
l
m
Available buttons
TOP MENU
DISPLAY
b
h
GUIDE
DISPLAY
b
h
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
i 8SOURCE
c
d
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
i 8SOURCE
SETUP
MUTING
CH +/–
DISC +/–
MENU
d
j
k
SETUP
MUTING
CH +/–
d
j
k
l
m
n
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6
PREV CH
RETURN
CLR
A (Red)
f
l
m
n
Number: 1 to 9, 0
g
B (Green)
RETURN
CLR
e
f
g
Number: +10
C (Yellow)
D (Blue)
■ Cassette tape deck operation
Number: 1 to 9, 0
Number: +10*1
g
Available buttons
e 1, t(Reverse
Playback), 2, 5, 4,
7, 6
i 8SOURCE
MUTING
j
n
En-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
■ Satellite receiver/Cable receiver operation
Press the appropriate REMOTE
MODE button first.
Available buttons
GUIDE
Number: 1 to 9, 0
Number: +10
DISPLAY
b
g
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
SETUP
d
h
h
i
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
i 8SOURCE
7, 6
MUTING
CH +/–
j
k
l
m
n
A (Red)
f
PREV CH
RETURN
CLR
B (Green)
C (Yellow)
D (Blue)
j
k
Available buttons
Number: 1 to 9, 0
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
g
h
b
l
m
SETUP
Number: +10
d
DISPLAY
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
c
d
7, 6
i 8SOURCE
SEARCH
REPEAT
RANDOM
MODE
MUTING
DISC +/–
CLR
f
j
k
n
e
f
Note
• With some components, certain buttons may not work as
expected, and some may not work at all.
• See “Controlling Your iPod/iPhone” about the operation of
iPod/iPhone (➔ page 93).
g
*1
The pfunction is not supported. The p
supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system control
function of the HDMI standard.
n
En-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
Direct Change
The Dock is sold separately. Models sold are
different depending on the region.
For the latest information on the Onkyo Dock
components, see the Onkyo web site at:
http://www.onkyo.com
Before using the Onkyo Dock components, update
your iPod/iPhone with the latest software, available
from the Apple web site.
For supported iPod/iPhone models, see the
instruction manual of the Onkyo Dock.
Using the Onkyo Dock
RI Dock
If you start iPod/iPhone playback while listening to
another input source, the AV receiver will
automatically switch to the input to which the RI Dock
is connected.
With the RI Dock, you can easily play the music of
your iPod/iPhone, or watch the slideshows and
videos of your iPod/iPhone on a TV. In addition, the
on-screen display (OSD) allows you to view,
navigate, and select your iPod/iPhone model’s
contents on your TV, and with the supplied remote
controller, you can control your iPod/iPhone from the
comfort of your sofa. You can even use the AV
receiver’s remote controller to operate your
iPod/iPhone.
Other Remote Operations
You can use the remote controller that came with the
AV receiver to control other iPod/iPhone functions.
The available functionality depends on the AV
receiver.
Note
• If you use your iPod/iPhone with any other accessories,
iPod/iPhone playback detection may not work.
• The System On function may not work depending on the RI
Dock.
Note
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the
AV receiver’s remote controller for the first time
(➔ page 88).
iPod Alarm
If you use the Alarm function on your iPod to start
playback, the AV receiver will turn on at the specified
time and select your iPod as the input source
automatically.
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an ucable
(➔ page 24).
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or
“HDD/DOCK”.
Note
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK”
(➔ page 54).
• Depending on your iPod/iPhone model and generation,
some of the linked operations may not be available.
• This linked operation won’t work while a video is being
played or when the sound set for the alarm is a built-in
sound (Beep).
■ System Function
System On
When you turn on the AV receiver, the RI Dock and
iPod/iPhone turn on automatically. In addition, when
RI Dock and iPod/iPhone are on, the AV receiver can
be turned on by pressing 8SOURCE.
• This linked operation won’t work with models on which
music files cannot be used to set the alarm sound.
■ Operating Notes
• Use the AV receiver’s volume control to adjust the playback
volume.
• While your iPod/iPhone is inserted in the RI Dock, its
volume control has no effect.
• If you do adjust the volume control on your iPod/iPhone
while it’s inserted in the RI Dock, be careful that it’s not set
too loud before you reconnect your headphones.
Auto Power On
If you press the remote controller’s 1(Playback)
while the AV receiver is on standby, the AV receiver
will automatically turn on, select your iPod/iPhone as
the input source, and your iPod/iPhone will start
playback.
En-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
■ uDock operation
Controlling Your iPod/iPhone
Press the appropriate REMOTE
MODE button first.
Available buttons
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
programmed with the remote control code for your
Dock, you can control your iPod/iPhone in the Dock
with the buttons described further in this section.
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for details on
entering a remote control code (➔ page 87).
See the Dock’s instruction manual for more
information.
TOP MENU*1
DISPLAY*2
a
e
b q/w/e/r, ENTER
f 8SOURCE*3
MUTING
PLAYLIST e/r
g
e
f
ALBUM +/–
h
7, 6
i VOL q/w
REPEAT
MENU
d
j
RANDOM
MODE*4
k
• With some iPod/iPhone models, generations and RI Docks,
certain buttons may not work as expected.
• For detailed operation of iPod/iPhone, please refer to the
RI Dock
g
h
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or
“HDD/DOCK”.
instruction manual of the RI Dock.
i
*1
TOP MENU works as the mode button when used with
• 8SOURCE may not work with a remote control
code (without u). In this case, make an u
connection and enter the remote control code 81993
(with u).
the DS-A2 RI Dock.
DISPLAY turns on the backlight for a few seconds.
This button does not turn the Onkyo DS-A2 or DS-A2X
*2
a
b
j
*3
RI Dock on or off. Also, your iPod/iPhone may not
respond the first time you press this button, in which case
you should press it again. This is because the remote
controller transmits the On and Standby commands
alternately, so if your iPod/iPhone is already on, it will
remain on when the remote controller transmits the On
command. Similarly, if your iPod/iPhone is already off, it
will remain off when the remote controller transmits the
Off command.
■ With the RI Control
Make an uconnection and enter the remote control
code 81993 (with u).
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK”
(➔ page 54).
c
d
■ Without the RI Control
*4
Resume mode
k
You must enter the remote control code 82990 first
(➔ page 88).
With the Resume function, you can resume playback of
the song that was playing when you removed your
iPod/iPhone from the Onkyo DS-A2 RI Dock.
En-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
• When the remote controller runs out of batteries, all
commands acquired will be lost and will have to be learned
all over again. Therefore, do not discard your other remote
controllers.
If the command is learned successfully, the
REMOTE MODE button flashes twice.
Learning Commands
The AV receiver’s remote controller can learn the
commands of other remote controllers. By
transmitting, for example, the Play command from
your CD player’s remote controller, the supplied
remote controller can learn it and then reproduce the
exact same command when its 1is pressed in CD
remote mode.
■ Deleting Acquired Commands
1. While holding down the REMOTE MODE button
for the mode from which you want to delete a
REMOTE MODE button lights (about 3 seconds).
2. Press the REMOTE MODE button or the button
from which you want to delete the command.
The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice.
When you press the REMOTE MODE button, all
commands learned in that mode will be deleted.
Within about
4 inches (10 cm)
This is useful when some buttons don’t work as
expected though you entered the appropriate remote
control code (➔ page 87).
Supplied remote
controller
8RECEIVER
To learn more commands, repeat steps 2 and
3.
4
Press any REMOTE MODE button when
you’ve finished. The REMOTE MODE button
flashes twice.
REMOTE
MODE
Note
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:
8RECEIVER, ALL OFF, MY MOVIE, MY TV, MY MUSIC,
REMOTE MODE, MODE.
While holding down the REMOTE MODE
1
button for the mode in which you want to use
the command, press and hold down
8RECEIVER until the REMOTE MODE button
lights (about 3 seconds).
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to 90
commands, although this will be less if commands that use
a lot of memory are learned.
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, and Pause
are preprogrammed with commands for controlling Onkyo
CD players, cassette decks, and DVD players. However,
they can learn new commands, and you can restore the
preprogrammed commands at any time by resetting the
remote controller (➔ page 89).
• To overwrite a previously acquired command, repeat this
procedure.
• Depending on the remote controller used, some buttons
may not respond as expected, or the learning process itself
may not be possible.
On the supplied remote controller, press the
2
button to which you want to assign the new
command.
Point the remote controllers at each other,
3
within about 4 inches (10 cm) apart, and then
you want to acquire until the REMOTE MODE
button flashes.
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can be
acquired.
En-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
When you’ve finished, press ACTIVITIES
again.
Using Normal Macros
3
You can program the remote controller’s ACTIVITIES
to perform a sequence of remote control actions.
Example:
ACTIVITIES button flashes twice.
If you enter 32 commands, the process will
finish automatically.
To play a CD you typically need to perform the
following actions:
Note
1. Press RECEIVER to select the Receiver remote
controller mode.
• MODE cannot be operated during the macro-making
process.
• Once you assign new macro commands, the previously
registered macro will no longer work. If you wish to retrieve
it, you will have to reassign the commands with the macro-
making.
2. Press 8RECEIVER to turn on the AV receiver.
3. Press TV/CD to select the TV/CD input source.
4. Press 1to start playback on the CD player.
You can program ACTIVITIES so that all four actions
are performed with just one button press.
Running Macros
Making Macros
Press MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC.
1
Each ACTIVITIES can store one macro, and each
macro can contain up to 32 commands.
The commands in the macro are transmitted in
the order in which they were programmed. Keep
the remote controller pointed at the AV receiver
until all of the commands have been transmitted.
Macros can be run at any time, regardless of the
current remote controller mode.
MY MOVIE,
MY TV,
MY MUSIC
ALL OFF
Deleting Macros
RECEIVER
While holding down HOME, press and hold
down ALL OFF until ALL OFF lights (about 3
seconds).
1
Press ALL OFF again.
ALL OFF flashes twice.
2
While holding down RECEIVER, press and
hold down MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC
until MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC lights
(about 3 seconds).
1
2
Note
• When Normal macros are deleted, ACTIVITIES are
restored to their default settings, namely the Easy macro
commands (➔ page 55).
• When using Normal macros, Easy macros cannot be used,
which includes changing the source components.
Press the buttons whose actions you want to
program into the macro in the order you want
them performed.
For the CD example above, you would press the
following buttons: 8RECEIVER, TV/CD, 1.
En-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
The on-screen information appears only on a TV that
is connected to HDMI outputs.
Audio
Troubleshooting
■ There’s no sound, or it’s very quiet
Make sure that the digital input source is selected properly.
(➔ page 64)
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for
a solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue
yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer.
Power
■ Can’t turn on the AV receiver
Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed in all
the way (➔ page 19).
Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into the
wall outlet.
Resetting the AV receiver
Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all components
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five
seconds or more, then plug it in again.
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting the
AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer.
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it
on and, while holding down CBL/SAT, press
8ON/STANDBY. “Clear” will appear on the AV
receiver’s display and the AV receiver will enter
standby mode.
Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is correct,
and that the bare wires are in contact with the metal part of
each speaker terminal. (➔ page 16)
■ The AV receiver turns off unexpectedly
The AV receiver will automatically enter standby mode
when Auto Standby has been set and launches.
(➔ page 80)
Make sure that the input source is properly selected.
(➔ page 33)
Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.
(➔ page 17)
■ The AV receiver turns off and after restoring the
power, it turns off again
Check the volume. The AV receiver is designed for home
theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range, allowing
precise adjustment.
The protection circuit has been activated. Remove the
power cord from the wall outlet immediately. Make sure
that all speaker cables and input sources are properly
connected, and leave the AV receiver with its power cord
disconnected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power
cord and turn the power on. If the AV receiver turns off
again, avoid resetting it and unplug the power cord. Then
contact your Onkyo dealer. (➔ page 17)
If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the AV receiver’s
display, press the remote controller’s MUTING button to
unmute the AV receiver. (➔ page 54)
Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your
radio presets and custom settings.
While a pair of headphones is connected to the PHONES
jack, no sound is output from the speakers. (➔ page 24)
If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings, and be
sure to select a supported audio format.
Caution:
• If “CHECK SP WIRE” appears on the AV receiver’s
display, the speaker cables may be shorting.
Check the digital audio output setting on the connected
device. On some game consoles, such as those that
support DVD, the default setting is off.
RECEIVER
HOME
With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an audio
output format from a menu.
WARNING:
• If smoke, smell or abnormal noise is produced by the AV
receiver, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet
immediately and contact your Onkyo dealer.
If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must connect
an MC head amp, or an MC transformer.
Make sure that none of the connecting cables are bent,
twisted, or damaged.
Not all listening modes use all speakers. (➔ page 45)
To reset the remote controller to its factory defaults,
while holding down RECEIVER, press and hold down
HOME until RECEIVER lights (about 3 seconds).
Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.
Specify the speaker distances and adjust the individual
speaker levels. (➔ page 66)
Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not still
connected.
En-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
■ The front high, front wide and surround back
speakers produce no sound
Depending on the current listening mode, no sound may be
produced by the front high, front wide and surround back
speakers. Select another listening mode. (➔ page 45)
■ The speaker volume cannot be set as required
Check to see if a maximum volume has been set.
(➔ page 77)
If the input signal format is set to “PCM” or “DTS”. Set it to
“Off”. (➔ page 76)
■ Only the front speakers produce sound
If the volume level of each individual speaker has been
adjusted to high positive values, then the maximum master
volume possible may be reduced. Note that the individual
speaker volume levels are set automatically after the
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 Room Correction and Speaker
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, only
the front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.
Depending on the sources, the sound produced by the
front high, front wide and surround back speakers may be
weak.
In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers output
sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to “Left /
Right”. (➔ page 69)
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
(➔ page 65)
■ Noise can be heard
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
(➔ page 65)
When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main room
is reduced to 7.1 channels and the front wide speakers
produce no sound.
Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power cords,
speaker cables, and the like may degrade the audio
performance, so refrain from doing it.
■ Only the center speaker produces sound
When Powered Zone 3 is used, playback in the main room
is reduced to 5.1 channels and the front high, front wide
and surround back speakers produce no sound.
If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music, or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game listening mode with
a mono source, such as an AM radio station or mono TV
program, the sound is concentrated in the center speaker.
An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try
repositioning your cables.
■ The Late Night function doesn’t work
Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital, Dolby
Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD. (➔ page 59)
■ The subwoofer produces no sound
When you play source material that contains no information
in the LFE channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.
In the Mono listening mode, only the center speaker output
sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to “Center”.
(➔ page 69)
Make sure that the “TrueHD Loudness Management”
setting is not set to “Off”. The Late Night function doesn’t
work when this setting is disabled. (➔ page 70)
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
(➔ page 65)
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
(➔ page 65)
■ There’s no sound with a certain signal format
■ About DTS signals
■ The surround speakers produce no sound
Check the digital audio output setting on the connected
device. On some game consoles, such as those that
support DVD, the default setting is off.
When DTS program material ends and the DTS bitstream
stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listening mode and
the dts indicator remains on. This is to prevent noise when
you use the pause, fast forward, or fast reverse function on
your player. If you switch your player from DTS to PCM,
you may not hear any sound because the AV receiver does
not switch formats immediately. In such case, you should
stop your player for about three seconds and then resume
playback.
When the T-D (Theater-Dimensional), Stereo or Mono
listening mode is selected, the surround speakers produce
no sound.
With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an audio
output format from a menu.
Depending on the source and current listening mode, not
much sound may be produced by the surround speakers.
Try selecting another listening mode. (➔ page 45)
Depending on the input signal, some listening modes
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
(➔ page 65)
■ Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode
The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected while
Zone 2/3 is on.
With some CD and LD players, you won’t be able to
playback DTS material properly even though your player is
connected to a digital input on the AV receiver. This is
usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed
(e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency response
changed) and the AV receiver doesn’t recognize it as a
genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you may hear noise.
■ The center speaker produces no sound
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, the
center speaker produces no sound.
■ Can’t get 6.1/7.1 playback
In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers output
sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to “Left /
Right”. (➔ page 69)
If no surround back speakers, front wide speakers and
front high speakers are connected, or the Zone 3 speakers
are being used, 6.1/7.1 playback is not possible.
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
Depending on the number of connected speakers, it is not
always possible to select all of the listening modes.
(➔ pages 45 to 52)
Playing DTS program material, using the pause, fast
forward, or fast reverse function on your player may
produce a short audible noise. This is not a malfunction.
En-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
■ The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
can’t be heard
■ There’s no picture from a source connected to
an HDMI IN
Make sure that the batteries are installed with the correct
polarity. (➔ page 13)
Since it takes longer to identify the format of an HDMI
signal than it does for other digital audio signals, audio
output may not start immediately.
Reliable operation with an HDMI-to-DVI adapter is not
guaranteed. In addition, video signals from a PC are not
guaranteed. (➔ page 107)
Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of batteries,
or old and new batteries. (➔ page 13)
Make sure that the remote controller is not too far away
from the AV receiver, and that there’s no obstruction
between the remote controller and the AV receiver’s
remote control sensor. (➔ page 13)
When the resolution is set to any resolution not supported
by the TV, no video is output from the HDMI outputs.
(➔ page 63)
■ There’s no sound during Whole House Mode
Make sure you’ve selected an analog audio, NET or USB
input.
If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV
support the current video resolution and you need to select
another resolution on your DVD player.
Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to direct
sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Relocate if
necessary.
Video
If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet with
colored-glass doors, the remote controller may not work
reliably when the doors are closed.
■ There’s no picture
Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed in all
the way. (➔ page 22)
■ The on-screen menus don’t appear
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the AV
receiver is connected is selected.
Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller
Make sure that each video component is properly
connected. (➔ page 19)
When the AV receiver is not connected to a TV via HDMI
OUT MAIN, on-screen menus are not displayed.
When using the remote controller to control other
manufacturers’ AV components, some buttons may not
work as expected.
If your TV is connected to the HDMI output(s), select
“- - - - -” in the “HDMI Input” setting to watch composite
video, and component video sources. (➔ page 63)
■ The on-screen information does not appear
Depending on the input signal, the on-screen information
may not appear when the input signal from HDMI IN is
output to a device connected to the HDMI output.
Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control code.
(➔ page 87)
input, you must assign that input to an input selector, and
your TV must be connected to either the HDMI output(s) or
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT. (➔ pages 19, 64)
Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver and
remote controller. (➔ page 82)
Tuner
If the video source is connected to a composite video input,
your TV must be connected to the HDMI output(s) or the
corresponding composite video output. (➔ page 19)
■ Can’t control other components
■ Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is noisy,
or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t light
If it’s an Onkyo component, make sure that the ucable
and analog audio cable are connected properly.
Connecting only an ucable won’t be enough.
(➔ page 24)
If the video source is connected to an HDMI input, you
must assign that input to an input selector, and your TV
63)
Listen to the station in mono. (➔ page 42)
Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller
mode. (➔ pages 12, 89)
While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the
analog video circuitry is turned off and only video signals
input through HDMI IN can be output. (➔ page 45)
When listening to an AM station, operating the remote
controller may cause noise.
If you’ve connected an cassette tape deck to the TV/CD IN
jack, or an RI Dock to the TV/CD IN or GAME 1 IN jacks,
for the remote controller to work properly, you must set the
input display appropriately. (➔ page 54)
Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.
Concrete walls weaken radio signals.
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the AV
receiver is connected is selected.
If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the
appropriate remote control code. (➔ page 87)
If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor
antenna.
When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both”, the “HDMI
Through” setting is only available for the HDMI OUT MAIN
jack. (➔ pages 62, 78)
To control another manufacturer’s component, point the
remote controller at that component. (➔ page 87)
Remote Controller
To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via u,
point the remote controller at the AV receiver. Be sure to
enter the appropriate remote control code first.
(➔ page 88)
■ The remote controller doesn’t work
Before operating this unit, be sure to press RECEIVER.
En-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected via
u, point the remote controller at the component. Be sure
to enter the appropriate remote control code first.
(➔ page 88)
Make sure you’ve selected the right remote mode.
(➔ page 93)
Cannot receive radio wave due to a bad connection.
Shorten the distance from wireless LAN access point or
remove obstacles for a good visibility, and try again. Place
the AV receiver away from microwave ovens or other
access points.
When you use the AV receiver’s remote controller, point it
toward your AV receiver.
The entered remote control code may not be correct. If
more than one code is listed, try each one.
If you still can’t control your iPod/iPhone, start playback by
pressing your iPod/iPhone model’s Play button. Remote
operation should then be possible.
2.4 GHz band for wireless LAN may not be enough.
Connect the ETHERNET port and router with the Ethernet
cable after selecting “Wired” in “Network Connection”
■ Can’t learn commands from another remote
controller
When learning commands, make sure that the transmitting
ends of both remote controllers are pointing at each other.
(➔ page 94)
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone.
Depending on your iPod/iPhone, some buttons may not
work as expected.
Place the AV receiver away from the devices emitting
electromagnetic waves on the 2.4 GHz band (microwave
ovens, game consoles, etc.). If this does not solve the
problem, stop using other devices which emit
electromagnetic waves.
iPod/iPhone as the input source
Always pause iPod/iPhone playback before selecting a
different input source. If playback is not paused, the Direct
Change function may select your iPod/iPhone as the input
source by mistake during the transition between tracks.
Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that cannot
be used for learning? Some commands cannot be learned,
especially those that contain several instructions.
When other wireless LAN devices are used near the AV
receiver, several issues such as interrupted playback and
communication may occur. You can avoid these issues by
changing the channel of your Wi-Fi router. For instructions
on changing channels, see the instruction manual provided
with your Wi-Fi router.
RI Dock for iPod/iPhone
■ iPod/iPhone doesn’t work properly
Try reconnecting your iPod/iPhone.
■ There’s no sound
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is actually playing.
If there is a metallic object near the AV receiver, wireless
LAN connection may not be possible as the metal can
effect on the radio wave.
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in the
Dock.
Zone 2/3
Make sure the AV receiver is turned on, the correct input
source is selected, and the volume is turned up.
If there is more than one access point in the network,
separate each access point.
■ There’s no sound
Audio can be output only when analog, NET, USB or HDMI
(2ch PCM) input source is selected in Zone 2.
Make sure the plugs are pushed in all the way.
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone.
It is recommended to place the Wi-Fi router (access point)
and the AV receiver in the same room.
Audio can be output only when analog, NET or USB input
source is selected in Zone 3.
■ There’s no video
Bluetooth
■ The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound
To use the Zone 2 speakers, you must set the “Powered
Make sure that your iPod/iPhone model’s TV OUT setting
is set to On.
■ Music playback is unavailable on the AV
receiver even after successful Bluetooth
connection
Depending on the characteristics or specifications of your
Bluetooth-enabled device, playback on the AV receiver is
not guaranteed.
Zone 2” setting to “Yes”. (➔ page 65)
Make sure the correct input is selected on your TV or the
AV receiver.
To use the Zone 3 speakers, you must set the “Powered
Zone 3” setting to “Yes”. (➔ page 65)
Some versions of the iPod/iPhone do not output video.
■ The AV receiver’s remote controller doesn’t
control my iPod/iPhone
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Network
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in the
Dock. If your iPod/iPhone is in a case, it may not connect
properly to the Dock. Always remove your iPod/iPhone
from the case before inserting it into the Dock.
■ The audio quality is poor after connection with a
Bluetooth-enabled device
The Bluetooth reception is poor. Move the Bluetooth-
enabled device closer to the AV receiver or remove any
obstacle between the Bluetooth-enabled device and the AV
receiver.
■ Cannot access to Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) network
or Sound playback is interrupted and
communication doesn’t work
The setting of SSID and encryption (WEP, etc.) is not
correct. Make the same settings for network and the AV
receiver.
The iPod/iPhone cannot be operated while it’s displaying
the Apple logo.
En-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
■ Cannot connect with the AV receiver
The Bluetooth-enabled device does not support the profiles
required for the AV receiver.
If the server is serving large music files to several
networked devices simultaneously, the network may
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.
Reduce the number of playback devices on the network,
upgrade your network, or use a switch instead of a hub.
If an MHL-enabled mobile device connected to the AUX
(front) input is charged, the power consumption in standby
mode will increase than the figure above. (➔ page 20)
The Bluetooth function of the Bluetooth-enabled device is
not enabled. Refer to the instruction manual of the
Bluetooth-enabled device for how to enable the function.
■ The sound changes when I connect my
headphones
When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio.
■ Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web
browser
the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if you find that
you can’t connect to a server or Internet radio station,
recheck the AV receiver’s IP address on the “Network”
screen. (➔ page 80)
■ Bluetooth connection cannot be built
When building a Bluetooth connection between the AV
receiver and your Bluetooth-enabled device for the first
time, if the connection is fail, you need to power off your
Bluetooth-enabled device and power on again to clear the
device name, and build the connection again.
■ The speaker distance cannot be set as required
The values entered may be automatically adjusted with
values best-suited for your home theater.
Check the “Network” settings. (➔ page 80)
If there is metallic object near the AV receiver, Bluetooth
connection may not be possible as the metal can effect on
the radio wave.
■ The display doesn’t work
The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listening
mode is selected.
USB Device Playback
If the wireless LAN and Bluetooth connections are used at
router with the Ethernet cable after selecting “Wired” in
“Network Connection” setting in “Network” for a better
connection. (➔ pages 20, 80)
■ How do I change the language of a multiplex
source
Use the “Multiplex” setting in the “Audio Adjust” menu to
select “Main” or “Sub”. (➔ page 69)
Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.
The AV receiver supports USB devices that support the
not be possible with some USB devices even if they
conform to the USB mass storage device class.
(➔ page 108)
■ The ufunctions don’t work
Music Server and Internet Radio
To use u, you must make an uconnection and an
analog audio connection (RCA) between the component
and AV receiver, even if they are connected digitally.
(➔ page 24)
■ Can’t access the server or Internet radio
Depending on the type of format, the playback from a USB
device may not be performed normally. Check the type of
the file formats that is supported. (➔ page 109)
Certain network service or contents available through this
device may not be accessible in case the service provider
terminates its service.
While Zone 2/3 is selected, the ufunctions don’t work.
USB memory devices with security functions cannot be
played.
(➔ page 24)
Check the network connection between the AV receiver
and your router or switch. (➔ page 20)
■ The functions System On/Auto Power On and
Direct Change don’t work for components
connected via u
Make sure that your modem and router are properly
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.
Others
Make sure the server is up and running and compatible
with the AV receiver. (➔ page 108)
These functions don’t work when Zone 2/3 is turned on.
mode may reach up to a maximum of 9.0 W:
(Depending on the TV status, the AV receiver will enter
standby mode as usual.)
–The “HDMI Through” setting is set to other than “Off”.
–The “Network Standby” setting is set to “On”.
(➔ page 24)
Check the “Network”settings. (➔ page 80)
■ When performing Automatic Speaker Setup, the
measurement fails and the message “Ambient
noise is too high.” is displayed.
■ Playback stops while listening to music files on
the server
Make sure your server is compatible with the AV receiver.
(➔ page 108)
This can be caused by a malfunction in your speaker unit.
Check if the unit produces normal sounds.
If you download or copy large files on your computer,
playback may be interrupted. Try closing any unused
programs, use a more powerful computer, or use a
dedicated server.
(➔ pages 78, 81)
Download from Www.SomanuaEls.cno-m1. 0Al0l Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
• We assume no responsibility whatsoever for any
error or damage of network environment or access
device resulting from the use of this apparatus.
Confirm with the provider or access device maker
for more information.
■ The following settings can be made for the
composite video inputs
You must use the buttons on the unit to make these
settings.
Radio Wave Caution
The AV receiver uses a 2.4 GHz radio wave
frequency, which is a band used by other wireless
systems as 1 and 2 described below.
1. Devices which use a 2.4 GHz radio wave
frequency
On the AV receiver, press the input selector for the
input source that you want to set and the HOME
button simultaneously. While holding down the input
selector button, press HOME until “Video ATT :On”
appears on the AV receiver’s display. Then, release
both buttons. To turn the setting off, repeat the above
process so that “Video ATT :Off” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, and release the buttons.
• Video Attenuation
This setting can be made for the BD/DVD,
CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME 1 or AUX input.
If you have a game console connected to the
composite video input, and the picture isn’t very
clear, you can attenuate the gain.
Scope of Operation
• Cordless phones
• Cordless facsimiles
• Microwave ovens
• Wireless LAN devices (IEEE802.11b/g/n)
• Wireless AV equipment
• Wireless controllers for game systems
• Microwave oven-based health aids
• Video transmitter
• Specific type of external monitor and LCD
display
Use of the AV receiver is limited to home use.
(Transmission distances may be reduced depending
on communication environment.)
In the following locations, poor condition or
inability to receive radio waves may cause the
audio to be interrupted or stopped:
iron framed buildings.
• Near large metallic furniture.
• In a crowd of people or near a building or obstacle.
• In a location exposed to the magnetic field, static
electricity or radio wave interference from radio
communication equipment using the same
frequency band (2.4 GHz) as the AV receiver, such
as a 2.4 GHz wireless LAN device
2. Less common devices which use a 2.4 GHz
radio wave frequency
Video ATT :Off: The gain is not changed (default).
Video ATT :On: The gain is reduced by the values
specified below.
–2 dB for the HDMI output.
–6 dB for the MONITOR OUT V output.
• Anti-theft systems
• Amateur radio stations (HAM)
• Warehouse logistic management systems
• Discrimination systems for train or emergency
vehicles
(IEEE802.11b/g/n) or microwave oven.
■ If the picture on your TV/monitor connected to
the HDMI output(s) is unstable, try switching the
DeepColor function off
• If you live in a heavily populated residential area
(apartment, townhouse, etc.) and if your neighbor’s
microwave oven is placed near your AV receiver,
you may experience radio wave interference. If this
occurs, move your AV receiver to a different place.
When the microwave oven is not in use, there will be
no radio wave interference.
If these devices and the AV receiver are used at the
same time, the audio may be undesirably stopped or
disturbed due to a radio wave interference.
Suggestions for improvement
To turn off the DeepColor function, simultaneously
press the STB/DVR and 8ON/STANDBY buttons on
the AV receiver. While holding down STB/DVR, press
8ON/STANDBY until “Deep Color:Off” appears on
the AV receiver’s display. Then, release both buttons.
To reactivate the DeepColor function, repeat the
above process until “Deep Color:On” appears on the
AV receiver’s display and release the buttons.
• Switch off the devices which emit the radio
wave.
• Place the interfering devices away from the AV
receiver.
• The AV receiver uses radio wave, and a third
person can receive the wave on purpose or
accidentally. Do not use the communication for
important or fatal matters.
Download from Www.SomanuaEls.cno-m1. 0Al1l Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
■ Electronic device which requires cautions
Hearing aid, pace maker, other medical electronic
devices, fire alarm, automatic door, and other
automatic control device.
When using a pace maker or other medical electronic
devices, confirm with the medical electronic device
maker or dealer for the effect of the radio wave.
Radio Wave Reflections
The radio waves received by the AV receiver include
the radio wave coming directly from the devices and
waves coming from various directions due to
reflections by walls, furniture and building (reflected
waves). The reflected waves (due to obstacles and
reflecting objects) further produce a variety of
reflected waves as well as variation in reception
condition depending on locations. If the audio cannot
be received properly due to this phenomenon, try
moving the location of the wireless LAN device a little.
Also note that audio may be interrupted due to the
reflected waves when a person crosses or
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for
signal processing and control functions. In very rare
situations, severe interference, noise from an
external source, or static electricity may cause it to
lockup. In the unlikely event that this happens,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait at
least five seconds, and then plug it back in.
approaches the space between the AV receiver and
the wireless LAN device.
• We assume no responsibility whatsoever for any
damages resulting from the use of this apparatus
except in the cases deemed acceptable under the
applicable laws and regulations.
• Operation in all environment is not guaranteed for
wireless LAN. The communication may not be
possible or have desirable communication speed.
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused
by the unit’s malfunction. Before you record
important data, make sure that the material will be
recorded correctly.
Before disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, set the AV receiver to standby.
Precautions
• Do not use this apparatus near an electronic device
handling high-accuracy controls or weak signals.
Doing so may cause an accident due to a
malfunction of the device.
• Do not use this apparatus in use prohibited location
such as an aircraft equipment or a hospital. Doing
so may cause an accident due to a malfunction of
an electronic device or an electro-medical
apparatus. Follow the instructions of the medical
facilities.
Download from Www.SomanuaEls.cno-m1. 0Al2l Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
DISCLAIMER
Video Resolution Chart
control of any company which has designed, manufactured or distributed/have distributed this
device, and its affiliates (collectively, “Company”). We have no control over the nature, content
and availability of those services. The inclusion of any links does not necessarily imply a
recommendation or endorse the views expressed within them.
are protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual property laws of
applicable countries. The information, content and services provided through this device are
for your personal, noncommercial use only. Any information, content or services may not be
used in any manner other than previously approved by the appropriate content owner or
service provider.
You may not modify, copy, republish, translate, exploit, create derivative works, upload, post,
transmit, sell or distribute in any manner any information, content or services available
through this device, unless expressly permitted by the appropriate copyright, patent,
trademark and/or other intellectual property owner, including, without limitation, content owner
or service provider.
THE CONTENT AND SERVICES AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE ARE PROVIDED
“AS IS”. COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT INFORMATION, CONTENT OR SERVICES SO
PROVIDED, EITHER EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY, FOR ANY PURPOSE.
COMPANY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Company makes no representation or warranty of any kind, express or implied, about the
completeness, accuracy, validity, legality, reliability, suitability or availability with respect to
the information, content or services available through this device. Company shall not be liable,
whether in contract or tort, including negligence and strict liability, for any direct, indirect,
special, incidental or consequential damages or any other damages arising out of, or in
connection with, any information contained in, or as a result of the use of any content or
service by you or any third party, even if Company has been advised of the possibility of such
damages, nor shall Company be liable for any third party claims against users of this device
or any third party.
In no event shall Company be responsible nor liable for, without limiting the generality of the
foregoing, any interruption or suspension of any information, content or service available
through this device. Company is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to
the information, content and services available through this device.
The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by
the AV receiver.
✔: Output available
HDMI
4K*1
Output
1080p/24
1080p
1080i
720p
480p/576p
480i/576i
Input
HDMI
*2
4K
✔
1080p/24
1080p
1080i
720p
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
✔
*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
✔
480p/576p
480i/576i
1080p
✔
✔
*2
✔
✔
*2
Component
Composite
✔
*2
1080i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
✔
720p
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
✔
480p/576p
480i/576i
480i/576i
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
✔
✔
✔
*2
✔
PC IN (Analog RGB)*3*4
*5
✔
Component
1080p
Composite
480i/576i
Output
s
1080i
720p
480p/576p
480i/576i
Input
HDMI
4K
1080p/24
1080p
1080i
720p
480p/576p
480i/576i
1080p
Component
Composite
✔
1080i
✔
720p
✔
480p/576p
480i/576i
480i/576i
✔
✔
✔
PC IN (Analog RGB)*3*4
*1
Supported resolutions: [3840 × 2160 30 Hz], [3840 × 2160 25 Hz], [3840 × 2160 24 Hz],
[4096 × 2160 24 Hz]
*2
*3
Supported resolutions for HDMI OUT SUB.
Available resolutions: [640 × 480 60 Hz], [800 × 600 60 Hz], [1024 × 768 60 Hz],
[1280 × 1024 60 Hz], 480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p
Any question or request for service relating to the information, content or services should be
made directly to the appropriate content owners and services providers.
The resolution below is output at the same resolution and with no conversion:
[640 × 480 60 Hz], [800 × 600 60 Hz], [1024 × 768 Hz], [1280 × 1024 60 Hz]
When video signals of personal computers connected to PC IN are output from HDMI
OUT SUB, they may not display properly on some TVs.
576p output is not supported.
*4
*5
Download from Www.SomanuaEls.cno-m1. 0Al3l Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Before Starting
Limitation of liability
The program and accompanying online
Firmware Update
• Set the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting to “Off”
(➔ page 78).
• Turn off the controller device connected via RS232
and network.
• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.
• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio, USB
or servers, etc.
To update the firmware of the AV receiver, you can
choose from the following two methods: update via
network, or update via USB storage. Choose the one
that best suits your environment. Before proceeding
with the update, please read the corresponding
explanations carefully.
documentation are furnished to you for use at your
own risk. Onkyo will not be liable and you will have
no remedy for damages for any claim of any kind
whatsoever concerning your use of the program or
the accompanying online documentation,
regardless of legal theory, and whether arising in
tort or contract. In no event will Onkyo be liable to
you or any third party for any special, indirect,
incidental, or consequential damages of any kind,
including, but not limited to, compensation,
reimbursement or damages on account of the loss
of present or prospective profits, loss of data, or for
any other reason whatsoever.
■ Update via network
You need a Internet connection to update the
firmware.
Update Procedure
■ Update via USB storage (➔ page 105)
Please prepare a USB storage device such as a USB
flash memory stick. You need at least 50 MB of
available space to update the firmware.
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the
remote controller.
1
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.
Select “Firmware Update” and press ENTER.
2
See the Onkyo web site for latest information.
Note that the “Firmware Update” option will be
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver
is turned on. Please wait until it becomes
operable.
Note
• Check the network connection before updating.
• Do not touch any cable or device connected to the AV
receiver during the update process.
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC
while it is being updated.
• Do not shutdown the power of the AV receiver while it is
being updated.
• The storage media in the USB card reader may not work.
• If the USB device is partitioned, each section will be treated
as an independent device.
Updating the Firmware via Network
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using
network connection.
Select “Update via NET” and press ENTER.
3
Note that this option will not be available if there
is no firmware file newer than the currently
installed version. If the AV receiver is not
connected to the internet, “Update via NET” is
not displayed.
Note
• Make sure your AV receiver and TV are turned on and the
AV receiver is connected to the Internet.
• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver while it is being
updated.
• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver
may take a while to read it.
• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which
includes the ability to power them.
• Onkyo takes no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or
damage of data resulting from the use of a USB device with
the AV receiver. Onkyo recommends that you back up your
important music files beforehand.
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the USB port,
Onkyo recommends that you use its AC adapter to power it.
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not
supported. Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub.
• USB devices with security functions are not supported.
• Never plug or unplug an HDMI or Ethernet cable during the
update process.
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC
while it is being updated.
• Never unplug the power cord during the update process.
• It takes up to 20 minutes to complete the firmware update.
• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update
is finished.
Select “Update” and press ENTER.
The update process will begin.
4
During the update process, the on-screen display
may disappear depending on the updated
program. When this occurs, you can still view the
update progress on the AV receiver’s display.
The on-screen display will reappear after the
update is complete, and upon turning the AV
receiver off and on again.
The message “Completed!” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, indicating that the update
has been completed.
5
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Download from Www.SomanuaEls.cno-m1. 0Al4l Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Case 2:
Troubleshooting
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
6
If an error occurs during the update process,
disconnect then reconnect the AC power cord and try
again.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode.
Case 1:
Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote
If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV
receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the
front display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the
following table and take appropriate action.
controller.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode
automatically in 3 minutes regardless of whether
8ON/STANDBY is pressed.
Case 3:
If you do not have an Internet connection to the
network, please contact Onkyo Support.
■ Errors during an update via network
Congratulations! You now have the latest
firmware installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.
Error Code
Description
Updating the Firmware via USB
*-01, *-10
The Ethernet cable was not detected.
Reconnect the cable properly.
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware
using a USB device.
*-02, *-03,
*-04, *-05,
*-06, *-11,
*-13, *-14,
*-16, *-17,
*-18, *-20,
*-21
Internet connection error.
Check the following items:
• Make sure the IP address, subnet mask,
gateway address, and DNS server are
configured properly.
• Make sure the router is turned on.
• Make sure the AV receiver and the router
are connected with an Ethernet cable.
• Make sure your router is configured
properly. See the instruction manual of
the router.
Note
• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver during the update
process.
• Never plug or unplug an HDMI cable or a USB device
during the update process.
• Never unplug the USB storage device containing the
firmware file or the AC power cord during the update
process.
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC
while it is being updated.
• If your network allows only one client
connection and there is any other device
already connected, the AV receiver will
not be able to access the network.
Consult your Internet Service Provider
(ISP).
• If your modem does not function as a
router, you will need a router. Depending
on your network, you may need to
configure the proxy server if necessary.
See the document provided by your ISP.
If you are still unable to access the
Internet, the DNS or proxy server may be
temporarily down. Contact your ISP.
• It takes up to 20 minutes to complete the firmware update.
• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update
is finished.
Before Starting
• Set the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting to “Off”
(➔ page 78).
• Turn off the controller device connected via RS232
and network.
• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.
• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio, USB
or servers, etc.
Others
Retry the update procedure from the
beginning. If the error persists, please
contact Onkyo Support and provide the
error code.
• If there is any data in the USB device, remove it first.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Download from Www.SomanuaEls.cno-m1. 0Al5l Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Update Procedure
Troubleshooting
Case 1:
If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV
receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the
front display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the
following table and take appropriate action.
Select “Update” and press ENTER.
The update process will begin.
10
During the update process, the on-screen display
may disappear depending on the updated
program. When this occurs, you can still view the
update progress on the AV receiver’s display.
The on-screen display will reappear after the
update is complete, and upon turning the AV
receiver off and on again.
Do not turn off the AV receiver and do not
remove the USB device during the update
process.
Connect a USB device to your PC. If there is
any data in the USB device, remove it first.
1
Download the firmware file from the Onkyo
web site. The file name is as follows:
2
ONKAVR****_************.zip
Unzip the downloaded file. The numbers of
folders and files differ according to the model.
Error Code
Description
*-01, *-10
The USB device was not detected. Make
sure the USB flash memory or USB cable is
properly connected to the USB port. If the
USB storage device has its own power
supply, use it to power the USB device.
Copy all the extracted folders including all
folders and files to the root folder of the USB
device. Be careful not to copy the zip file.
3
The message “Completed!” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, indicating that the update
has been completed.
11
12
Remove the USB device from your PC and
connect it to the USB port on the AV receiver.
*-20, *-21
The firmware file was not found in the root
folder of the USB device, or the firmware
file is for another model. Retry and
download the file on the support page of
the web site, following the on-site
instructions. If the error persists, please
contact Onkyo Support and provide the
error code.
4
Remove the USB device.
Make sure the AV receiver and TV are turned
on.
5
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode.
If the AV receiver is in standby mode, press
8ON/STANDBY on the AV receiver to light up
the front display.
Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote
controller.
Others
Retry the update procedure from the
beginning. If the error persists, please
contact Onkyo Support and provide the
error code.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode
automatically in 3 minutes regardless of whether
8ON/STANDBY is pressed.
Select the USB input source.
6
“Now Initializing...” appears on the AV receiver’s
display and then the name of the USB device is
displayed. It takes 20 to 30 seconds to recognize
the USB device.
Congratulations! You now have the latest
firmware installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.
Case 2:
If an error occurs during the update process,
disconnect then reconnect the AC power cord and try
again.
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the
remote controller.
7
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.
Select “Firmware Update” and press ENTER.
8
Select “Update via USB” and press ENTER.
9
Note that this option will not be available if there
is no firmware file newer than the currently
installed version. If the AV receiver is not
connected to the internet, “Update via USB” is
not displayed.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 61)
Download from Www.SomanuaEls.cno-m1. 0Al6l Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Supported Audio Formats
About Copyright Protection
About HDMI
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (up to 7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit)
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution
Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio)
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital
TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a
new digital interface standard for connecting TVs,
projectors, Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, set-top boxes,
and other video components. Until now, several
separate video and audio cables have been required
to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single
cable can carry control signals, digital video, and up
to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM,
multichannel digital audio, and multichannel PCM).
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is
*2
Digital Content Protection) , a copy-protection
system for digital video signals. Other devices
connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also
support HDCP.
Your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player must also support
HDMI output of the above audio formats.
*1
DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface
standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The
*2
video encryption technology developed by Intel for
HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to protect video content and
requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the
encrypted video.
*1
compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface) , so
TVs and displays with a DVI input can be connected
by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may
not work with some TVs and displays, resulting in no
picture.)
*3
DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel,
Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and
Silicon Image, this open industry group’s objective is to
address the industry’s requirements for a digital
connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and
digital displays.
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
*2
Content Protection) , so only HDCP-compatible
components can display the picture.
The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the
following:
Note
• The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital
Visual Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can
be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable.
(Note that DVI connections only carry video, so you’ll need
to make a separate connection for audio.) However,
reliable operation with such an adapter is not guaranteed.
In addition, video signals from a PC are not supported.
• The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may
be restricted by the connected source component. If the
picture is poor or there’s no sound from a component
connected via HDMI, check its setup. Refer to the
Sync, 4K (up-scaling and Passthrough), DTS-HD
Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, Dolby
TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DSD and Multichannel
PCM.
connected component’s instruction manual for details.
Download from Www.SomanuaEls.cno-m1. 0Al7l Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
modem, etc.). Please consult your ISP or computer
dealer if you’re unsure.
The setting varies depending on the media server or
controller devices. Refer to your devices’ instruction
manual for details.
If the operating system of your personal computer is
Windows 8/Windows 7, Windows Media Player 12 is
already installed. For more information, see the
Microsoft web site.
Network/USB Features
Note
Network Requirements
• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your
broadband Internet connection must be working and able to
access the Web. Consult your ISP if you have any problems
with your Internet connection.
• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network
settings automatically. If you want to configure these
settings manually, see “Network” (➔ page 80).
• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so if you
have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must use a
PPPoE-compatible router.
■ Ethernet Network
For the best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet
network is recommended. Although it’s possible to
network wirelessly, playback may be unreliable, so it
is recommended to use wired connections.
USB Device Requirements
• USB mass storage device class (but not always
guaranteed).
■ Ethernet Router
• FAT16 or FAT32 file system format.
• If the storage device has been partitioned, each
section will be treated as an independent device.
• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders
may be nested up to 16 levels deep.
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are
not supported.
A router manages the network, data-routing and
supplying of IP addresses. Your router must support
the following:
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a proxy
server to use Internet radio. If your computer is configured
to use a proxy server, use the same settings for the AV
receiver (➔ page 81).
several networked computers to access the Internet
simultaneously via a single Internet connection. The
AV receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
DHCP supplies IP addresses to the network
devices, allowing them to configure themselves
automatically.
Server Requirements
■ Server playback
Note
The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on
a computer or media server and supports the
following technologies:
• Windows Media Player 11
• Windows Media Player 12
• If the media you connect is not supported, the message “No
Storage” will be displayed.
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV receiver’s
USB port, we recommend that you use its AC adapter to
power it.
• A router with a built-in 100Base-TX switch is
recommended.
• The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that support
the USB Mass Storage Class standard, which allows USB
devices to be connected to computers without the need for
special drivers or software. Note that not all USB MP3
players support the USB Mass Storage Class standard.
Refer to your USB MP3 player’s instruction manual for
details.
• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot be
played.
• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or
damage to data stored on a USB device when that device
is used with the AV receiver. We recommend that you back
up your important music files beforehand.
Some routers have a built-in modem, and some
Internet Service Providers (ISP) require you to use
specific routers. Please consult your ISP or computer
dealer if you’re unsure.
• DLNA-certified media server
• The computer or media server must be on the same
network as the AV receiver.
• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders
may be nested up to 16 levels deep.
■ CAT5 Ethernet cable
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to
connect the AV receiver to your home network.
Note
• Depending on the media server, the AV receiver may not
recognize it, or may not be able to play its music files.
■ Internet Access (for Internet radio)
■ Remote playback
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must
have Internet access. A narrowband Internet
connection (e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide
satisfactory results, so a broadband connection is
strongly recommended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL
• Windows Media Player 12
• DLNA-certified (within DLNA Interoperability
Guidelines version 1.5) media server or controller
device.
• MP3 players containing music files that are managed with
special music software are not supported.
Download from Www.SomanuaEls.cno-m1. 0Al8l Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which
includes the ability to power them.
• Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub. The USB
device must be connected directly to the AV receiver’s USB
port.
• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver
make take a while to read it.
• USB devices with security functions cannot be played.
48 kHz, bitrates of between 5 kbps and 320 kbps,
and WMA DRM are supported.
• WMA Pro/Voice formats are not supported.
500 kbps are supported. Incompatible files cannot
be played.
■ LPCM (Linear PCM)
■ WMA Lossless (.wma or .WMA)
• Sampling rates of 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz,
96 kHz are supported.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz are
supported.
• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit
■ WAV (.wav or .WAV)
Supported Audio File Formats
*
Only for playback via network.
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and
192 kHz are supported.
■ Apple Lossless (.m4a/.mp4/.M4A/.MP4)
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz are
supported.
The AV receiver does not support playback of video
files.
For server playback and playback from a USB device,
the AV receiver supports the following music file
formats.
Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. However,
playback times may not display correctly.
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit
*
For playback from a USB device, sampling rates of
176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are not supported.
■ DSD (.dsf or .DSF)
• The sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz is supported.
■ AAC
(.aac/.m4a/.mp4/.3gp/.3g2/.AAC/.M4A/.MP4/
.3GP or .3G2)
Note
■ Dolby TrueHD (.vr/.mlp/.VR/.MLP)
• Sampling rates of 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz,
96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.
• With remote playback, the AV receiver does not support the
following music file formats: FLAC, Ogg Vorbis, DSD and
Dolby TrueHD.
• In the case of server playback, the following file formats
may not be played depending on the server type.
AAC stands for MPEG-2/MPEG-4 Audio.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz and bitrates of
between 8 kbps and 320 kbps are supported.
*
For playback from a USB device, sampling rates only of
48 kHz and 64 kHz are supported.
■ MP3 (.mp3 or .MP3)
About DLNA
• MP3 files must be MPEG-1/MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3
format with sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz,
12 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps
and 320 kbps. Incompatible files cannot be played.
■ FLAC (.flac or .FLAC)
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data
compression.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and
192 kHz are supported.
The Digital Living Network Alliance is an international,
cross-industry collaboration. Members of DLNA
develop a concept of wired and wireless interoperable
networks where digital content such as photos,
music, and videos can be shared through consumer
electronics, personal computers, and mobile devices
in and beyond the home. The AV receiver complies
with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines version 1.5.
■ WMA (.wma or .WMA)
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an
audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation. Audio can be encoded in WMA
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
■ Ogg Vorbis (.ogg or .OGG)
®
format by using Windows Media Player.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz and bitrates of between 48 kbps and
• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
Download from Www.SomanuaEls.cno-m1. 0Al9l Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
This product is protected by certain intellectual property
License and Trademark
Information
rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology
outside of this product is prohibited without a license from
Microsoft.
THX and the THX logo are trademarks of THX Ltd. which
are registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the
Microsoft group of companies.
THX Select2 Plus
Before any home theater component can be THX Select2
Plus certified, it must pass a rigorous series of quality and
performance tests. Only then can a product feature the
THX Select2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee that the
Home Theater products you purchase will give you superb
performance for many years to come. THX Select2 Plus
requirements define hundreds of parameters, including
power amplifier performance, and pre-amplifier
performance and operation for both digital and analog
domains. THX Select2 Plus receivers also feature
proprietary THX technologies (e.g., THX Mode) which
accurately translate movie soundtracks for home theater
playback.
Qdeo and QuietVideo are trademarks of Marvell or its
Manufactured under a license from U.S. Patent No’s:
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535; 6,226,616;
7,212,872; 7,272,567; 7,668,723; 7,392,195; 7,930,184;
7,333,929; 7,548,853; 7,003,467 and 7,283,634. DTS, the
Symbol, and DTS and the Symbol together are registered
trademarks & DTS Neo:X | 11.1 is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
©2012 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech
Corporation.
“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio
Corporation.
Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of
THX Ltd.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Apple, iPod and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Apple TV is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Music Optimizer™ and “WRAT” are trademarks of Onkyo
Corporation.
“MHL, the MHL Logo, and Mobile High-Definition Link are
trademarks or registered trademarks of MHL LLC in the
United States and other counties.”
Manufactured under license from
“The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States
and other countries.”
Audyssey Laboratories™, Inc. U.S. and foreign patents
pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT32,
Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and
Audyssey DSX® are registered trademarks of
Audyssey Laboratories, Inc.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the
Wi-Fi Alliance.
Wi-Fi certified logo shows international association
certifying interoperability “Wi-Fi Alliance” ensures the
product has passed the test for compatibility with other
Wi-Fi certified equipment.
“DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED® are
trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the
Digital Living Network Alliance.”
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
InstaPrevue and the InstaPrevue logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Silicon Image, Inc. in the United
States and other countries.
Download from Www.SomanuaEls.cno-m1. 1Al0l Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Onkyo is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective owners.
Onkyo does not guarantee Bluetooth compatibility between
the AV receiver and all Bluetooth-enabled devices.
For compatibility between the AV receiver and another
device with Bluetooth technology, consult the device’s
documentation and dealer. In some countries, there may
be restrictions on using Bluetooth devices. Check with your
local authorities.
Download from Www.SomanuaEls.cno-m1. 1Al1l Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Video Section
Compatible Bluetooth profiles
Specifications
Amplifier Section
A2DP 1.2 (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile)
AVRCP 1.3 (Audio Video Remote
Control Profile)
Input Sensitivity/Output Level and Impedance
1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component Y)
0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component PB/CB,
PR/CR)
Supported Codecs
SBC
Rated Output Power
All channels:
Transmission range (A2DP)
1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Composite)
135 watts minimum continuous power
20 Hz - 20,000 Hz (Sampling frequency
44.1 kHz)
Component Video Frequency Response
5 Hz - 100 MHz/+0 dB, –3 dB
per channel, 8 ohm loads, 2 channels
driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a
maximum total harmonic distortion of
0.08% (FTC)
*1
The actual range will vary depending on factors such as
obstacles between devices, magnetic fields around a
microwave oven, static electricity, cordless phone,
reception sensitivity, antenna’s performance, operating
system, software application, etc.
Tuner Section
(North American)
9 ch × 185 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch
driven of 1% (IEC)
(Others)
FM Tuning Frequency Range
87.5 MHz - 107.9 MHz (North American)
87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz, RDS (Others)
Maximum Effective Output Power
9 ch × 230 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch
AM Tuning Frequency Range
522/530 kHz - 1611/1710 kHz
Preset Channel
General
driven (JEITA)
(Australian)
40
*
Dynamic Power
*
Power Supply
AC 120 V, 60 Hz (North American)
AC 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz (Others)
IEC60268-Short-term maximum output power
Network Section
300 W (3 Ω, Front)
250 W (4 Ω, Front)
150 W (8 Ω, Front)
Power Consumption 9.1 A (North American)
870 W (Others)
No-sound Power Consumption
120 W
Ethernet LAN
Wireless LAN
Compatible standards:
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
THD+N (Total Harmonic Distortion+Noise)
0.08% (20 Hz - 20 kHz, half power)
60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 Ω)
Stand-by Power Consumption
®
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n standard (Wi-Fi
standard)
WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit, WPA/WPA2-
PSK (AES), WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP)
Damping Factor
0.1 W (North American)
0.15 W (Others)
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Input Sensitivity and Impedance (Unbalance)
Security:
200 mV/47 kΩ (LINE)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM)
Rated RCA Output Level and Impedance
200 mV/470 Ω (PRE OUT)
Maximum RCA Output Level and Impedance
4.6 V/470 Ω (PRE OUT)
435 mm × 198.5 mm × 437.5 mm
17-1/8" × 7-13/16" × 17-1/4"
Transmission frequency
1 - 11 ch (North American)
10 - 13 ch (France)
Weight
18.5 kg (40.8 lbs.)
1 - 13 ch (Others)
■ HDMI
®
(Wi-Fi standard)
Radio frequency
2.4 GHz
Phono Overload
Frequency Response 5 Hz - 100 kHz/+1 dB, –3 dB (Direct
mode)
70 mV (MM 1 kHz 0.5% Direct)
Input
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4, IN 5, IN 6, IN 7,
IN 8, AUX INPUT
OUT MAIN, OUT SUB/ZONE2 OUT
4K
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio,
DVD-Audio, DSD
3D, Audio Return Channel, DeepColor,
x.v.Color, Lip Sync, CEC (RIHD), 4K (up-
scaling and Passthrough), HDMI ZONE2
Bluetooth Section
Output
Video Resolution
Audio Format
Tone Control Characteristics
10 dB, 50 Hz (BASS)
10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
Communication system
Bluetooth Specification version 2.1 +
EDR (Enhanced Data Rate)
Maximum communication range
Signal to Noise Ratio 110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO MM, IHF-A)
Speaker Impedance 4 Ω - 16 Ω
Supported
*1
Line of sight approx. 15 m
Frequency band
2.4 GHz band (2.4000 GHz -
2.4835 GHz)
Modulation method
FHSS (Freq Hopping Spread Spectrum)
Download from Www.SomanuaEls.cno-m1. 1Al2l Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
■ Video Inputs
Component
Composite
IN 1, IN 2
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME 1,
AUX
Analog RGB
PC IN
■ Video Outputs
Component
Composite
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT
■ Audio Inputs
Digital
Optical: 2 (Rear), 1 (Front)
Coaxial: 3
Analog
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME 1,
PC, TV/CD, PHONO, AUX
■ Audio Outputs
Analog
ZONE2 LINE OUT, ZONE3 LINE OUT
Analog Multichannel Pre Outputs
11
Subwoofer Pre Outputs
2
Speaker Outputs
Main (L, R, C, SL, SR, SBL, SBR) + Front
Wide/ZONE2 (L, R) + Front High/ZONE3
(L, R)
Phones
1 (ø 6.3)
■ Others
2
Setup Mic
1
RS232
1
RI
1
USB
1 (Front)
Ethernet
IR Input
IR Output
12 V Trigger Out
1
1
1
2
Specifications and features are subject to change
without notice.
Download from Www.SomanuaEls.cno-m1. 1Al3l Manuals Search And Download.
2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
http://www.onkyo.com/
The Americas
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
For Dealer, Service, Order and all other Business Inquiries:
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650
http://www.us.onkyo.com/
For Product Support Team Only:
1-800-229-1687
http://www.us.onkyo.com/
Europe
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4208-213
http://www.eu.onkyo.com/
Unit 19, Building 6, Croxley Green Business Park, Hatters Lane, Watford, WD18 8YH, UK
Tel: +44 (0)8712-00-19-96 Fax: +44 (0)8712-00-19-95
China
(Hong Kong)
Unit 1033, 10/F, Star House, No 3, Salisbury Road, Tsim Sha Tsui Kowloon, Hong Kong.
Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039
http://www.hk.onkyo.com/
(Mainland)
1301, 555 Tower, No.555 West NanJing Road, Jing’an District, Shanghai, China 200041,
Tel: 86-21-52131366 Fax: 86-21-52130396
http://www.cn.onkyo.com/
Asia, Oceania, Middle East, Africa
Please contact an Onkyo distributor referring to Onkyo SUPPORT site.
http://www.intl.onkyo.com/support/
The above-mentioned information is subject to change without prior notice.
Visit the Onkyo web site for the latest update.
Y1306-2
SN 29401540EN-A
(C) Copyright 2013 Onkyo Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.
* 2 9 4 0 1 5 4 0 E N - A *
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Using Multiple Accounts
®
Using Internet Radio
Pandora internet radio
The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts,
which means you can freely switch between several
logins. After registering user accounts, login is
performed from the “Users” screen.
–Getting Started (U.S. only)..................... 2
Common Procedures in Internet Radio
Menu
Using Rhapsody (U.S. only).......................... 3
Note
Press MENU while the Users screen is
displayed.
The following menu items appear:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
1
• Available services may vary depending on the region.
• Certain network service or contents available through this
device may not be accessible in case the service provider
terminates its service.
Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio
(North American only)..............................4
You can either store a new user account, or
delete an existing one.
Press NET.
1
Using Slacker Personal Radio...................... 6
Using MP3tunes............................................. 7
A list of the network services appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver.
Tip
• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user
accounts.
• You can store up to 10 user accounts.
• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the
current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.
Select the desired service and press ENTER.
The top page of the selected service appears.
2
En-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Delete this station:
Pandora® internet radio
–Getting Started (U.S. only)
To play a station, use q/wto select the station
from your station list, and then press ENTER.
Playback starts and the playback screen
appears.
2
This will permanently delete a station from your
Pandora account. All of your thumbs feedback
will be lost should you choose to re-create the
station with the same track or artist.
Create station from this track:
Creates a radio station from this track.
Rename this station:
Lets you rename the current radio station.
Bookmark this artist:
Pandora will bookmark your favorite artist for
your profile on www.pandora.com.
Bookmark this track:
Pandora will bookmark the current track and
allow you to buy them all from Amazon or iTunes
in one step!
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a station to My Favorites list.
Pandora is a free, personalized Internet radio service
that plays the music you know and helps you discover
music you’ll love.
Create a New Station:
Enter the name of a track, artist, or genre and
Pandora will create a unique radio station for you
based on the musical qualities of that track, artist,
or genre.
Use q/wto select “I have a Pandora Account”
1
or “I’m new to Pandora” and then press
ENTER.
■ Menu Items
I like this track:
Give a track “thumbs-up” and Pandora will play
more music like it.
I don’t like this track:
Give a track “thumbs-down” and Pandora will ban
that track from the current station.
Why is this track playing?:
Discover some of the musical attributes that
Pandora uses to create your personal radio
stations.
If you are new to Pandora select “I’m new to
Pandora”. You will see an activation code on
your TV screen. Please write down this code. Go
to an Internet connected computer and point your
browser to www.pandora.com/onkyo
Enter your activation code and then follow the
instructions to create your Pandora account and
your personalized Pandora Internet radio
stations. You can create your stations by entering
your favorite tracks and artists when prompted.
After you have created your account and stations
you can return to your Onkyo receiver and press
enter to begin listening to your personalized
Pandora Internet radio.
I’m tired of this track:
PANDORA, the PANDORA logo, and the Pandora
trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Pandora Media, Inc. Used with permission.
sleep and Pandora will not play it for one month.
Create station from this artist:
Creates a radio station from this artist.
If you have an existing Pandora account, you can
add your Pandora account to your Onkyo
receiver by selecting “I have a Pandora
Account” and logging in with your email and
password.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
En-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Use q/wto select the menu, then press
ENTER.
Use q/wto select a channel, and press ENTER
or 1to start playback.
Using Rhapsody (U.S. only)
2
3
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”
Search:
Playback starts and the playback screen
appears.
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
1
and then press ENTER.
You can search for music by Artist, Album, or
Track.
To use Rhapsody, you need an account. If you
don’t have one yet, you can create a new
account at
Music Guide:
You can play tracks from Genres, Top Artists,
Top Albums, Top Tracks, New Releases, and
Staff Picks.
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo
6, RANDOM, REPEAT
If you have an existing Rhapsody account, select
“Sign in to your account” and press ENTER.
Enter your user name (usually your email) and
password in the next keyboard screen, or in Web
Setup.
Note
Rhapsody Channels:
• On Rhapsody Channels, some of the buttons don’t
work.
Listen to radio channels programmed by
Rhapsody’s top-notch editors.
Playlists:
■ Menu Items
Add track to My Library:
Bookmark currently-playing tracks.
Add album to My Library:
Bookmark currently-playing albums.
Add playlist to My Library:
Bookmark currently-playing playlists.
Add channel to My Channels:
Bookmark currently-playing Rhapsody radio
channels.
Play your own personal playlists.
My Library:
Bookmark your favorite albums and tracks from
the Rhapsody catalog using My Library.
Account Info:
Confirm your account information.
Sign Out:
Sign out from your Rhapsody account.
■ Using the keyboard screen
1. Use q/w/e/rand ENTER to enter your user
name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
4. Press ENTER.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a track, channel or playlist to My Favorites
list.
Tip
• You can remove bookmarked tracks, albums, and
Rhapsody Channels from My Library.
En-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Use q/wto select “Sign In”, and then press
ENTER.
Use q/wto select the desired channel and then
press ENTER.
Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio
(North American only)
1
3
If you have an existing SIRIUS account, you can
sign in by selecting “Sign In”. Enter your user
name and password in the next keyboard screen,
or in Web Setup. If you don’t know your
username or password, call Sirius XM at (888)
539-7474 for assistance.
The playback screen for the selected channel
appears and you can listen to SiriusXM Internet
Radio.
Your Onkyo AV receiver includes a free trial of
SiriusXM Internet Radio. The “Account Info” screen
shows how many days are left in your trial. After the
trial period expires, if you want to continue listening to
the service, you must subscribe. To subscribe go to
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio with your
computer.
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
Enabled buttons: 2, 3, 7, 6
Tip
■ Menu Items
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a channel to My Favorites list.
When you subscribe, you will be provided with a
username and password which has to be entered into
the AV receiver.
■ Using the keyboard screen
1. Use q/w/e/rand ENTER to enter your user
name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
AV receiver connected to the Internet. Using the
remote control, follow these steps:
SiriusXM Internet Radio subscriptions are sold
separately and are governed by the Sirius Terms and
Conditions (see www.sirius.com). Be sure to read this
agreement before you purchase your subscription.
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its
subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4. Press ENTER.
“Please wait...” appears and then “SiriusXM
Internet Radio” screen appears which displays
the category available for selection.
Use q/wto select the category and then press
2
ENTER.
The channel list screen for the selected category
appears.
En-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Profile:
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”,
and then press ENTER.
Using Last.fm Internet Radio
1
You can play tracks from “Recently Listened
Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.
Account Info:
Confirm your account information.
Sign Out:
Last.fm is a music service that learns what you
love...
If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can
sign in to your account to select “Sign in to your
account”. Enter your user name and password in
the next keyboard screen.
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you
have a free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all
the songs you’ve just played. When you visit the
Last.fm website, you can see personal charts of the
music you’ve enjoyed, share them with friends and
see what they like, too.
It signs out from your account.
■ Using the keyboard screen
Use q/wto select a station, and press ENTER
1. Use q/w/e/rand the ENTER to enter your
user name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
or 1 to start playback.
Playback starts and the playback screen
appears.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
With thousands of biographies, reviews and an
endless choice of personalised, ad-free radio
stations, Last.fm is a great way to discover music.
Pick up your free Last.fm account today at
www.last.fm/join
■ Menu Items
I Love this track:
4. Press ENTER.
“Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm
Internet Radio” screen appears.
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency increases.
Ban this track:
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency reduces.
Add to My Favorites:
Tip
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-
free Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without
a computer!
Recommended Radio:
Discover smart personalised recommendations that
adapt as your tastes change.
Artist Radio:
Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of
music inspired by your choice.
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
Use q/wto select menu and then press
ENTER.
Adds a station to My Favorites list.
2
■ Using scrobbling control
Search Station:
You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User
Name.
Use q/wto select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.
*
Internet radio services provided by a third party may be
terminated with or without notice.
Top Artists Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated artists.
Top Tags Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated tags.
Personal Station:
• You can play tracks from personalized station
(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and
“Your Recommendations”).
My Library:
Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music
you’ve heard since you joined Last.fm.
Tag Radio:
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll
entertain you with it for hours.
Start your free trial straight away when you create
your account and see for yourself what it’s like to
have the world’s music at your fingertips. Latest
prices and full information are available at
www.last.fm/subscribe
En-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
You can control the tracks with the buttons on
the remote control.
Using Slacker Personal Radio
6
If you do not have an account, create one on
the Slacker website (www.slacker.com) with
your computer.
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 6
Stores information to server, making it more likely
that the song will be played again.
Ban Song:
Stores information to server, making it less likely
that the song will be played again.
Ban Artist:
Stores information to server, making it less likely
that the songs from this artist will be played
again.
Mark Favorite:
Adds the currently playing station to your
favorites.
Unmark Favorite:
Deletes the currently playing station from your
favorites.
1
■ Menu Items
Rate Song as Favorite:
If you already have a Slacker account, select
“Sign in to your account” and then press
ENTER.
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter
information from the remote control or the keys
on the main unit.
If there are no mistakes in the information you
have entered, use q/w/e/rto select “OK”
then press ENTER.
2
3
An account information confirmation screen
appears.
If you do not have an account, select “Access
without Sign In” and press ENTER to use a
restricted version of the service.
Note that use will be restricted.
Add song to Library:
Tip
Adds the currently playing track to your library.
Delete song from Library:
Deletes the currently playing track from your
library.
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a station or song to My Favorites list.
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
4
5
ENTER.
To sign out, use q/wto select “Sign out” from
this screen and then press ENTER.
Use q/wto select a station and then press
ENTER or 1to start playback from the
station.
The playback screen appears.
En-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Playing Contents on the AV Receiver
The track at the top of the music list is automatically
played back.
Using MP3tunes
Tip
Listen to your music collection on your home stereo in
complete digital fidelity without a personal computer
plus safely backup all your songs. Here’s how:
Use q/wto select a track and press ENTER or
5
• Before proceeding, you need to select the MP3tunes
service as described in “Common Procedures in Internet
Radio Menu” (➔ page 1).
1to start playback.
A playback screen appears.
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
Creating an Account on your Computer
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”,
1
and then press ENTER.
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 7, 6
From your computer, open a web browser and
go to: www.mp3tunes.com/signup
1
Enter the e-mail address and password you
used when creating your account, select “OK”
and press ENTER.
■ Menu Items
2
Go to Menu:
Create an account.
2
3
Displays additional menu options.
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter
your user name and password from the remote
controller or the buttons on the AV receiver.
Click the Upload link
(www.mp3tunes.com/upload) to add files to
your Locker.
You can view or change your MP3tunes
account settings by going to
www.mp3tunes.com/account.
If there are no mistakes in the information you
3
View, edit and listen to your files by clicking
on Player (www.mp3tunes.com/player).
4
have entered, select “OK” and press ENTER.
An account information confirmation screen
appears.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
Use q/wto select the menu, then press
4
ENTER.
Music:
The place to find your Artists, Albums, and
Playlists.
Shuffle:
Starts playing a random selection of tracks from
your Locker.
Search:
Find a specific Album, Artist, or Song.
Account Info:
Your MP3tunes account information.
Sign Out:
Log out of your MP3tunes account.
En-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Utilisation de plusieurs comptes
®
Pandora internet Radio
Utilisation d’une
webradio
L’ampli-tuner AV prend en charge plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, ce qui signifie que vous pouvez librement
commuter entre plusieurs connexions. Après avoir
enregistré des comptes utilisateur, l’identification est
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
–Pour commencer
(États-Unis uniquement).......................... 2
Utilisation de Rhapsody
Procédures courantes dans le menu de
webradio
(Etats-Unis uniquement).......................... 3
Appuyez sur MENU lorsque l’écran Users est
affiché.
1
Remarque
Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio
(Amérique du Nord uniquement) ............ 4
Les éléments de menu suivants s’affichent :
Add new user :
• Les services disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de la
région.
• Certain services réseau ou contenus disponible via cet
appareil peuvent être inaccessibles au cas où le prestataire
de services terminerait son service.
Remove this user :
Vous pouvez soit stocker un nouveau compte
utilisateur, soit en supprimer un existant.
Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm................5
Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio ......... 6
Appuyez sur NET.
1
Conseil
Une liste des services réseau s’affiche, et le
témoin NET s’allume. S’il clignote, vérifiez que le
câble Ethernet est fermement branché sur
l’ampli-tuner AV.
• Certains des services ne permettent pas l’utilisation de
plusieurs comptes utilisateur.
• Vous pouvez stocker jusqu’à 10 comptes utilisateur.
• Pour commuter entre les comptes, vous devez d’abord
vous déconnecter du compte actuel, puis vous reconnectez
depuis l’écran « Users ».
Sélectionnez le service désiré et appuyez sur
ENTER.
2
La page principale du service sélectionné
s’affiche.
Fr-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Delete this station :
Pandora® internet Radio
–Pour commencer (États-Unis
uniquement)
Pour lire une station, utilisez q/wpour
sélectionner la station dans votre liste de
stations, puis appuyez sur ENTER.
2
Ceci supprimera de façon permanente la station
de votre compte Pandora. Au cas où vous
décideriez de récréer la station avec les mêmes
pistes ou les mêmes artistes, tous vos
acceptations/rejets précédents seront perdus.
Create station from this track :
Permet de créer une station radio à partir de
cette piste.
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.
Create a New Station :
Pandora est un service de radio en ligne libre et
personnalisé vous permettant de lire la musique que
vous connaissez et de découvrir celle que vous
aimez.
Saisissez le nom d’une piste, d’un artiste ou d’un
genre et Pandora créera une station radio unique
pour vous en fonction des qualités musicales de
la piste, de l’artiste ou du genre choisi.
Rename this station :
Vous permet de renommer la station radio
actuelle.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « I have a
1
■ Eléments du menu
I like this track :
Acceptez la piste et Pandora lira d’autres
musiques similaires.
I don’t like this track :
Rejetez la piste et Pandora éliminera cette piste
de la station écoutée.
Why is this track playing? :
Découvrez certains des attributs musicaux que
Pandora utilise pour créer vos stations radio
personnelles.
Pandora Account » ou « I’m new to Pandora »,
puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Si vous ne connaissez pas Pandora sélectionnez
« I’m new to Pandora ». Un code d’activation
apparaîtra sur l’écran de votre téléviseur. Notez
ce code. Utilisez un ordinateur branché sur
Internet et connectez le navigateur à
Bookmark this artist :
Pandora marquera votre artiste préféré pour
votre profil sur www.pandora.com.
Bookmark this track :
Pandora marquera la piste en cours et vous
permettra de toutes les acheter sur Amazon ou
iTunes en une étape !
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My
Favorites.
www.pandora.com/onkyo
Saisissez votre code d’activation puis suivez les
instructions pour créer votre compte Pandora et
vos stations webradio Pandora personnalisées.
Lorsque vous y êtes invités, vous pouvez créer
vos stations en saisissant vos pistes et vos
artistes préférés. Après la création de votre
compte et de vos stations, vous pouvez retourner
à votre récepteur Onkyo et appuyez sur entrée
pour écouter votre webradio Pandora
I’m tired of this track :
Si vous en avez assez d’une piste, vous pouvez
mettre la piste « au repos » et Pandora ne la lira
plus pendant un mois.
Create station from this artist :
Permet de créer une station radio à partir de cet
artiste.
PANDORA, le logo PANDORA, et l’habillage
commercial Pandora sont des marques
commerciales ou des marques déposées de la
société Pandora Media, Inc. Utilisées avec
autorisation.
personnalisée.
Si vous disposez d’un compte Pandora, vous
pouvez ajouter votre compte Pandora à votre
récepteur Onkyo en sélectionnant « I have a
Pandora Account » et y accéder en entrant
votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs
comptes » (➔ page 1). L’identification peut être
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
Fr-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner le menu, puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un canal, puis
appuyez sur ENTER ou 1pour démarrer la
lecture.
Utilisation de Rhapsody (Etats-Unis
uniquement)
2
3
Search :
Vous pouvez rechercher des morceaux par
artiste, par album ou par piste.
Music Guide :
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les
touches sur la télécommande.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign in to your
1
account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Vous devez posséder un compte pour utiliser
Rhapsody. Si vous ne disposez pas encore d’un
compte, vous pouvez en créer un à partir de
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo
Vous pouvez lire des pistes à partir des
genres,des meilleurs artistes, des meilleurs
albums, des meilleures pistes, des nouveautés et
des sélections du personnel.
Rhapsody Channels :
Écoutez les canaux de radio programmée par les
meilleurs éditeurs de Rhapsody.
Playlists :
Permet de jouer vos listes de lecture
personnelles.
My Library :
Marquez vos albums et vos pistes personnelles
dans le catalogue de Rhapsody à l’aide de My
Library.
Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,
6, RANDOM, REPEAT
Remarque
Si vous possédez déjà un compte Rhapsody,
sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur (en général votre
adresse électronique) et votre mot de passe dans
l’écran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration
Web.
• Sur les canaux Rhapsody, certaines touches ne
fonctionnent pas.
■ Eléments du menu
Add track to My Library :
Marquez les pistes en cours de lecture.
Add album to My Library :
Marquez les albums en cours de lecture.
Add playlist to My Library :
Marquez les listes de lecture en cours de lecture.
Add channel to My Channels :
Marquez les canaux de radio Rhapsody en cours
de lecture.
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une piste, un canal ou une liste
de lecture à la liste My Favorites.
■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret ENTER pour saisir votre
nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».
Account Info :
Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.
Sign Out :
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm
your entries » s’affiche.
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.
Déconnectez-vous de votre compte Rhapsody.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs
comptes » (➔ page 1). L’identification peut être
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
Conseil
• Vous pouvez supprimer des pistes, des albums et des
canaux Rhapsody marqués de My Library.
Fr-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign In », puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner le canal de
votre choix, puis appuyez sur ENTER.
L’écran de lecture du canal sélectionné s’affiche
et vous pouvez écouter SiriusXM Internet Radio.
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les
touches sur la télécommande.
Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio
(Amérique du Nord uniquement)
1
3
Si vous possédez déjà un compte SIRIUS, vous
pouvez y accéder en sélectionnant « Sign In ».
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot de
passe dans l’écran clavier suivant ou dans
Configuration Web. Si vous ne connaissez pas
votre nom d’utilisateur ou votre mot de passe,
appelez Sirius XM au (888) 539-7474 pour
obtenir une assistance.
Votre ampli-tuner AV Onkyo comprend un essai
gratuit de SiriusXM Internet Radio. L’écran « Account
Info » affiche le nombre de jours restants dans votre
souhaitez continuer à écouter le service, vous devez
vous abonner. Pour vous inscrire, accédez à
l’adresse
Boutons activés : 2, 3, 7, 6
■ Eléments du menu
Add to My Favorites :
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio à l’aide de votre
ordinateur.
Permet d’ajouter un canal à la liste My Favorites.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs
comptes » (➔ page 1). L’identification peut être
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
nom est un mot de passe utilisateur qui doivent être
saisis dans l’ampli-tuner AV.
Les abonnements SiriusXM Internet Radio sont
vendus séparément et sont subordonnés par les
conditions Sirius (voir www.sirius.com). Assurez-vous
de lire cet accord avant d’acquérir votre abonnement.
Sirius, XM et tous les logos et marques afférents sont
des marques déposées de Sirius XM Radio Inc. et de
ses filiales. Tous droits réservés.
■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret ENTER pour saisir votre
nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».
doit être connecté à Internet. Suivez les étapes ci-
dessous à l’aide de la télécommande :
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm
your entries » s’affiche.
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.
« Please wait... » s’affiche, puis l’écran
« SiriusXM Internet Radio » affiche la catégorie
que vous pouvez sélectionner.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner la catégorie,
puis appuyez sur ENTER.
2
L’écran de la liste des canaux de la catégorie
sélectionnée s’affiche.
Fr-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Profile :
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign in to
your account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Vous possédez déjà un compte Last.fm, vous
pouvez vous y connecter pour sélectionner
« Sign in to your account ». Saisissez votre
nom utilisateur et votre mot de passe dans
l’écran clavier suivant.
Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm
1
Vous pouvez lire des pistes de « Recently
Listened Tracks », « Library » et
« Neighbours ».
Account Info :
Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.
Sign Out :
Last.fm un service de musique qui apprend ce que
vous aimez…
Votre nouvel ampli-tuner AV Onkyo est très intelligent.
Si vous avez un compte Last.fm gratuit, il garde une
trace de toutes les chansons que vous avez juste
jouées. Quand vous vous rendez sur le site Web de
Last.fm, vous pouvez voir les graphiques personnels
de la musique que vous avez appréciée, les partagez
avec vos amis et également voir ce qu’ils aiment.
Pour vous déconnecter de votre compte.
■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner une station, puis
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret le bouton ENTER pour
saisir votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de
passe.
3
appuyez sur ENTER ou
lecture.
1
pour démarrer la
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.
Avec des milliers de biographies, de revues et un
choix infini de stations de radio personnalisées et
sans pub, Last.fm est excellent moyen de découvrir
de la musique. Créez aujourd’hui votre compte
Last.fm gratuit sur www.last.fm/join
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm
your entries » s’affiche.
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.
« Please wait... » apparait puis l’écran « Last.fm
Internet Radio » apparait.
■ Eléments du menu
I Love this track :
L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le
serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture
augmente.
Inscrivez-vous et vous pourrez apprécier le meilleur
de la radio sans pub Last.fm sur votre ampli-tuner AV
Onkyo sans ordinateur !
Conseil
Ban this track :
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs
comptes » (➔ page 1). L’identification peut être
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le
serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture
diminue.
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My
Favorites.
Recommended Radio :
Découvrez les recommandations personnalisées
futées qui changent en même temps que vos goûts.
Artist Radio :
Sélectionnez n’importe quel artiste et nous vous
jouerons une station entière de musique inspirée par
votre choix.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un menu puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
2
Search Station :
■ Utilisation du contrôle Scrobbling
Vous pouvez rechercher une station par artiste,
par tag ou par nom d’utilisateur.
Top Artists Station :
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Enable », puis
My Library :
appuyez sur ENTER.
Reposez-vous de retour et appréciez les sélections à
partir de toute la musique que vous avez entendue
depuis que vous avez joint Last.fm.
Tag Radio :
Funk polonaise ? Death pop ? Pensez à un style et
nous vous divertirons avec pendant des heures.
Vous pouvez lire des pistes des artistes les mieux
évalués.
Top Tags Station :
Vous pouvez lire des pistes des tags les mieux
évalués.
Personal Station :
*
Les services de webradio fournis par un tiers peuvent être
résiliés avec ou sans préavis.
Les services de webradio peuvent ne pas être accessibles
dans certaines zones.
Vous pouvez lire des pistes de votre station
personnalisée (« Your Library », « Your
Neighbourhood » et « Your
Recommendations »).
Commencez votre essai gratuit immédiatement à la
création votre compte et découvrez par vous-même
ce que cela fait d’avoir la musique du monde au bouts
des doigts. Les derniers prix et les informations
complètes sont disponibles sur www.last.fm/subscribe
Fr-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les
touches sur la télécommande.
Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio
6
Si vous ne possédez pas de compte, créez-en
Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 6
1
un à partir du site Web de Slacker
(www.slacker.com) à l’aide de votre
ordinateur.
■ Eléments du menu
Rate Song as Favorite :
Permet de stocker des informations sur le
serveur, et d’augmenter la probabilité que le
morceau soit lu de nouveau.
Si vous possédez déjà un compte Slacker,
sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
L’écran clavier s’affiche. Pouvez saisir des
informations à partir de la télécommande ou des
touches sur l’appareil principal.
Ban Song :
Permet de stocker des informations sur le
serveur, et de diminuer la probabilité que le
morceau soit lu de nouveau.
Si les informations que vous avez saisies ne
comportent pas d’erreur, utilisezq/w/e/r
pour sélectionner « OK », puis appuyez sur
ENTER.
Ban Artist :
2
3
Permet de stocker des informations sur le
serveur, et de diminuer la probabilité que les
morceaux de cet artiste soient lus de nouveau.
Mark Favorite :
Permet d’ajouter la station en cours de lecture à
vos favoris.
Unmark Favorite :
Permet de supprimer la station en cours de
lecture de vos favoris.
L’écran de confirmation des informations du
compte s’affiche.
Si vous ne possédez pas de compte,
sélectionnez « Access without Sign In », puis
appuyez sur ENTER pour utiliser une version
restreinte du service.
Veuillez noter que l’utilisation est restreinte.
Add song to Library :
Permet d’ajouter la piste en cours de lecture à
votre bibliothèque.
Delete song from Library :
de votre bibliothèque.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs
comptes » (➔ page 1). L’identification peut être
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une station ou un morceau à la
liste My Favorites.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un élément du
4
5
menu, puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Pour vous déconnecter, utilisez q/wpour
sélectionner « Sign out » depuis cet écran, puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
la lecture depuis cette station.
L’écran de lecture apparaît.
Fr-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Uso de múltiples cuentas
®
Uso de Internet Radio
Pandora Internet Radio
El receptor de AV permite múltiples cuentas de
usuario, lo que quiere decir que se puede cambiar
libremente entre varios usuarios. Después de
registrar las cuentas de usuario, el acceso se realiza
desde la pantalla “Users”.
–Primeros pasos (solo EE.UU.)............... 2
Procedimientos comunes en el menú
Internet Radio
Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)................... 3
Nota
Pulse MENU cuando aparezca la pantalla de
usuarios.
Aparecerán los siguientes elementos del menú:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
1
• Los servicios disponibles pueden variar de una región a
otra.
• Es posible que determinados servicios de red o contenidos
disponibles a través de este dispositivo no sean accesibles
si el proveedor del servicio da por finalizado el servicio.
Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio
(solo Norteamérica).................................. 4
Puede guardar una nueva cuenta de usuario o
borrar una existente.
Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio...................... 5
Uso de Slacker Personal Radio.................... 6
Pulse NET.
1
Aparecerá una lista de los servicios de red y se
iluminará el indicador NET. Si parpadea,
verifique que el cable Ethernet esté firmemente
conectado al receptor de AV.
Consejo
• Algunos de los servicios no permiten el uso de múltiples
cuentas de usuario.
• Puede guardar hasta 10 cuentas de usuario.
• Para cambiar entre cuentas debe antes cerrar sesión en la
cuenta actual y acceder de nuevo en la pantalla “Users”.
Seleccione el servicio deseado y pulse
ENTER.
Aparecerá la página principal del servicio
seleccionado.
2
Es-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Delete this station:
Pandora® Internet Radio
–Primeros pasos (solo EE.UU.)
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la emisora en la
lista de emisoras y luego pulse ENTER.
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de
reproducción.
2
Esto eliminará de forma permanente una
emisora de su cuenta de Pandora. Toda la
información sobre sus aprobaciones/
desaprobaciones se perderá si quiere volver a
crear la emisora con el mismo tema o artista.
Create station from this track:
Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este tema.
Rename this station:
Le permite renombrar la emisora de radio actual.
Bookmark this artist:
Pandora marcará su artista favorito para su perfil
en www.pandora.com.
Bookmark this track:
Pandora marcará el tema actual y le permitirá
comprarlos todos en Amazon o iTunes ¡con un
solo paso!
Pandora es un servicio de radio por Internet gratuito y
personalizado que reproduce la música que usted
conoce y le ayudará a descubrir música que le
encantará.
Create a New Station:
Introduzca el nombre de un tema, artista o
género; Pandora creará una emisora de radio
exclusiva para usted basada en las cualidades
musicales de ese tema, de ese artista o de ese
género.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “I have a Pandora
1
Account” o “I’m new to Pandora” y luego
pulse ENTER.
■ Elementos del menú
I like this track:
Si no conoce Pandora seleccione “I’m new to
Pandora”. Verá un código de activación en la
pantalla del televisor. Tome nota de este código.
Vaya a un ordenador conectado a Internet y dirija
el navegador a www.pandora.com/onkyo
Introduzca su código de activación y siga las
instrucciones para crear su cuenta de Pandora y
sus emisoras de radio por Internet
Si aprueba (pulgar arriba) un tema, Pandora
reproducirá más música parecida.
I don’t like this track:
Si no aprueba (pulgar abajo) el tema, Pandora
eliminará dicho tema de la emisora actual.
Why is this track playing?:
Descubra algunos de los atributos musicales que
Pandora utiliza para crear sus emisoras de radio
personalizadas.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.
personalizadas de Pandora. Puede crear sus
propias emisoras introduciendo sus temas y
artistas favoritos cuando aparezca la solicitud
correspondiente. Una vez creada su cuenta y sus
emisoras, puede regresar al receptor Onkyo y
pulsar Enter para empezar a escuchar su radio
por Internet personalizada de Pandora.
Si ya dispone de una cuenta de Pandora, puede
añadirla al receptor Onkyo seleccionando “I have
a Pandora Account” e iniciando la sesión con su
dirección de correo electrónico y contraseña.
I’m tired of this track:
PANDORA, el logotipo de PANDORA logo, y la
imagen corporativa de Pandora son marcas
comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de
Pandora Media, Inc. Uso con permiso.
Si se cansa de un tema, puede “silenciarlo” de
modo que Pandora no lo reproduzca durante un
mes.
Create station from this artist:
Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este
artista.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Es-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar el menú y luego
pulse ENTER.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar una emisora y
luego pulse ENTER o 1para iniciar la
reproducción.
Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)
2
3
Search:
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign in to your
1
account” y luego pulse ENTER.
Puede buscar música por artista, álbum o
canción.
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de
reproducción.
Para utilizar Rhapsody, necesitará una cuenta. Si
todavía no tiene una, puede crear una nueva en
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo
Music Guide:
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del
mando a distancia.
Puede reproducir canciones por géneros, artistas
principales, álbumes principales o canciones
principales, novedades, selección del sitio.
Rhapsody Channels:
Escuche las emisoras de radio programadas por
los principales redactores de Rhapsody.
Playlists:
Si ya tiene una cuenta Rhapsody, seleccione
“Sign in to your account” y pulse ENTER.
Escriba su nombre de usuario (normalmente el
correo electrónico) y contraseña en la pantalla de
teclado que aparece a continuación o en la
configuración web.
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,
6, RANDOM, REPEAT
Nota
• En Rhapsody Channels, algunos de los botones no
funcionan.
■ Elementos del menú
Add track to My Library:
Marca las canciones que se están reproduciendo
actualmente.
Add album to My Library:
Marca los álbumes que se están reproduciendo
actualmente.
Add playlist to My Library:
Marca las listas de reproducción que se están
reproduciendo actualmente.
Add channel to My Channels:
Marca las emisoras de Rhapsody que se están
reproduciendo actualmente.
Reproduzca sus listas personales.
My Library:
Marque sus álbumes y canciones preferidas en
el catálogo de Rhapsody, usando Mi biblioteca.
Account Info:
Confirme los datos de su cuenta.
Sign Out:
Salga de su cuenta Rhapsody.
■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.
2. Seleccione “OK”.
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla
“Confirm your entries”.
4. Pulse ENTER.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una canción, emisora o lista de
reproducción a la lista Mis favoritos.
Consejo
• Puede eliminar las canciones, los álbumes y las
emisoras de Rhapsody marcados de Mi biblioteca.
Es-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign In”, y luego
pulse ENTER.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la emisora
Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio (solo
Norteamérica)
1
3
deseada y luego pulse ENTER.
Si ya tiene una cuenta SIRIUS, puede acceder
seleccionando “Sign In”. Escriba su nombre de
usuario y contraseña en la pantalla de teclado
que aparece a continuación o en la configuración
web. Si no sabe su nombre de usuario o la
contraseña, llame a Sirius XM al número (888)
539-7474 para solicitar asistencia.
Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción de la
emisora seleccionada y ahora usted podrá
escuchar SiriusXM Internet Radio.
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del
mando a distancia.
Su receptor de AV Onkyo incluye una prueba gratuita
de SiriusXM Internet Radio. La pantalla “Account
vez que termine el periodo de prueba, si desea seguir
escuchando este servicio, deberá contratarlo. para
suscribirse vaya a
Botones activados: 2, 3, 7, 6
■ Elementos del menú
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio con su
ordenador.
Consejo
Add to My Favorites:
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.
Cuando se suscriba, recibirá un nombre de usuario y
una contraseña que deberá introducir en el receptor
de AV.
■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.
2. Seleccione “OK”.
Las suscripciones a SiriusXM Internet Radio se
venden por separado y se rigen por las condiciones
de Sirius (consulte www.sirius.com). Lea
atentamente este acuerdo antes de comprar la
suscripción. Sirius, XM y todas las marcas y logotipos
relacionados son marcas comerciales de Sirius XM
Radio Inc. y sus filiales. Todos los derechos
reservados.
Para poder utilizar SiriusXM Internet Radio, el
receptor de AV debe estar conectado a internet. Para
usar el mando a distancia, siga este procedimiento:
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla
“Confirm your entries”.
4. Pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla
“SiriusXM Internet Radio”, que muestra la
categoría disponible para la selección.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la categoría y
luego pulse ENTER.
2
Aparece una pantalla con una lista de emisoras
de la categoría seleccionada.
Es-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Profile:
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign in to your
account”, y luego pulse ENTER.
Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio
1
Puede reproducir pistas de “Recently Listened
Tracks”, “Library” y “Neighbours”.
Account Info:
Confirme los datos de su cuenta.
Sign Out:
Last.fm es un servicio musical que sabe lo que le
gusta...
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Last.fm, puede
acceder a ella para seleccionar “Sign in to your
account”. Introduzca su nombre de usuario y
contraseña en la siguiente pantalla de teclado.
Su nuevo receptor de AV Onkyo es muy inteligente.
Si tiene una cuenta gratuita de Last.fm, hará un
seguimiento de todas las canciones que acaba de
escuchar. Cuando visite el sitio web de Last.fm,
podrá ver listas personales de la música que ha
disfrutado, compartirlas con sus amigos y también
ver lo que les gusta a ellos.
Se desconecta de su cuenta.
■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar una emisora y
luego pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la
reproducción.
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.
2. Seleccione “OK”.
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla
“Confirm your entries”.
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de
reproducción.
Con sus miles de biografías, críticas y una infinita
variedad de emisoras de radio personalizadas y sin
publicidad, Last.fm es una forma excelente de
descubrir música. Cree hoy mismo una cuenta
gratuita de Last.fm en www.last.fm/join
4. Pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla
“Last.fm Internet Radio”.
■ Elementos del menú
I Love this track:
Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el
servidor de Last.fm y aumenta la frecuencia con
la que se reproduce.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Si se suscribe podrá disfrutar de lo mejor de Last.fm
Radio sin anuncios en su receptor de AV Onkyo sin
necesidad de un ordenador.
Ban this track:
Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el
servidor de Last.fm y se reduce la frecuencia con
la que se reproduce.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar un menú y luego
pulse ENTER.
Recommended Radio:
2
Descubra nuestras interesantes recomendaciones
personalizadas que se adaptan a sus gustos en cada
momento.
Search Station:
Puede buscar emisoras por artista, etiquetas o
nombre de usuario.
Artist Radio:
■ Uso del control de scrobbling
Top Artists Station:
Puede reproducir canciones de los artistas mejor
clasificados.
Top Tags Station:
Puede reproducir canciones con las etiquetas
mejor clasificadas.
Escoja cualquier artista y podrá escuchar una
emisora de radio inspirada exclusivamente en su
elección.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Enable”, y luego pulse
ENTER.
My Library:
*
Los servicios de radio por Internet suministrados por
Relájese y disfrute de selecciones de toda la música
que ha escuchado desde que se registró en Last.fm.
Tag Radio:
terceros pueden cancelarse con o sin aviso previo.
Es posible que los servicios de radio por Internet no estén
disponibles en algunas zonas.
Personal Station:
Puede reproducir pistas de una emisora
personalizada (“Your Library”, “Your
Neighbourhood” y “Your Recommendations”).
¿Polish funk? ¿Death pop? Piense en un estilo y
podrá escucharlo durante horas.
Pruébelo gratis ahora mismo. Cree una cuenta y verá
por sí mismo lo que significa tener toda la música del
mundo al alcance de sus oídos. Puede consultar los
precios actualizados y toda la información que desee
en www.last.fm/subscribe
Es-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del
mando a distancia.
Uso de Slacker Personal Radio
6
Si no tiene una cuenta, cree una en el sitio web
de Slacker (www.slacker.com) con su
ordenador.
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 6
1
■ Elementos del menú
Rate Song as Favorite:
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que
sea más probable que la canción se vuelva a
reproducir.
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Slacker, seleccione
“Sign in to your account” y pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá la pantalla de teclado. Puede
introducir información desde el mando a
distancia o desde el teclado de la unidad
principal.
Ban Song:
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que
sea menos probable que la canción se vuelva a
reproducir.
Si no hay errores en la información que ha
introducido, utilice q/w/e/rpara seleccionar
“OK” y luego pulse ENTER.
2
3
Ban Artist:
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que
sea menos probable que las canciones de este
artista se vuelvan a reproducir.
Mark Favorite:
Añade la emisora que se está reproduciendo
actualmente a los favoritos.
Aparecerá una pantalla de confirmación de la
información de la cuenta.
Si no tiene una cuenta, seleccione “Access
without Sign In” y pulse ENTER para utilizar
una versión restringida del servicio.
Unmark Favorite:
Tenga en cuenta que el uso estará restringido.
Elimina la emisora que se está reproduciendo
actualmente de los favoritos.
Add song to Library:
Añade la canción que se está reproduciendo
actualmente a su biblioteca.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar un menú y luego
Delete song from Library:
4
5
pulse ENTER.
Elimina la canción que se está reproduciendo
actualmente de la biblioteca.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora o canción a la lista Mis
favoritos.
Para salir, utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign out”
en esta pantalla y luego pulse ENTER.
reproducción de la emisora.
Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción.
Es-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Using Multiple Accounts
Using Internet Radio
The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts,
which means you can freely switch between several
logins. After registering user accounts, login is
performed from the “Users” screen.
Using Last.fm Internet Radio........................ 2
Common Procedures in Internet Radio
Menu
Note
Press MENU while the Users screen is
displayed.
The following menu items appear:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
1
• Available services may vary depending on the region.
• Certain network service or contents available through this
device may not be accessible in case the service provider
terminates its service.
You can either store a new user account, or
delete an existing one.
Press NET.
1
A list of the network services appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver.
Tip
• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user
accounts.
• You can store up to 10 user accounts.
• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the
current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.
Select the desired service and press ENTER.
The top page of the selected service appears.
2
En-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Profile:
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”,
and then press ENTER.
Using Last.fm Internet Radio
1
You can play tracks from “Recently Listened
Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.
Account Info:
Confirm your account information.
Sign Out:
Last.fm is a music service that learns what you
love...
If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can
sign in to your account to select “Sign in to your
account”. Enter your user name and password in
the next keyboard screen.
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you
have a free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all
the songs you’ve just played. When you visit the
Last.fm website, you can see personal charts of the
music you’ve enjoyed, share them with friends and
see what they like, too.
It signs out from your account.
■ Using the keyboard screen
Use q/wto select a station, and press ENTER
1. Use q/w/e/rand the ENTER to enter your
user name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
or 1 to start playback.
Playback starts and the playback screen
appears.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
With thousands of biographies, reviews and an
endless choice of personalised, ad-free radio
stations, Last.fm is a great way to discover music.
Pick up your free Last.fm account today at
www.last.fm/join
Enabled buttons: 1, 2, 6
4. Press ENTER.
“Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm
Internet Radio” screen appears.
■ Menu Items
I Love this track:
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency increases.
Ban this track:
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency reduces.
Add to My Favorites:
Tip
UK and Germany only:
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-
free Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without
a computer!
Recommended Radio:
Discover smart personalised recommendations that
adapt as your tastes change.
Use q/wto select menu and then press
ENTER.
2
Adds a station to My Favorites list.
Search Station:
You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User
Name.
■ Using scrobbling control
Artist Radio:
Use q/wto select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.
Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of
music inspired by your choice.
My Library:
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music
you’ve heard since you joined Last.fm.
Tag Radio:
Top Artists Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated artists.
Top Tags Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated tags.
Personal Station:
You can play tracks from personalized station
(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and
“Your Recommendations”).
*
Internet radio services provided by a third party may be
terminated with or without notice.
Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll
entertain you with it for hours.
Start your free trial straight away when you create
your account and see for yourself what it’s like to
have the world’s music at your fingertips. Latest
prices and full information are available at
www.last.fm/subscribe
En-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Internetradio verwenden
Verwendung mehrerer Konten
Internetradio verwenden
Der AV-Receiver unterstützt mehrere Nutzerkonten,
was bedeutet, dass Sie frei zwischen mehreren
Logins umschalten können. Nach der Anmeldung der
Nutzerkonten wird das Login vom „Users“ Bildschirm
aus vorgenommen.
Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio..... 2
Allgemeine Verfahren bei den
Internetradio-Menüs
Anmerkung
Drücken Sie MENU während der Bildschirm
• Die verfügbaren Dienste sind länderabhängig verschieden.
• Bestimmte Netzwerkdienste oder über dieses Gerät zur
Verfügung stehende Inhalte stehen eventuell nicht zur
Verfügung, falls der Service-Anbieter seine Dienstleistung
beendet.
1
des Nutzers angezeigt wird.
Das folgende Menü erscheint:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
Sie können entweder ein neues Nutzerkonto
abspeichern oder ein bestehendes löschen.
Drücken Sie NET.
1
Es erscheint eine Liste der Netzwerkdienste und
die NET-Anzeige leuchtet. Wenn sie blinkt,
überprüfen Sie ob das Ethernet-Kabel fest im AV-
Receiver eingesteckt ist.
Tipp
• Einige dieser Dienstleistungen lassen keine mehrfachen
Nutzerkonten zu.
• Sie können bis zu 10 Nutzerkonten speichern.
• Um zwischen den Konten umzuschalten, müssen Sie sich
zuerst aus Ihrem aktuellen Konto ausloggen und sich dann
wieder auf dem „Users“ Bildschirm einloggen.
Wählen Sie den gewünschten Service aus und
drücken Sie ENTER.
Die oberste Seite des ausgewählten Services
erscheint.
2
De-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Internetradio verwenden
können. Die aktuellen Nutzungspreise und umfassende
Infos sind unter www.last.fm/subscribe erhältlich
Personal Station:
Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio
Sie können Titel aus einem persönlich
angepassten Sender wiedergeben („Your
Library“, „Your Neighbourhood“ und „Your
Recommendations“).
Last.fm ist ein Musikdienst, der sich Ihre
Lieblingsmusik merkt...
Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Sign in to your
1
account“ auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie
ENTER.
Wenn Sie über einen bestehenden Last.fm Konto
verfügen, können Sie sich anmelden und „Sign
in to your account“ wählen. Geben Sie Ihre Ihre
Benutzernamen und das Kennwort in der
folgenden Tastaturanzeige ein.
Ihr neuer Onkyo AV-Receiver ist äußerst clever. Wenn Sie
ein kostenloses Last.fm-Konto eingerichtet haben, werden
darin alle kürzlich abgespielten Titel gespeichert. Wenn Sie
die Last.fm-Website besuchen, können Sie Ihre
persönlichen Charts der von Ihnen abgespielten Musik
anzeigen; teilen Sie diese mit Freunden und sehen Sie
auch, welche Musik Ihre Freunde mögen.
Profile:
Sie können Titel aus „Recently Listened Tracks“,
„Library“ und „Neighbours“ wiedergeben.
Account Info:
Bestätigen Sie Ihre Kontoinformation.
Sign Out:
■ Verwendung der Tastaturanzeige
schier endlosen Auswahl an persönlich angepassten,
werbefreien Radiosendern ist Last.fm eine großartige
Gelegenheit, um Musik zu entdecken. Holen Sie sich
Ihr kostenloses Last.fm-Konto noch heute unter
www.last.fm/join
Zur Abmeldung aus Ihrem Konto.
1. Verwenden Sie
Ihren Nutzernamen und Passwort einzugeben.
2. Wählen Sie „OK“.
3. Drücken Sie ENTER. Die Anzeige „Confirm
your entries“ erscheint.
q
/
w
/
e
/
r
und den ENTER, um
Verwenden Sie q/w, um einen Sender
auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie ENTER
oder 1 , um die Wiedergabe zu starten.
Die Wiedergabe wird gestartet und die
Wiedergabeanzeige erscheint.
3
4. Drücken Sie ENTER.
erscheint die „Last.fm Internet Radio“-Anzeige.
Nur für Großbritannien und Deutschland:
Holen Sie sich ein Abonnement und Sie können auch
ohne Computer die besten werbefreien Last.fm-
Radiosender auf Ihrem Onkyo AV-Receiver hören!
Recommended Radio:
Entdecken Sie smarte, persönlich angepasste
Empfehlungen, die sich mit Ihrem Musikgeschmack
verändern.
Aktivierte Tasten: 1, 2, 6
■ Menüsymbole
I Love this track:
Tipp
Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-
Server gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der
Wiedergabe wird erhöht.
• Falls Sie mehrere Nutzerkonten verwenden möchten,
schlagen Sie bitte unter „Verwendung mehrerer
Konten“ nach (➔ Seite 1). Das Login kann vom
„Users“-Bildschirm aus erfolgen.
Ban this track:
Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-
Server gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der
Wiedergabe wird verringert.
Add to My Favorites:
Fügt einen Sender zu meiner My Favorites Liste hinzu.
Artist Radio:
Verwenden Sie q/w, um das Menü
auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie ENTER.
Search Station:
2
Wählen Sie einen beliebigen Interpreten und wir
spielen für Sie einen ganzen Radiosender mit durch
Ihre Wahl inspirierter Musik.
Sie können einen Sender anhand Interpreten,
Tags oder Benutzernamen suchen.
Top Artists Station:
My Library:
Lehnen Sie sich zurück und erfreuen Sie sich an
einer Auswahl aller Musik, die Sie seit Ihrer
Mitgliedschaft bei Last.fm gehört haben.
Tag Radio:
Polish Funk? Death Pop? Denken Sie an einen
Musikstil und wir unterhalten Sie stundenlang damit.
■ Scrobbling-Steuerung verwenden
Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten
Interpreten wiedergeben.
Top Tags Station:
Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten Tags
wiedergeben.
Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Enable“ auszuwählen und
dann drücken Sie ENTER.
*
Von Drittparteien zur Verfügung gestellte Internetradio-
Dienste können unter Umständen ohne Vorankündigung
eingestellt werden.
Starten Sie Ihr kostenloses Probeabo direkt wenn Sie
Ihr Konto erstellen und finden Sie selbst heraus wie es
ist, jederzeit die Musik der ganzen Welt abrufen zu
In bestimmten Gebieten sind Internetradio-Dienste
eventuell nicht verfügbar.
Y1212-1
SN 29401479IREU
* 2 9 4 0 1 4 7 9 I R E U *
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to which you want to assign a
code, press and hold down [DISPLAY] (about 3 seconds).
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator lights.
On Integra products, button names are capitalized. For example, “Remote Mode”
button and “Display” button.
Remote Control Codes
/
1
2
Notes:
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for [RECEIVER] and the multi zone button.
• Except for [RECEIVER], [TV], and the multi zone button, remote control codes from any
category can be assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons. However, these buttons also work
as input selector buttons, so choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input
to which you connect your component. For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD
input, choose [TV/CD] when entering its remote control code.
Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit remote control
code.
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator flashes twice.
If the remote control code is not entered successfully, the REMOTE MODE
button/Remote indicator will flash once slowly.
Notes:
• The flashing element of the remote controller will differ according to your AV receiver’s model.
• The remote controller is preconfigured with remote controller presets of different components.
By entering a code from the Remote Control Code list, you can activate the relevant preset for
that component.
• When there are multiple codes related to one manufacturer, try and enter them one-by-one until
it matches your component.
• Depending on the model and year of your component, compatibility is not guaranteed.
• With some models, the remote controller may not not work or its compatibility may be limited
to part of the component’s functionality.
• Besides, it is not possible to add new codes to the existing remote controller presets.
• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time of printing, they are subject to
change by the manufacturer.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Codes de télécommande
Códigos de control remoto
Tout en maintenant enfoncé le bouton REMOTE MODE auquel vous souhaitez
associer un code, pressez et maintenez enfoncé le bouton [DISPLAY] (pendant
environ 3 secondes).
Manteniendo pulsado el botón REMOTE MODE para el cual desea introducir un
código, pulse y mantenga presionado el botón [DISPLAY] (aproximadamente 3
segundos).
1
1
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote s’allume.
Les noms de boutons sont en manjuscules sur les produits Integra. Par exemple, le
bouton « Remote Mode » et le bouton « Display ».
Remarques :
Se iluminará el botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote.
En los productos Integra, los nombres de los botones aparecen con mayúsculas. Por
ejemplo, el botón “Remote Mode” y el botón “Display”.
Notas:
• Les codes de télécommande ne peuvent pas être entrés pour [RECEIVER] et le bouton multi
zone.
• No podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia para [RECEIVER] y el botón multizona.
• Únicamente podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia de televisor para el botón [TV].
• Con la excepción de [RECEIVER], [TV] y el botón multizona, se pueden asignar códigos de
mando a distancia de cualquier categoría a los botones de REMOTE MODE. No obstante, estos
botones también pueden funcionar como botones de selector de entrada; por tanto, seleccione
componente. Por ejemplo, si conecta un reproductor de CD a la entrada de CD, seleccione
[TV/CD] cuando introduzca su código de mando a distancia.
• Seul les code de télécommande de téléviseurs peuvent être entrés pour [TV].
• À l’exception de [RECEIVER], [TV] et du bouton multi zone, vous pouvez affecter des codes
de télécommande de n’importe quelle catégorie pour les boutons REMOTE MODE. Cependant,
ces boutons font également office de bouton de sélecteur d’entrée : par conséquent, choisissez
un bouton REMOTE MODE correspondant à l’entrée à laquelle vous souhaitez raccorder votre
appareil. Par exemple, si vous raccordez votre lecteur CD à l’entrée CD, choisissez [TV/CD]
lorsque vous saisissez le code de télécommande.
Antes de que transcurran 30 segundos, utilice los botones numéricos para
introducir el código de mando a distancia de 5 dígitos.
El botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará dos veces.
Si el código de mando a distancia no se introduce correctamente, el botón REMOTE
MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará una vez despacio.
Notas:
• El parpadeo del mando distancia será distinto según el modelo de receptor de AV.
• El mando a distancia está preconfigurado con los ajustes predeterminados de los distintos
componentes. Al introducir un código de la lista de códigos del mando a distancia se puede
activar el ajuste predeterminado de ese componente.
• Cuando hay múltiples códigos relacionados con un fabricante, pruebe a introducirlos uno a uno
hasta que coincida con su componente.
• Dependiendo del modelo y el año de su componente, la compatibilidad no está garantizada.
• Con algunos modelos, es posible que el mando a distancia no funcione o que su compatibilidad
esté limitada a una parte de las funciones del componente.
2
Vous disposez de 30 secondes pour saisir le code de télécommande à cinq chiffres
à l’aide des boutons numérotés.
2
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote clignote deux fois.
Si le code de télécommande n’a pas été saisi correctement le bouton REMOTE
MODE/l’indicateur Remote ne clignote qu’une seule fois.
Remarques :
• L’élément clignotant de la télécommande différera selon le modèle de votre ampli-tuner AV.
• La télécommande est préconfigurée avec des préréglages de télécommande de différents
appareils. En entrant un code de la liste des codes de télécommandes, vous pouvez activer le
préréglage approprié pour cet appreil.
• Quand il y a de multiples codes liés à un fabricant, essayez-les et entrez-les un par un jusqu’à ce
que cela corresponde à votre appareil.
• Selon le modèle et l’année de votre appareil, la compatibilité n’est pas garantie.
• Avec certains modèles, la télécommande peut ne pas fonctionner ou sa compatibilité peut être
limitée à une partie de la fonctionnalité de l’appareil.
• Además, no es posible añadir nuevos códigos a los ajustes predeterminados existentes del
mando a distancia.
• Los códigos de mando a distancia suministrados son correctos en el momento de la impresión,
pero el fabricante puede realizar cambios.
• En outre, il n’est pas possible d’ajouter de nouveaux codes aux préréglages de télécommande
existants.
• Bien que les codes de télécommande fournis soient corrects au moment de l’impression de la
liste, ils sont susceptibles d’être modifiés par le fabricant.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Codici del telecomando
Fernbedienungscodes
Tenendo premuto il tasto REMOTE MODE al quale si desidera assegnare il
Halten Sie die REMOTE MODE-Taste gedruckt, fur die Sie den Code eingeben
mochten, und drucken Sie (ca. 3 Sekunden lang) die [DISPLAY]-Taste.
Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige leuchtet.
Bei den Integra-Produkten werden die Namen der Tasten groß geschrieben. Zum
Beispiel „Remote Mode“ (Fernbedienungsmodus)-Taste und „Display“-Taste.
Hinweise:
1
1
codice, premere e tenere premuto [DISPLAY] (per circa 3 secondi).
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote si accende.
Sui prodotti Integra, i nomi dei tasti sono scritti con l'iniziale maiuscola. Ad esempio,
tasto “Remote Mode” e tasto “Display”.
Note:
• I codici di controllo del telecomando non possono essere inseriti per [RECEIVER] e i tasti multi
zona.
• Der Fernbedienungscode kann nicht [RECEIVER] und der Multi-Zonen-Taste zugeordnet
werden.
• Der Taste [TV] können nur Fernbedienungscodes für einen Fernseher zugeordnet werden.
• Abgesehen von [RECEIVER], [TV] und der Multi-Zone-Taste, können die
Fernbedienungscodes jeder Kategorie den REMOTE MODE-Tasten zugewiesen werden.
Allerdings dienen diese Tasten auch als Quellenwahltasten. Wählen Sie also nach Möglichkeit
eine REMOTE MODE-Taste, die dem Eingang zugeordnet ist, an den Sie die betreffende Quelle
angeschlossen haben. Wenn Sie z.B. einen CD-Player an den CD-Eingang anschließen, sollten
Sie [TV/CD] wenn Sie den Fernbedienungscode eingeben.
• Per [TV] è possibile immettere solo codici telecomando del televisore.
• Tranne che per [RECEIVER], [TV], e per il tasto multi zona, è possibile assegnare codici di
controllo di ogni categoria per i tasti REMOTE MODE. Tuttavia, tali tasti fungono anche da
tasti del selettore d'ingresso, quindi scegliere un tasto REMOTE MODE che corrisponda
all'ingresso al quale viene collegato il dispositivo. Per esempio, se si collega il lettore CD
all'ingresso CD, scegliere il [TV/CD] quando si immette il relativo codice telecomando.
Entro 30 secondi utilizzare i tasti numerici per inserire il codice telecomando a 5
cifre.
2
Geben Sie mit den Zifferntasten innerhalb von 30 Sekunden den 5-stelligen
Herstellercode ein.
Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige blinkt zwei Mal.
Wenn der Fernbedienungscode nicht ordnungsgemäß eingegeben wurde, blinkt die
REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige einmal langsam.
Hinweise:
• Das blinkende Element auf der Fernbedienung unterscheidet sich je nach AV-Receiver-Modell.
• Die Fernbedienung ist mit den Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung der verschiedenen
Komponenten vorkonfiguriert. Indem ein Code aus der Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
eingegeben wird, können Sie die entsprechende Voreinstellung für die Komponente aktivieren.
• Wenn es mehrere Codes gibt, die sich auf einen Hersteller beziehen, versuchen Sie sie einzeln
einzugeben, bis einer mit Ihrer Komponente übereinstimmt.
2
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia due volte.
Se il codice telecomando non viene inserito correttamente, il tasto REMOTE
MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia lentamente una volta.
Note:
• L'elemento lampeggiante del telecomando varia a seconda del modello del ricevitore AV.
• Il telecomando è preconfigurato con preselezioni per diversi apparecchi. Inserendo un codice
dall'elenco dei codici telecomando, è possibile attivare la relativa preselezione per tale
apparecchio.
• Se sono presenti più codici relativi allo stesso produttore, provare a inserirli uno a uno finché
non si arrivi al codice corrispondente dell'apparecchio.
• A seconda del modello e dell'anno dell'apparecchio, la compatibilità non è garantita.
• Con alcuni modelli, il telecomando può non funzionare o la sua compatibilità può essere limitata
a una parte della funzionalità dell'apparecchio.
• Dies hängt vom Modell und Herstellungsjahr Ihrer Komponente ab und die Kompatibilität ist
nicht garantiert.
• Es kann sein, dass bei einigen Modellen die Fernbedienung nicht funktioniert oder ihre
Kompatibilität sich auf nur auf Teile der Funktionalität der Komponente beschränkt.
• Abgesehen davon ist es nicht möglich, den bestehenden Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung
neue Codes hinzuzufügen.
• Inoltre, non è possibile aggiungere nuovi codici alle preselezioni esistenti del telecomando.
• I codici telecomando specificati sono validi alla data della stampa del presente documento, ma
sono soggetti a variazioni da parte del produttore.
• Obwohl die angegebenen Fernbedienungscodes dem Stand bei Drucklegung entsprechen, sind
Änderungen durch den Hersteller vorbehalten.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Afstandsbedieningscodes
Fjärrstyrningskoder
Houd terwijl u de REMOTE MODE toets ingedrukt houdt waarvoor u een code
Håll ned knappen för det REMOTE MODE som du vill tilldela en kod samtidigt
som du trycker och håller ned [DISPLAY] (i cirka 3 sekunder).
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa.
På Integra-produkter, är knappnamnens begynnelsebokstav en versal. Till exempel,
”Fjärrläge”-knapp och ”Display”-knapp.
1
1
wilt toewijzen de [DISPLAY] toets ingedrukt (ongeveer 3 seconden).
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje
afstandsbediening gaat branden.
Op producten van Integra staan de namen van de toetesn in hoofdletters. Bijvoorbeeld,
de toetsen “Remote Mode” en “Display”.
Anmärkningar:
Opmerkingen:
• Fjärrkontrollkoder kan inte anges för knapparna [RECEIVER] och flerzonsknappen.
• Endast fjärrkontrollkoder för tv kan anges för [TV].
• Er kunnen geen afstandsbedieningscodes worden ingevoerd voor [RECEIVER] en de multi
zone-toets.
• Förutom [RECEIVER], [TV] och flerzonsknappen, kan fjärrkontrollkoder för vilken som helst
kategori tilldelas för knapparna REMOTE MODE. Dessa knappar fungerar dock även som
ingångväljarknappar, så använd en knapp för REMOTE MODE som motsvarar ingången som
du ansluter utrustningen till. Till exempel, om du ansluter din CD-spelare till CD-ingången ska
• Alleen TV afstandsbedieningscodes kunnen worden ingevoerd voor [TV].
• Behalve voor [RECEIVER], [TV] en de multi zone-toets, kunnen afstandsbedieningscodes
vanuit elke categorie worden toegewezen aan de REMOTE MODE toetsen. Deze toetsen
werken overigens ook als ingangsselectortoetsen, kies dus een REMOTE MODE toets die
overeenkomt met de ingang waarop u uw component wilt aansluiten. Kies indien u bijvoorbeeld
uw CD-speler aansluit op de CD-ingang de [TV/CD] toets bij het invoeren van de
afstandsbedieningscode.
Använd sifferknapparna för att ange den femsiffriga koden inom 30 sekunder.
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa blinkar två gånger.
Om fjärrkontrollkoden inte ställdes in, blinkar REMOTE MODE-
knappen/fjärrindikatorn långsamt en gång.
2
Gebruik binnen 30 seconden de cijfertoetsen om de 5-cijferige
afstandsbedieningscode in te voeren.
2
Anmärkningar:
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje
afstandsbediening knippert tweemaal.
Indien de afstandsbedieningscode niet met succes wordt ingevoerd, zal de toets
REMOTE MODE/Remote-indicator eenmaal traag knipperen.
Opmerkingen:
• Het knippergedeelte van de afstandsbediening zal verschillen ten opzichte van het model van
uw AV-receiver.
• De afstandsbediening is voorgeprogrammeerd met voorkeuzetoetsen van verschillende
componenten. Door het invullen van een code uit de afstandsbediening codelijst kunt u de
voorkeuzetoets voor die component activeren.
• Det blinkande elementet på fjärrkontrollen skiljer sig åt beroende på din modell av AV-receiver.
• Fjärrkontrollen har förkonfigurerats med förvalda kanaler på fjärrkontrollen för olika
komponenter. Genom att ange en kod från fjärrkontrollkodlistan, kan du aktivera relevanta
förvalda kanaler för den utrustningen.
• När det finns flera olika koder för en tillverkare ska du försöka att ange dem en och en tills de
stämmer överens med din utrustning.
• Beroende på utrustningens modell och årgång, går det inte att garantera kompatibilitet.
• På vissa modeller kan det hända att fjärrkontrollen inte fungerar eller så kan dess kompatibilitet
vara begränsad till en del av utrustningens funktion.
• Dessutom går det inte att lägga till nya koder till fjärrkontrollens existerande förvalda kanaler.
• Även om erhållna fjärrkontrollkoder är korrekta vid tryckningen, kan de ändras av tillverkaren.
• Wanneer er meerdere codes gerelateerd zijn aan één fabrikant, probeer deze dan een voor een
totdat de juiste code overeenkomt met uw component.
• Afhankelijk van het model en het bouwjaar van uw component is de compatibiliteit niet
gegarandeerd.
• Bij sommige modellen werkt de afstandsbediening mogelijk niet of is de compatibiliteit ervan
beperkt tot een deel van de functionaliteit van de component.
•
Daarnaast is het niet mogelijk om nieuwe codes aan de bestaande voorkeuzetoetsen van de
afstandsbediening toe te voegen.
• Hoewel de gegeven afstandsbedieningscodes correct zijn op het moment van afdrukken, kunnen
deze door de fabrikant gewijzigd worden.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
遙控代碼
在按住想指定編碼的 REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕時，同時按住
遥控代码
按住想指定编码的 REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮的同时，按住[DISPLAY
（显示）]（大约 3 秒钟）。
1
1
[DISPLAY] （顯示）（約 3 秒）。
REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈亮起。
在 Integra 系列產品上，按鈕名稱為大寫。例如，「Remote Mode」（遙控模式）
按鈕和 「Display」（顯示）按鈕。
REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮/遥控指示灯亮起。
Integra 产品上的按钮名称单词首字母大写。例如，“Remote Mode（遥控模
式）”按钮和“Display（显示）”按钮。
注意：
注意：
• [RECEIVER（接收机）]和多区域按钮不能输入遥控编码。
• 只能为[TV（电视）]输入电视遥控编码。
• [RECEIER] （接收機）和多區域按鈕不能輸入遙控編碼。
• 您只能為 [TV] （電視）輸入電視遙控編碼。
• 除 [RECEIVER] （接收機）、[TV] （電視）和多區域按鈕外，您可針對 REMOTE MODE
（遙控模式）按鈕指定任何類別的遙控編碼。但是，這些按鈕仍可用作為輸入選擇器按
鈕，因此，請選擇與您設備所連接輸入接口對應的 REMOTE MODE 按鈕。例如，如果
要將 CD 播放機連接到 CD 輸入源上，則需在輸入遙控編碼時選擇 [TV/CD]。
•
除[RECEIVER（接收机）]、[TV（电视）]和多区域按钮外，不能为 REMOTE MODE（遥
控模式）按钮指定任何类别的遥控编码。但是，这些按钮仍可用作输入选择器按钮，因
此，选择与设备所要连接的输入端对应的 REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮。例如，如果
要将 CD 播放机连接到 CD 输入端，应在输入遥控编码时选择[TV/CD（电视/CD）]。
在 30 秒內，使用數字按鈕輸入 5 位數的遙控編碼。
REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈閃爍兩次。
如果無法成功輸入遙控編碼，REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈
會慢慢地閃爍一次。
REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮/遥控指示灯闪烁两次。
如果不能顺利输入遥控编码，REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮/遥控指示灯会
缓慢闪烁一次。
2
2
注意：
注意：
• 視您的 AV 接收機型號而定，遙控器的閃爍元件會有不同。
• 遙控器已預先設定有不同設備的遙控器預設值。透過輸入遙控編碼清單中的編碼，您
可啟用該設備的相關預設值。
• 根据 AV 接收机产品类型的不同，遥控器闪烁元素将会不同。
• 遥控器采用不同设备的遥控器预设进行预配置。通过从遥控器编码列表输入编码，便
可激活相应设备的相关预设。
• 當有多個編碼與單一製造商相關時，請嘗試一個接著一個輸入，直到與您的設備對應
為止。
• 单个制造商关联多个编码时，请尝试逐个输入，直至符合当前设备。
• 根据设备的产品类型和年份的不同，无法保证兼容性。
• 視設備的型號和年份而定，並不保證與本公司產品相容。
• 在某些型號上，遙控器可能無法作用，或是其相容性限於部份設備功能。
• 除此之外，您無法新增編碼至現有的遙控器預設值。
• 对于某些产品类型，遥控器可能无法工作或其兼容性可能受到部分设备功能性的限制。
• 此外，可能无法将新的编码追加到现有的遥控器预设。
• 尽管付印时所提供的遥控编码是正确的，但制造商会随时更改。
• 雖然所提供之遙控編碼在本文件列印時為正確，製造商仍可能會對其作出修改。
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Cable/PVR Combination
Dedicated Onkyo Receiver
Cable Set Top Box
mio TV
Cable Set Top Box
Toshiba
Default
Zone 2
Zone 3
62503
62506
62507
02802
01509
Samsung
Scientific Atlanta
Shaw
01877
Motorola
01376, 00858, 01562,
01982, 01998, 02378
UPC
01582
01877, 01982
01376
Verizon
02378
Moxi
02187
Videotron
Virgin Media
Visiopass
VTR
01877
Suddenlink
Thomson
Time Warner
UPC
01376, 01877
01582
NEC
01496
Cable Set Top Box
ADB
01068, 01060
00817
Neuf TV
Noos
03107
02254, 02769
02769
01376, 01877, 02187
01582
00817
Aon
01376
NTL
01068, 01060
02767
Arris
02187
WideOpenWest
Ziggo
01877
Videotron
VTR
01877
Numericable
Ono
AT&T
00858
00660, 01666, 02015,
02142, 02447, 02774
01376
01068, 01562
01060
Bright House
BT Vision
Cable & Wireless
Cable One
Cablecom
Cablevision
Charter
01376, 01877
02294
WideOpenWest
Ziggo
01877
Optus
Orange
Pace
02142
Cable/PVR Combination
00817
01068
Arris
02187
01376, 01877, 01068,
01060, 01982
IPTV
01376, 01877
01582
Bright House
Cable One
Cablevision
Charter
01376, 01877
01376, 01877
01376, 01877
01376, 01877, 02187
01877, 01982
ADB
02254, 02769
02769
Panasonic
Philips
01488, 01982
Aon
01376, 01877
01376, 01877, 02187
00817, 01582, 02294,
02767
AT&T
BT Vision
Canal+
Cisco
00858
02294
Cisco
01877, 00858, 01982,
02345, 02378
Pioneer
RCN
01877, 01500
01376
Cisco
02657
Com Hem
Comcast
00817, 00660, 01666,
02015, 02447
Comcast
01376, 01877, 01982,
02187
00858, 02345, 02378
01385
Rogers
Sagem
Samsung
01877
Kreatel
mio TV
Motorola
00817
01376, 01877, 01982,
02187
Cox
01376, 01877
02187
02802
01877, 01060, 01666,
02015, 02774
Digeo
01376, 00858, 01998,
02378
Cox
01376, 01877
01877
Freebox
Humax
Insight
01482
Scientific Atlanta
01877, 00858, 01982,
02345
Daeryung
Digeo
02142, 03051, 03053
01376, 01877
03051, 03053
01877
Neuf TV
Pace
03107
02187
02657
SFR
03107
DX Antenna
France Telecom
Freebox
Fujitsu
01500
J:COM
Knology
Mediacom
Motorola
Moxi
Scientific Atlanta
SFR
00858, 02345
03107
Shaw
01376
00817
SingTel
Sony
01998, 02802
01460
01482
01376, 01877
01376
SingTel
01998, 02802
01385
01497
TeliaSonera
Telus
Stofa
02015
Humax
00660, 02142, 02447,
03051, 03053
02187
02345
Suddenlink
Sumitomo
Telewest
TeliaSonera
Telus
01376, 01877
01500
Numericable
Pace
02767
Thomson
Verizon
02769
Insight
01376, 01877
03051, 03053
01877
01877
02378
01068
J:COM
Knology
Kreatel
Macab
Panasonic
Philips
01982
01385
01582, 02767
01877
IPTV/PVR Combination
02345
01385
Pioneer
Rogers
ADB
Aon
02769
02769
Thomson
Time Warner
01582, 01982, 02769
01376, 01877, 02187
00817
01877
Mediacom
01376, 01877
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
IPTV/PVR Combination
CD
CD
MD
AT&T
00858
Goldmund
Grundig
Harman/Kardon
Hitachi
Integra
JVC
70157
Restek
70157
Yamaha
70490
BT Vision
Cisco
02294
70157
Revox
70157
Cassette Deck
Aiwa
00858, 02345, 02378
01385
70157
Rotel
70157
40029
40076
40029
40029
40076
40029
40029
40070
40244
40070
40029
40029
40029
42157
40027
40029
40027
40029
40029
40027
40029
40029
40243
40029
40244
40027, 40029
40097
Kreatel
70032
SAE
70157
Arcam
Motorola
Neuf TV
Philips
00858, 02378
03107
71817, 70101
70072
Sansui
70157
Audiolab
Carver
SAST
70157
02294
Kenwood
Krell
70626, 70157, 70036
70157
Siemens
Silsonic
Simaudio
Sonic Frontiers
Sony
70157
Denon
Scientific Atlanta
SFR
00858
70036
Grundig
Harman/Kardon
Inkel
03107
Linn
70157
70157
Verizon
02378
Loewe
70157
70157
Magnavox
Marantz
Matsui
MCS
70157
70490, 70000
70157
CD
JVC
70626, 70029, 70157
70157
Sylvania
TAG McLaren
Tandy
Advantage
AH!
70032
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
Kenwood
Magnavox
Marantz
Myryad
Onkyo
70157
70029
70032
Aiwa
Memorex
Meridian
Micromega
Miro
70032
Technics
Thorens
Thule Audio
Traxdata
Universum
Victor
70029, 70303
70157
Arcam
70157
Atoll Electronique
Audio Research
Audiolab
Audiomeca
Audioton
AVI
70157
70157
Optimus
Philips
70000
70626
Mission
Myryad
NAD
70157
70157
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Radiola
RCA
70157
70072
70000, 70721
70157
Wards
70000, 70032, 70157
70490, 70032, 70036
70157
Naim
Yamaha
Zonda
Balanced Audio
Technology
NSM
70157
Revox
Onkyo
71817
Cairn
70157
CD-R
Denon
JVC
Sansui
Optimus
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Primare
Proton
70000, 70032
70029, 70303
70626, 70157
70032, 70101
70157
California Audio Labs 70029, 70303
70626, 70766
70072
Sony
Cambridge
Cambridge Audio
Carver
70157
Thorens
Victor
70157
Kenwood
Marantz
Onkyo
Philips
Sony
70626
70157
70626
Wards
CCE
70157
71323
Yamaha
70157
Cyrus
70157
70626
70157
Denon
70626, 70766
70000
Accessory
Apple
70000
QED
70157
DKK
81115
Quad
70157
DMX Electronics
Dynaco
70157
MD
Jamo
82228
Quasar
Radiola
RCA
70029
70157
Onkyo
Sony
70868
Logitech
Onkyo
82182
70157
Genexxa
70000, 70032
70490, 70000
82990, 81993, 82351
70032
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Accessory
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
CGV
Satellite Set Top Box
Polk Audio
82228
Amstrad
00847, 01175, 01662,
01693
01413, 01567
01334, 01626
01176
Durabrand
Echostar
01284
Chess
00775, 00853, 01323,
01409, 02527
Ansonic
Arnion
02418
Video - Accessory
ADB
CityCom
Clatronic
Clayton
Com Hem
Comag
01300
Eco-Star
Edision
01413
02254, 02769
02769
01413
ASCI
01334
01631
Aon
01626
AssCom
Astro
00853
Elap
01413, 01567
02418
Apple
02615
01176, 01915
01413
00173, 01100
02418
Elbe
AT&T
00858
Atlanta
Atsat
Energy Sistem
Engel
01631, 02418
01251
BT Vision
Canal+
02294
Comsat
01413
01300
02657
Coship
01457
AtSky
01334
EuroLine
Europhon
Europsat
Expressvu
Fagor
01251
Cisco
00858, 02345, 02378
01385
Crown
01284
Audiola
Aurora
02418
01334
Kreatel
CS
01631
00879, 00642, 01433
00879, 00642, 01259
01631
01413, 01611
00775
mio TV
Motorola
02802
Cyfra+
01409
Austar
01376, 00858, 01998,
02378
Cyfrowy Polsat
D-box
00853, 02527
00723, 01114
01626
Avanit
01611
Neuf TV
Pace
03107
Awa
02418
Ferguson
Finlux
01291
Dantax
02657
Axil
01413, 01457, 02418
01626
01626
Denver
02418
Philips
02294
Axitronic
Balmet
Bell ExpressVu
Belson
Fly Com
FMD
01457
Dgtec
01242, 01631, 02418
02418
Scientific Atlanta
SFR
00858, 02345
03107
01457
01413, 01457
00879, 01176, 01356
02408
Dick Smith
Electronics
00775
Foxtel
SingTel
TeliaSonera
Telus
01998, 02802
01385
02418
Digi Raum Electronics 01176
Freesat
Big Sat
Black Diamond
Blaupunkt
Boshmann
Boston
01457
Digiality
Digifusion
Digihome
DigiLogic
DigiQuest
Digisky
01334
Fuba
00173, 01251
00853, 00879
01176
02345
01284
01645
Galaxis
Thomson
Verizon
02769
00173
01284
General Satellite
Globo
02378
01413, 01631
01251
01284
01251, 01334, 01626
00775
01300, 01457, 01631
01457
GOI
Receiver
Boxer
01458
Gold Box
Gold Vision
GoldMaster
Goodmans
Gradiente
Grandin
Grocos
00853
Onkyo
52503
British Sky
Broadcasting
00847, 01175, 01662
DigitalBox
Digiwave
DirecTV
Dish Network
Dishpro
01100, 01631
01631
01631
01334
Satellite Set Top Box
BskyB
Bush
00847, 01175, 01662
01377, 00099
00775
01284, 01291
00099, 00887
01626
@sat
01300
01284, 01291, 01626,
01645
@Sky
01334
00775
Acoustic Solutions
ADB
01284
Canal Digital
Canal Satellite
Canal+
00853, 01334
00853, 02657
00853, 02657
00853, 02657
01457
DishTV
01300
01409, 01457
00642, 00887, 01259
01626
DRE
01176
Grundig
00847, 00853, 00173,
00879, 01284, 01291
Akura
Dream Multimedia
DSE
01237
Alba
01284
CanalSat
Haier
Hallo
02418
01626
02280, 02418
00879, 00642, 01433
Allvision
01334
Centrex
DSTV
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
Hama
01567
Leiko
01626
Pace
00847, 00853, 00887,
01175, 01323, 01356,
01423, 01662, 01693,
01850, 02059, 02060,
02211, 02657
Sat Industrie
SAT+
01611
Hanseatic
Hirschmann
Hitachi
Hornet
01100
00173
01284
01300
00775
Lemon
01334
01409
Lenoxx
Linsar
01611
Satplus
01100
01284
SatyCon
01631
Listo
01626
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
Schwaiger
Sedea Electronique
SEG
02418
Pacific
01284
HTS
Lodos
01284
01206, 01251
01334, 01457, 01631
01206, 01626
01251, 01284, 01626
01611
Palcom
Panasat
Panasonic
01409, 01611
00879, 01433
Humax
01377, 01176, 01427,
01675, 01808, 01882,
01915, 02144, 02408,
02616
Logik
01284
Macab
00853
00847, 01304, 01404,
03099
Manhattan
Maspro
Matsui
01300
Panda
Pass
00173
00173
Servimat
ServiSat
ID Digital
ID Sat
01176
01567
00173, 01284, 01626
01334
01251
01334
peeKTon
Philips
01457, 02418
Maximum
Mediabox
Mediacom
MediaSat
Medion
MegaSat
Metronic
Shark
01631
ILLUSION sat
Imperial
Indovision
iNETBOX
Inno Hit
Innova
01631
00099, 00853, 00173,
01114, 00887, 00133,
02211
00853
Sherwood
Siemens
01409
01195, 01334
00887
01206
00173, 01334, 01626,
02418
00853
01237
Phoenix
Pino
02418
Sigmatek
SKY
02418
01334, 01626
01631
01626
01334
00099, 00847, 00887,
01175, 01662, 01693,
01850, 02754
00099
Pioneer
PMB
00853, 01308
01611
01334, 01413, 01631,
02418
inVion
02418
iotronic
01413
SKY Brazil
SKY Deutschland
SKY Italia
00887
Premiere
Pro Basic
Proline
QNS
00723
Metz
00173
ISkyB
00887
02754
00853
Moserbaer
Movistar
Multichoice
01251
ITT
02418
00853, 01693, 01850
02211
01284
02527, 02761
ITT Nokia
Jadeworld
Jaeger
00723
SKY New Zealand
SKY PerfecTV!
Sky XL
01404
00879, 00642, 01433,
02059, 02060
00642
02299, 02616, 03099
01251
RCA
01291
01334
Regal
01251
MySky
NEOTION
Netsat
01356, 01693, 01850
01334
JVC
00775
Sky+
01175, 01662
Roadstar
Rollmaster
Rownsonic
SAB
00853
KabelBW
Kaon
01195, 01882, 01915
01300
Skymaster
01334, 01409, 01567,
01611
01413
00099, 00887
00723
01567
Nikko
Skymax
Skyplus
01413
Kathrein
Kenwood
Koenig
00173, 01561, 01567
00853
01251, 01300, 01631
01114
Nokia
00853, 00723, 01223
01611
01175, 01334
01100
Sagem
Saivod
Samsung
Nordmende
NPG
SkySat
01631
02418
01631
Skyvision
SM Electronic
Smart
01334
Kreiling
Kreiselmeyer
L&S Electronic
LaSAT
01626
01377, 00853, 01175,
01206, 01458, 01662,
02986
Onn
01284
01409
00173
Optex
01413, 01611, 01626
00879, 01356
01334
01404, 01413, 01631
01457
01334
Optus
Sansui
01251
01626
01300
SmartVision
Sony
00173
Orbis
Sanyo
00847, 00853, 01558,
02299
Lava
01631
Orbitech
01100, 01195
Sat Control
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
SAT/PVR Combination
SAT/PVR Combination
Star
00887
UBC
00642
BskyB
01175, 01662
Schneider
01206
01206
Stream System
Strong
01300
UEC
00879, 01356
01251, 01626, 02418
01882
Bush
01645
Sedea Electronique
SKY
00853, 00879, 01284,
01300, 01409, 01626,
02418
United
Canal Satellite
Canal+
02657
01175, 01662, 01693,
01850, 02754
Unitymedia
Universum
Variosat
VEA
02657
SKY Deutschland
SKY Italia
SKY New Zealand
SKY PerfecTV!
Sky+
02754
00173, 01251
00173
CanalSat
02657
Sunny
01300
01693, 01850
02211
Cyfrowy Polsat
Digifusion
DigiQuest
DirecTV
02527
Sunstar
00642
02418
01645
Supernova
Supratech
Systec
00887
02299, 03099
01662
Vestel
01251, 01284
01195
01300
01413
Viasat
01377, 00099, 20739
00775
01334
Skyplus
01175, 01334
01631
Vision
01626
Dish Network
Dishpro
Sytech
02418
Smart
Visiosat
Vitecom
Vivax
01413, 01457
01413
00775
TBoston
Teac
01251, 02418
01251
Sony
02299
Dream Multimedia
Echostar
01237
Stream System
Strong
01300
02418
00775, 02527
01631
Technical
Technika
TechniSat
Technosat
Techwood
TELE System
Telefonica
Telestar
01626
01300
Volcasat
Wavelength
Wharfedale
Wisi
02418
Edision
01284
Sunny
01300
01413
Expressvu
Foxtel
00775
01100, 01195
01206
TechniSat
Technosat
Telefonica
Telestar
01195
01284
01356
01206
00173
Humax
01176, 01427, 01675,
01808
01251, 01284, 01626
01251, 01409, 01611
02527, 02761
02527
Worldsat
Woxter
Xsat
01251
ID Sat
01334
01195
02418
iNETBOX
Kaon
01237
Thomson
Topfield
01175, 01662
01206
00847, 01323
01300
01100, 01195, 01251,
01334, 01626
01300
Xtreme
Yakumo
Yes
Kathrein
Maximum
Mediacom
MegaSat
Movistar
Multichoice
MySky
01561
Viasat
01195
01413
Televes
Televisa
Tevion
01300, 01334
00887
01334
Xtreme
01300
00887
01206
Zehnder
01251, 01334, 01413,
01631
01409
Television
A.R. Systems
Accent
01631
Thomson
00847, 00853, 01175,
01046, 01291, 01662
10556, 10037
10037
Zinwell
02280, 02761
01300
02527
02059, 02060
01356, 01693, 01850
01334
Tonna
Topfield
Toshiba
Trevi
01611
01206
01284
01251
Satellite Set Top Box
Acer
11339
@sat
Acoustic Solutions
Action
11037, 11667
10650
NEOTION
Pace
01175, 01356, 01423,
01662, 01693, 01850,
02059, 02060, 02211,
02657
SAT/PVR Combination
Addison
AEG
10653
Triax
00853, 01251, 01291,
01413, 01611, 01626,
01631
@sat
01300
11037, 11324
12719
Amstrad
Atsat
01175, 01662, 01693
01300
Agfaphoto
Aiko
Panasonic
Philips
01304, 03099
00099
10037
Tricolor TV
True Visions
Twinner
01176
02408
01611
Bell ExpressVu
00775
Aim
10037, 10499
Samsung
Sat Control
01175, 01206, 01662
01300
British Sky
Broadcasting
01175, 01662
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Television
Television
Television
Casio
Television
Akai
10178, 10556, 10037,
10714, 10715, 10208,
11675
Basic Line
10556, 10037, 10668,
11037
10037
Dick Smith
Electronics
10698
Cathay
10037
Baur
10037, 10195, 10512
10178
Digatron
Digihome
Digiline
Digitek
Digitor
Dixi
10037
CCE
10037
Akiba
Akito
Akura
10037
10037
Beaumark
Beijing
Beko
11667
Centrum
Centurion
Changhong
Chimei
11037
10208
10037, 10668
11709
10037
10171, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 11363,
11585, 11667, 11709
10037, 10714, 10715,
11652
10508
10037, 10698
10037
11666
Belson
10698
Clarivox
Classic
10037
Alba
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 11585
Belstar
11037
DL
11363
10499
Beon
10037
DMTech
Domeos
Drean
12001
Alien
11037
Clatronic
Clayton
Condor
Conrowa
Contec
10037, 10714, 11324
11037
Berthen
Bestar
10556, 10668
10037
10668
Allstar
10037
10037
Amstrad
Anam
10171, 10037, 11037
10037
10037
Bexa
12493
DSE
10698
10698
Black Diamond
Blaupunkt
Blue Sky
11037
Dual
10037, 11037, 11585,
11667
Anam National
Andersson
Anitech
Ansonic
AOC
10037, 10650
11585
10037
10195
Cosmel
CPTEC
Crown
10037
10556, 10037, 10625,
10714, 10668, 11037,
10715, 10499, 11324,
11363, 11652, 11709
Durabrand
10178, 10171, 10714,
11037, 11652
10037
10625, 11363
10037, 10668
10178, 10625, 11365
10037, 10714
10037
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 10715, 10208,
11652
Dux
10037
DX Antenna
Dynatron
Dynex
11817, 13817
10037
Ardem
Boca
11652
Cyberpix
D-Vision
Daewoo
11667
Arena
Boman
Bork
11324
12049
10556, 10037
Aristona
ART
10556, 10037
11037
11363
e-motion
E:max
11709
10178, 10556, 10037,
10634, 10499, 12098
BPL
10037, 10208
10625, 10714, 10560
11709
11324
Art Mito
Asberg
11585
Brandt
Brimax
Brinkmann
Brionvega
Bush
Dansai
Dantax
10037, 10208
Easy Living
ECE
11666, 11709
10037
10037
10714, 11037, 10715,
11652
Astra
10037
10037, 10668
10037
Elbe
10556, 10037
11755
ATD
10698
Datsura
Dawa
10208
Electrograph
Element
Elfunk
Atlantic
Audiosonic
Audiovox
Audioworld
Aventura
Axxon
10037
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10698,
10208, 11585, 11652,
11667, 12719
10037
11886
10037, 10714, 10715
11564
Daytron
De Graaf
DEC
10037
11037
10208
ELG
10037
10698
11709
Byd:sign
Camper
Carad
12140, 12209
10037
Elin
10037
10171
Decca
10037
Elite
10037
10714
Denver
Desmet
Diamant
Diamond
10037, 11709
10037
10668, 11037
10037
Emerson
10178, 10171, 10037,
10714, 10668, 11394,
11864, 11886
Baird
10208
Carena
Bang & Olufsen
Barco
10565
10037
Carrefour
Cascade
10037
10556
Envision
Epson
11365, 11506
11379
10698
10037
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Television
Erres
Television
Genesis
Genexxa
GFM
Television
Television
ITV
10037
10037
Hisense
10556, 10508, 10208,
11363, 12098
10037
ESA
10171
10037
JGC
11709
Hitachi
10150, 10178, 10037,
10634, 11037, 10508,
10499, 10578, 11576,
11585, 11643, 11667,
11691, 12433
ESC
10037
10171, 11864, 11886
11585
Jinfeng
Jinxing
JMB
10208
Euroman
Europa
10037
Godrej
10556, 10037, 10698
10556, 10634, 10499
10556
10037
Goldfunk
GoldStar
10668
Europhon
Evesham
Excello
Exquisit
Ferguson
10037
10178, 10037, 10714,
10715
Jubilee
JVC
Hitachi Fujian
Hitec
10150
10698
10714
10037
11666
11295
11248, 11667
11037
10650, 10653, 10508,
11428, 11601, 12271
Goodmans
10556, 10037, 10625,
10714, 10560, 10668,
10634, 11037, 10499,
11585, 11667
Kaisui
Karcher
Kathrein
Kendo
Kennex
Kioto
10037
Hoeher
10037
10714, 11324
10556
Hornyphon
Hugoson
Humax
10037, 10625, 10560,
10195, 11037, 11585
Gorenje
Gradiente
Graetz
11585
Fidelity
Finlandia
Finlux
10171, 10037, 10512
10208
10037, 11037, 11585
11037
10037
Hypson
10668, 11037, 10715
10714
10556, 10037, 10714,
10715, 11248, 11667
10556
Granada
Grandin
10037, 10560, 10208
Hyundai
Iberia
11037, 10698
10037
Kiton
10037, 10668
10037
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10715,
11652
Firstline
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10208,
11363
KLL
ICE
10037
Kneissel
Koenig
Kolin
10556, 10037, 10499
10037
Grundig
10556, 10037, 10195,
11223, 11667, 12625
iLo
11394
Fisher
10208
Imperial
Indiana
Ingelen
Inno Hit
Innova
Insignia
10037
10150, 10037, 11610,
11755
Flint
10037
GVA
11363, 12098
12001
10037
Formenti
Fraba
10037
H & B
Kolster
Konka
Korpel
Kosmos
Kunlun
L&S Electronic
Lavic
10037
10714
10037
Haier
10037, 10698, 10508
10178
10037, 10714
10037
11037, 11585
10037
Friac
10037, 10499
11709
Hallmark
Hankook
Hanseatic
Fujicom
Fujitsu
Fujitsu Siemens
Funai
10178
10037
10171, 11423, 11564,
12049
10809
10556, 10037, 10625,
10714, 10634, 10499,
12001
10208
10809, 11248, 11666
Integra
Interbuy
Interfunk
Internal
Intervision
Irradio
IRT
11807, 13100, 13500
10037
10714
10171, 10714, 10668,
11037, 11394, 11666,
11817, 13817
11363
Hantarex
Hantor
Harwood
Hauppauge
HB
10037
10037, 10512
10556
Lavis
11037
10037
Lecson
Lenco
10037
G-Hanz
Gaba
11363
11037
10037
10037
11755
10037
10037
10037, 11037
10037
10037
10037
Leyco
Galaxi
Galaxis
Gateway
GE
11324
10698
LG
10178, 10556, 10037,
10714, 10715, 10698,
11423, 11768, 11840,
12182, 12358, 12424,
12834
HCM
10037
Isukai
10037
Highline
Hinari
10037
ITS
10037
10178, 11454, 10625,
10560
10037, 10208
10714
ITT
10208
Hisawa
GEC
10037
ITT Nokia
10208
Liesenkoetter
10037
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Television
Television
Television
Naiko
Television
Onix
Lifetec
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 12001
Medion
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10698,
10512, 11248, 11585,
11667, 12001, 12719
10037
10698
Nakimura
National
NEC
10037
Onkyo
Onn
11807, 13100, 13500
11667, 11709
11709
Linsar
11585
10508, 10208
Local India TV
Local Malaysia TV
Lodos
10208
10178, 10653, 10508,
10499
Onyx
Megatron
MEI
10178
10698
Opera
Optimus
Orbit
10037, 10714
10650
11037
11037
Neckermann
NEI
10556, 10037
10037, 11037
11324
Memorex
Mercury
Mermaid
Metronic
Metz
10150, 10178, 11037
10037
Loewe
10037, 10512, 11884
11037, 10698
10668
10037
Logik
NEO
Orion
10556, 10037, 10714,
11037, 12001
10037
Logix
Netsat
10037
10625
Luma
11037
NetTV
11755
Orline
10037
10037, 10668, 10195,
11037, 11533
Lumatron
Lumenio
Lux May
Luxor
10037, 10668
10037
Neufunk
New Tech
Newave
Nikkai
10556, 10037, 10714
10556, 10037
10178
Ormond
Osaki
10668, 11037
10556, 10037
10037
MGA
10150, 10178
10037
Osio
Micromaxx
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 11324, 12001
11037, 10208
10178
10037
Osume
Otto Versand
10037
LXI
Nikkei
10714
10556, 10037, 10195,
10512
Microspot
Mikomi
11614
M Electronic
10037, 10714, 10634,
10195, 10512, 11652
Nikko
10178
11037, 11585
10037
Pacific
10556, 10714, 11037,
11324
Nokia
10208
Minato
Madison
10037
Norcent
Nordmende
11365
Minerva
10195, 11248
11667
Palladium
Palsonic
Panama
10556, 10037, 10714
10037, 10698
10037
Magnavox
10171, 11454, 11365,
11506, 11755, 11867,
12372
10037, 10714, 10560,
10195, 11585, 11667,
12001
Ministry Of Sound
Minoka
10037
Mirai
11666
Magnum
Manesth
Manhattan
Marantz
Mark
10037, 10714, 10715
10037
Normerel
Nortek
Novatronic
Novita
Nu-Tec
O.K.Line
Oceanic
Odys
10037
Panasonic
11480, 10037, 10650,
10508, 10208, 11636,
12170
Mitsubishi
10150, 11250, 10178,
10556, 10037, 11037,
10512, 11171
10668
10037, 10668, 11037
11454, 10556, 10037
10037, 10714, 10715
10499
10037
Panavision
Panda
10037
11585
Mivar
10609
10698, 10508, 10208
11636
10698
Moree
10037
Pansonic
Penney
Perdio
Master's
Mastro
11037, 11324
10208
Morgan's
Moserbaer
MTC
10037
10178
10698
11585
10037
Masuda
Matsui
10037
12719
10512
Perfekt
Petters
10037
10556, 10037, 10714,
10195, 11037, 10208,
11666, 11667
Okano
OKI
10037
MTlogic
Mudan
Multitec
Multitech
Myrica
Myryad
NAD
10714
10037
11585, 11667
11610, 12124
10698
10208
Philco
10178, 10171, 10037,
11394
Olevia
Omni
10037, 10668, 11037
10037
Matsushita
Maxent
Maxess
Meck
10650
11755
Philips
Phocus
10178, 10171, 11454,
10556, 10037, 10512,
10605, 10690, 11394,
11506, 11867, 12372
Onei
11667
11666
12493
Onida
10653
10556
10698
Onimax
10714
10178, 10037
Mediator
10556, 10037
10714, 11652
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Television
Phoenix
Television
Reflex
Television
Sei-Sinudyne
Serie Dorada
Shanghai
Television
SunBriteTV
Sungoo
10037
10037, 10668, 11037
11585
10037
10178
10208
11610
Phonola
10556, 10037
Relisys
Remotec
Reoc
11248
Pioneer
10037, 10698, 10512,
11457, 11636, 12171
10171, 10037
10714
Sunny
10037
Sharp
10650, 10818, 11165,
11423, 11659
Sunstar
10037
Plantron
10037
Revox
10037
Sunstech
Sunwood
Supersonic
SuperTech
Supra
12001
Playsonic
10037, 10714, 10715,
11652
Shintoshi
Shivaki
Siam
10037
RFT
10037
10037
10178, 10037
10037
Roadstar
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 10715
10208
Powerpoint
Prinston
10037, 10698
11037, 10715
10037
10556, 10037
10178
Rolson
Rowa
12001, 12098
10037, 10698
10625, 10714, 10560
10618
Siemens
Siera
10037, 10195
10556, 10037
10037
Profitronic
Proline
Svasa
10208
10037, 10625, 10634,
11037
Saba
Silva
Swisstec
Sylvania
11614, 11775
Sagem
Saivod
Salora
Sampo
Silva Schneider
Silver
10037
10171, 11394, 11864,
11886
Prosonic
10037, 10714, 10668,
11324, 11585, 11667,
11709, 12001
10037, 10668, 11037
10208, 12001
10715
SilverCrest
Sinudyne
SKY
11037
Symphonic
Synco
10171, 11394
10178, 11755
11610
10178, 10171, 10650,
11755
10037
Protech
Proton
10037, 10668, 11037
10178
10037, 11614, 11775
10037, 10698
11324
Syntax
Sysline
Tacico
Talent
Samsung
10178, 10556, 10037,
10618, 10650, 10208,
12051
Skyworth
Sliding
SLX
10037
ProVision
10556, 10037, 10714,
11324
10178
Pvision
Pye
12001
10668
10178
Sansui
Sanyo
10171, 10037, 10714,
11248, 12001
10556, 10037
10208
Solavox
Soniko
Soniq
10037
Tashiko
Tatung
TCL
10650
Qingdao
Quasar
Quelle
10037
10037, 11248, 11324
11037, 10508, 10208,
11142, 11365, 11585,
11667, 11974
10650
12493
10698, 12403, 12429,
12434, 13183
10037, 10668, 10195,
11037, 10512
Sonitron
Sonneclair
Sonoko
Sonolor
Sontec
10208
SBR
10556, 10037
TCM
Teac
10714, 12001
10037
R-Line
10037
Schaub Lorenz
10714, 11324, 11363,
11667, 12001
10178, 10171, 10037,
10714, 10668, 11037,
10698, 10512, 11248,
11363, 11709, 11755
10037
Radiola
10556, 10037
10037
10208
Schneider
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037
Radiomarelli
RadioShack
Radiotone
RCA
10037
10178, 10037
10037, 10668, 11037
Sony
10810, 11505, 11167,
11651, 11825
Tec
10037
Schoentech
Scotch
Scott
11037
Tech Line
Technica
Technics
Technika
TechniSat
Technisson
Techno
10037, 10668
11037
10178
10178, 11454, 10625,
10560, 10618, 11781,
12247, 12403, 12429,
12434, 12746, 12932
Soundesign
Soundwave
Sowa
10178
10178
10037, 11037, 10715
10178
10556, 10650
11667
Sears
10178, 10171
10634
Seaway
Seelver
SEG
Squareview
Standard
Starlite
10171
Realistic
Recor
10178
10037
10037
10037
10556
11037
10037, 11037, 11709
10037
10714, 11652
11585
10037, 10668, 11037,
12719
Rectiligne
Redstar
Strato
10037
SEI
10037
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Television
Television
Toyoda
Television
VU
VCR
Technosonic
10556, 10625, 10499,
11324
11709
11365, 12098
11667
Humax
Panasonic
Philips
20739
TRANS-continents
10556, 10037, 10668,
11037
Walker
Waltham
Wansa
20614, 20616
20739
Techvision
Techwood
Tecnimagen
Teco
11709
10037, 10668, 11037
12098
11037, 11667
10556
Transonic
10037, 10698, 10512,
11363
ReplayTV
Sonic Blue
Sony
20614, 20616
20614, 20616
20636
Wards
10178
Triad
10556
10178, 10653
10208, 11709
10150
Watson
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037
Trio
11248
Tedelex
TiVo
20636, 20739
Triumph
TVTEXT 95
Uher
10556, 10037
10556
Teknika
Wega
10037
TELE System
Telecor
11585
Welltech
Weltstar
10714, 11652
11037
PVR
10037
10037
DirecTV
Go Video
Humax
Panasonic
Philips
20739
Ultravox
UMC
10037
Telefunken
10037, 10625, 10714,
10560, 10698, 11585,
11667
Westinghouse
Wharfedale
11755
20614
11614, 11775
10037
10556, 10037, 11324,
11667
20739
Unic Line
Uniden
United
20614, 20616
20739
Telefusion
Telegazi
Telemeister
Telesonic
Telestar
10037
12122
White Westinghouse 10037
10037
10556, 10037, 10714,
11037, 10715, 11652
Wilson
10556
ReplayTV
Sonic Blue
Sony
20614, 20616
20614, 20616
20636
10037
Windsor
Windy Sam
Wintel
10668, 11037
10556
10037
Unitek
11709
10556, 10037
10037, 10668, 11037
10037
Universal
Universum
10037, 10714
10714
TiVo
20636, 20739
Teletech
Teleview
Tennessee
Tensai
10037, 10668, 10195,
11037, 10618, 10512
World-of-Vision
Wyse
12001
11365
TV/VCR Combination
Univox
10037
10037
Xenius
10634
Amstrad
Ferguson
Fidelity
GoldStar
Grundig
LG
10171
V7 Videoseven
Vestel
11666, 11755
10037, 11037, 10715
Xiahua
10698
10625
10037, 10668, 11037,
11585, 11667
Tesla
10556, 10037, 10714,
11037, 11652
XLogic
10698
10171
Xrypton
Yamaha
Yamishi
Yokan
10037
10037
Vexa
10037
Tevion
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 11248,
11585, 11667
10650, 11576
10037
10556, 10037, 10195
10178
Victor
10650, 10653, 11428
10037, 10508
10037
Videocon
VideoSystem
Vidtech
10037
Mitsubishi
Philips
Radiola
Saba
10556
Thomson
Thorn
10037, 10625, 10560
10037, 10499, 10512
10499
Yoko
10037
10556, 10037
10556
10178
YU-MA-TU
Zenith
10037
Thorn-Ferguson
TMK
Viewsonic
11365, 11564, 11755,
12049
10178, 10037, 11365,
11423, 12358
10625
10178
Sanyo
11974
Tokai
10037, 10668, 11037
11037
Vision
Vistron
Vivax
10037
Zepto
Zonda
11585
10698
Schneider
Sharp
10556, 10037
10818
Tokaido
Topline
Toshiba
11363
10668, 11037
11709
Siemens
Sony
10037
10195, 11037, 10618,
10650, 10508, 11169,
11508, 11524, 11652,
12203
Vizio
11758, 12209
10037
VCR
11505
Vortec
Voxson
DirecTV
Go Video
20739
20614
Teac
10178, 10171
10178, 10037
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
TV/VCR Combination
DVD
DVD
DVD
Technics
Thomson
10556
Dantax
Denon
30539, 30713
Harman/Kardon
Henss
30582, 31229, 33228
30713
Maxim
MDS
30713
10625
30490, 30634, 31634,
32258, 32748
30713
Hitachi
30573, 30713, 31664
30713
Medion
Memorex
Metz
30630, 30741
32213
Dick Smith
Electronics
31152
DVD
Hoeher
3D LAB
Accurian
Acoustic Solutions
AEG
30539
30675
30713
HotMedia
Humax
31152
30571, 30713
30503, 30539
30539
Digihome
DigiLogic
Digix Media
Disney
30713
30646
Micromedia
Micromega
Microsoft
Minax
30713
Inno Hit
Insignia
30713
31394
30675
30741, 30675, 32428,
32596
30522, 32083
30713
30675
AFK
31152
DSE
30675, 31152
30713
Integra
30503, 30571, 30627,
31612, 31634, 32147
Aiwa
30533
Mitsubishi
Momitsu
NAD
30713
Dual
Akai
30675
30539, 30713
33052
33052
Durabrand
Dynex
30675, 30713
32596
Irradio
JVC
30646
Alba
30741
30867, 31597, 31602,
32855
Ambiance
Amstrad
Anthem
Aristona
ASDA
NEC
30741, 31602
Dyon
33052
30713
Onkyo
30503, 30627, 31612,
32147, 30571, 31634
eBench
Elfunk
31152
32820
Kendo
Kennex
Kenwood
Lenco
Lexicon
LG
30713
30713
Oppo
30575, 32545
30713
30539, 30646
32213
30713
30713
Elite
31152
Orion
30490, 30534
30713, 33052
32545
Emerson
EuroLine
Ferguson
Finlux
30675, 32213
30675
Ormond
Pacific
30713
Audix
30713
Autovox
Awa
30713
30713
Palladium
Panasonic
30713
32587
30741, 31602
33052
30741
30503, 30490, 31579,
31641, 32523, 32710,
32859
Basic Line
Bel Canto Design
Black Diamond
Blue Parade
Blue Sky
Brandt
30713
31571
Limit
Firstline
Foehn & Hirsch
Funai
30713
Lodos
Loewe
30713
33052
30713
30539, 30741, 32474,
32783
Pelican Accessories
Philco
30533
30675
30675
30571
GE
30522
30713
Logik
30713
Philips
30503, 30539, 30646,
30675, 30713, 31340,
31354, 32056, 32084,
32434, 32689
GFM
30675
30503
30713
31152
Lumatron
Lunatron
Luxman
Luxor
30741, 30713
30741
Global Sphere
Go Video
GoldStar
Goodmans
GPX
31152
Bush
30741
C-Tech
30573
30741
Pioneer
30571, 30142, 30631,
31571, 32442, 32860
California Audio Labs 30490
30713
30713, 31152
30741
Cambridge Audio
Centrum
32808
Magnavox
30503, 30539, 30646,
30675, 30713, 31354
Polk Audio
Presidian
ProAudio
Proscan
Proson
30539
30675, 30713
30627
30675
Grandin
Grundig
H & B
30713
Manhattan
Marantz
30713
Changhong
Cinetec
31394
30539, 30713
30713
30539, 32414, 32432,
33444
30713
30522
Clatronic
Clayton
30675
Mark
30713
30713
30713
Haaz
31152
30713
Matsui
Pye
30539, 30646
Hanseatic
30741
Crown
30713
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
DVD
DVD
DVD
Blu-ray Disc
Sony
Radionette
Radiotone
RCA
30741
30713
Sylvania
Symphonic
Tamashi
Tandberg
Targa
30630, 30675
30675
Yamaha
30490, 30539, 30646,
30817, 31354, 32298,
32299
31516, 32180
30675
Sylvania
Toshiba
Vizio
30522, 30571, 32213,
32587
31394
32551, 32705, 33157
32563
Zenith
30503, 30741
30713
REC
30490
32213
31394
30713
30623
30741
30741
Yamaha
32298, 32299
Blu-ray Disc
Ambiance
Anthem
Red
Tchibo
TCL
30741
33052
Redstar
Roadstar
Rotel
DVD-R
Accurian
Aristona
Denon
32587
32820
30675
30646
30490
30675
30675
30741
30741
31664
30646
30646
31597
30741
30741
30646, 30675
30741
TCM
30741
Cambridge Audio
Denon
32808
Teac
30571, 30741, 30675,
31394
32258, 32748
33052
Salora
Samsung
Dyon
30490, 30573, 30199,
30820, 31635, 32069,
32329, 32489, 33195
Technica
Technics
Techwood
Teletech
30713
30490
30713
30713
30571
30522
Emerson
Funai
Foehn & Hirsch
Funai
33052
30675
Go Video
GPX
Sanyo
30713
Harman/Kardon
Insignia
33228
Schneider
Schoentech
Scott
30539, 30646, 30713
30713
30675, 32428, 32596
Theta Digital
Thomson
Toshiba
Hitachi
Humax
Irradio
JVC
Integra
32147, 32900, 32910,
33100, 33101, 33500,
33501
31394
30503, 31639, 32277,
32551, 32705, 33157
SEG
30713
JVC
32855
Semp
30503
Transonic
TVE
31394
LG
Lenco
33052
Sharp
30630, 30675, 30713,
32250, 32474, 32652,
32869
30713
Loewe
Magnavox
Medion
Panasonic
Lexicon
LG
32545
United
30675, 30713, 31152
30741, 30713
30503
30741, 31602
33052
Universum
Urban Concepts
Vestel
Sherwood
Shinsonic
Silva Schneider
SilverCrest
Skantic
30741, 33052
30533
Limit
30490, 31579, 32523,
32710, 32859
Loewe
Magnavox
Marantz
Momitsu
Onkyo
32474, 32783
30675
30713
30741
Victor
31597
Philips
Pioneer
Pye
30646, 31340
30631, 32860
30646
31152
32414, 32432, 33444
33052
Vizio
32563
30539, 30713
31152
Vtrek
32587
SM Electronic
Smart
32147, 32900, 32910,
33100, 33101, 33500,
33501
Waltham
Wellington
Weltstar
Wharfedale
Windsor
Windy Sam
Xbox
30713
RCA
30522
30713
30713
Samsung
Schneider
Sharp
30490, 31635
30646
Sony
30533, 30864, 31033,
31070, 31431, 31516,
31633, 32180
30713
Oppo
32545
30713
Panasonic
Philips
31641, 32523, 32859
32084, 32434, 32689
30142, 32442
30199, 33195
32250, 32474, 32652
33052
30630, 30675, 32869
Soundwave
Star Clusters
Strato
30713
31152
31152
30713
31152
30713
Sony
31033, 31070, 31431,
31516, 31633, 32180
30573
Pioneer
Samsung
Sharp
Sylvania
Targa
30675
30522, 32083
31152
30741
Strong
XLogic
Toshiba
31639, 32277, 32551
Supervision
Sherwood
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
DVD-R
Victor
TV/DVD Combination
31597
30646
30741
Magnavox
Matsui
12372
Yamaha
Zenith
11037, 30713
12719
Medion
Nordmende
Odys
12001
HD-DVD
Integra
LG
12719
32901, 33104 33504
30741
Panasonic
Philips
12170
11454, 10556, 11394,
30539
Microsoft
Onkyo
Xbox
32083
Powerpoint
Prosonic
Pvision
RCA
10698
32901, 33104 33504
32083
12001
12001
TV/DVD Combination
Akai
12746, 12932
12001
11675
Schaub Lorenz
SEG
Black Diamond
Blue Sky
11037, 30713
11037, 30713
11037, 12719, 30713
10818
Sharp
Bush
11037, 10698, 12719,
30713
Soniq
12493
Sunstech
Sylvania
12001
Centrum
Crown
DMTech
Dual
11037, 30713
11037, 30713
12001
10171, 11394, 11864,
11886, 30630, 30675
Teac
10698
11037, 30713
12049
Technica
Telefunken
Teletech
Thomson
Toshiba
United
11037, 30713
10698
Dynex
Elfunk
Emerson
11037, 30713
11037, 30713
10625
11394, 11864, 11886,
30675
11524
Ferguson
Goodmans
Grandin
Grundig
H & B
11037, 30713
11037, 30713
30713
11037, 30713
30713
Universum
Vestel
11037
30539
Viewsonic
Weltstar
12049
12001
11037, 30713
Hanseatic
Hitachi
Insignia
JVC
12001
11037, 11667, 30713
12049
12271
LG
11423
Logik
11037, 30713
11037, 30713
Luxor
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
MTD Log Splitter 242 635A User Manual
NAD Stereo Receiver L 76 User Manual
NDC comm Network Router NWE9251 User Manual
NEC Flat Panel Television NLT 40W User Manual
Nuvo Speaker System E6G User Manual
Omron Healthcare Blood Pressure Monitor OMRON MX3 Plus User Manual
Onkyo Universal Remote USR 5RF User Manual
Panasonic Indoor Furnishings EFA13E27L User Manual
Panasonic Network Card 2SA2161J User Manual
Panasonic Network Card AW PH360N User Manual